Service Manual DI4750

Di750
SERVICE MANUAL
[FIELD SERVICE]
Dual references may be used on the following:
EDH–2 : RADF
FN–104 : FNS
FN–4 : FNS
Cover Inserter A : PI
In-System Writer : ISW
C–305 : LT and LCT
1 ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ................. 1.ADJUSTMENT
Refer to the Di750 Service Manual [GENERAL] HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ................................... 1-1
on page C-1 [1] Scope and Precautions ................................. 1-1
ADJUSTMENTS MADE WHEN
REPLACING PARTS ................................................. 1-2
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS ................................ 1-3
LCD ADJUSTMENT ................................................... 1-5
[1] LCD Touch Panel Adjustment ....................... 1-5
[2] LCD Contrast/Buzzer Adjustment ................. 1-5
2 ISW
SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS MADE WITH THE
P FUNCTION ............................................................. 1-6
[1] Selecting and Canceling the P Function ....... 1-6
MODE CHANGING MENU ........................................ 1-6
[1] Mode Selection .............................................. 1-6
25 MODE ................................................................... 1-7
[1] Selecting and Canceling the 25 Mode .......... 1-7
[2] Setting Software DIP Switches ..................... 1-7
[3] Setting the Tray Size ................................... 1-18
[4] PM Count Resetting .................................... 1-19
3 SERVICE
[5] Setting the PM Cycle ................................... 1-19
[6] Collecting Data ............................................ 1-20
[7] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced
(Fixed Parts) ................................................ 1-44
(Optional Parts) ........................................... 1-47
[9] Setting Passwords ....................................... 1-48
[10] Setting the Telephone Number and/or Fax
Number of the Service Center ..................... 1-49
4 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST

[11] Displaying and Setting the Serial Number .. 1-49
[12] Displaying the ROM Version ....................... 1-50
[13] List of Adjustment Items in the 25 Mode .... 1-51
36 MODE ................................................................. 1-52
[1] Setting Method ............................................ 1-52
[2] High Voltage Adjustment ............................. 1-52
[3] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment ....................... 1-54
[4] Drum Characteristic Adjustment (manual) .. 1-58
[5] User Specified Paper Setting ...................... 1-58
[6] Recall Standard Data (Process Adjustment)1-59
[7] Tray Adjustment ........................................... 1-59
[8] Magnification Adjustment ............................ 1-60
[9] Timing Adjustment ....................................... 1-63
[10] RADF Adjustment ........................................ 1-67
[11] Centering Adjustment .................................. 1-69
[12] Warp Adjustment (Copier) ........................... 1-71
[13] Recall Standard Data (Image Adjustment) . 1-72
[14] Running Test Mode ..................................... 1-72
[15] Test Pattern Output ...................................... 1-73
[16] Test Pattern Density Setting ........................ 1-80
[17] List Output Mode ......................................... 1-80
47 MODE .................................................................. 1-81
[1] 47 Mode/Multi Mode Setting Method .......... 1-81
[2] Initial Set ...................................................... 1-83
[3] 47 Mode/Multi Mode Setting Method .......... 1-83
[4] Input checklist .............................................. 1-84
[5] Output checklist ........................................... 1-89
1 ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS ......................................... 1-93 [32] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the Stapler- Rota-
[1] Centering Adjustment .................................. 1-93 tion Timing Belt .......................................... 1-130
[2] Paper up/down plate centering adjustment 1-95 [33] FNS Adjusting the Folding Force
[3] Skew Adjustment ......................................... 1-98 (FN-4 only) ................................................. 1-131
[4] Tray Spring Pressure Adjustment ............... 1-99 [34] Cover Inserter A Adjusting the Size of the
[5] Paper Feed Height (Upper Limit) Coversheet-Tray Width Regulation
Adjustment ................................................. 1-100 Plates ......................................................... 1-131
[6] Pick-up Release Amount Adjustment ........ 1-103
[7] RADF Mounting Position Adjustment ........ 1-105 2.ISW
2 ISW
[8] RADF Skew Adjustment ............................ 1-106 WHAT IS ISW ? ......................................................... 2-1
[9] RADF Paper Skew Adjustment ................. 1-107 SETUP ....................................................................... 2-2
[10] RADF Hinge Spring Pressure Adjustment 1-109 [1] ISW-compatible boards ................................. 2-2
[11] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on Conveyance [2] Data flow ........................................................ 2-2
Guide Plate B ............................................ 1-110 [3] Ready up the copier to start an ISW transfer 2-2
[12] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on Conveyance [4] HELP + CHECK mode operation flow ........... 2-4
Guide Plate C ............................................ 1-111 [5] Operating procedure ..................................... 2-6
[13] FNS Adjusting the Sub-tray Paper [6] Preparing the copier to transfer .................. 2-10
Exit Gate .................................................... 1-112 [7] Relationships between processing states
[14] FNS Adjusting the Paper-Path Switching and operational LEDs .................................. 2-11
3 SERVICE
Gate ........................................................... 1-113 [8] Rewriting procedure after an error

[15] FNS Adjusting the By-pass Gate .............. 1-114 interruption ................................................... 2-11
[16] FNS Adjusting the Shift Position ............... 1-116 [9] Making the ISW connector and the power
[17] FNS Adjusting Opening/Closing at the connector available ...................................... 2-12
Paper Exit .................................................. 1-117 [10] Kinds and quantities of update ROMs ........ 2-12
[18] FNS Adjusting the Paper Exit-Opening
Solenoid ..................................................... 1-118 3.SERVICE
[19] FNS Adjusting the Paper Exit-Opening
CE TOOL LIST ........................................................... 3-1
Lower Guide Plate ..................................... 1-119
[20] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the Stacker

Paper Exit Belt ........................................... 1-120
4.ELECTRIC PARTSLIST
Di750 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING ... 4-1
[21] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location of the
[1] Read Section/Operational Section ................ 4-1
Upper Alignment Plates ............................. 1-120
[2] Charging Corona Wire Unit ........................... 4-1
[22] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the Upper-
[3] Drum Unit ....................................................... 4-2
Alignment-Plate Drive Timing Belt ............. 1-121
[4] Cleaning Unit ................................................. 4-2
[23] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location of the
[5] Tray 1,2,3 ...................................................... 4-3
Lower Alignment Plates (FN-4 only) ......... 1-122
[6] Vertical Conveyance Section ........................ 4-3
[24] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the Lower-
[7] By-pass Feed Section ................................... 4-4
Alignment-Plate Drive Timing Belt
[8] Second Paper Feed Section ......................... 4-4
(FN-4 only) ................................................. 1-123
[9] ADU Unit ........................................................ 4-5
[25] FNS Adjusting the Stapling Position
[10] Fixing Unit ...................................................... 4-6
(Flat Stapling) ............................................ 1-123
[11] Paper Exit Section ......................................... 4-6
[26] FNS Adjusting the Stapler Vertical
[12] Toner Supply Unit .......................................... 4-7
Positioning ................................................. 1-124
[13] Write Section ................................................. 4-7
[27] FNS Adjusting the Angle of the Folding
[14] Control/Drive Unit in Rear Section ................ 4-8
Stopper (FN-4 only) ................................... 1-126
Di750 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ............... 4-9
[28] FNS Adjusting the Staple Position (Stapling-
[1] Read Section ................................................. 4-9
and-Folding) (FN-4 only) ........................... 1-127
[2] Charging Corona Wire Unit ........................... 4-9
[29] FNS Adjusting the Angle of the Folding
[3] Drum Unit ..................................................... 4-10
Stopper (FN-4 only) ................................... 1-128
[4] Cleaning Unit ............................................... 4-10
[30] FNS Adjusting the Folding-Stopper Positions
[5] Tray 1,2,3 .................................................... 4-11
(FN-4 only) ................................................. 1-129
[6] Vertical Conveyance Section ...................... 4-11
[31] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the Stapler-
[7] By-pass Feed Section ................................. 4-12
Movement Timing Belt ............................... 1-130
[8] Second Paper Feed Section ....................... 4-12
[9] ADU Unit ...................................................... 4-13
[10] Fixing Unit .................................................... 4-14
1 ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
[11] Paper Exit Section ....................................... 4-14

[12] Toner Supply Unit ........................................ 4-15
[13] Write Section ............................................... 4-15
[14] Printer Control Board .................................. 4-16
[15] Power Supply Management Board ............. 4-16
[16] Image Control Board ................................... 4-16
[17] ICB I/F Board ............................................... 4-17
[18] ADU Stand Drive Board .............................. 4-17
[19] DC Drive Board ........................................... 4-18
2 ISW
[20] AC Drive Board ........................................... 4-18
[21] DC Power Supply Unit 1 ............................. 4-18
[22] DC Power Supply Unit 2 ............................. 4-18
[23] Scanner Drive Board ................................... 4-19
[24] High Voltage Unit 1 ..................................... 4-19
[25] High Voltage Unit 2 ..................................... 4-19
[26] Jam Indicator Board .................................... 4-19
[27] L1 Inverter ................................................... 4-19
[28] Drum Potential Sensor Board ..................... 4-19
[29] Drum Temperature Sensor Board ............... 4-20
3 SERVICE
[30] Operation Board 1 ....................................... 4-20
[31] Operation Board 2 ....................................... 4-20
[32] Optional I/F Board ....................................... 4-20
[33] OB Inverter ................................................... 4-20
[34] Toner Control Sensor Board ....................... 4-20
[35] Index Sensor Board .................................... 4-21
[36] A/D Converter Board ................................... 4-21
[37] Laser Driver Board 1/2 ................................ 4-21
[38] Polygon Motor Drive Board ......................... 4-21

[39] Memory Board ............................................. 4-21
[40] LAN I/F Board .............................................. 4-21
JAM CODE LIST ...................................................... 4-22
ERROR CODE LIST ................................................ 4-33
Di750 TIMING CHART (A4, LIFE SIZE, TWO ORIGI-
NALS, TWO SHEETS SET, TRAY 1) ....................... 4-61
Di750 TIMING CHART (8.5 x 11, LIFE SIZE, TWO
ORIGINALS, TWO SHEETS SET, TRAY 1) ............. 4-62
4 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST 3 SERVICE 2 ISW 1 ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
1
ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION

[1] Scope and Precautions 4. Take care not to damage the drum with tools and
This section provides detailed information about the so on.
adjustment items and procedures. Before addressing 5. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
customer complaints, perform the following checks:
1. Check whether the power supply voltage meets

the specifications.
2. Check whether the power supply is properly
grounded.
3. Check whether this machine shares the power
supply with any other machine that draws large
current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air con-
ditioner that produce electrical noise).
4. Check whether the installation environment is
good.
a. The machine must be installed in a properly
ventilated area not exposed to high tempera-
ture, high humidity, and direct sunlight.
b. The machine must be installed on the horizon-
tal floor.
5. Check whether original has a problem to cause
the defective image.
6. Check whether the selected density value is cor-
rect.
7. Check whether the surface of the platen glass
and the bottom of the RADF are clean.
8. Check whether correct paper is used for copy-
ing.
9. Check whether copying materials and parts (e.g.,
developer, drum, and cleaning blade) are replen-
ished and replaced when they reach the end of
the useful life.
10. Check whether toner remains.
When servicing the machine, observe the following

precautions:
1. Only either side of the AC line is shut off when

the main power of this machine is turned off.
Always unplug the power cord before starting the
service work. If it is necessary to service the
machine with the power on, take care not to be
caught in the scanning gear of the exposure unit.
2. Special care should be taken when handling the
fixing unit because it operates at extremely high
temperatures.
3. The developing unit has a strong magnetic field.
Keep watches and measuring equipment away
from it.
1-1
1 ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENTS MADE WHEN REPLACING PARTS

Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not only
required when a customer complaint about the copy
image quality is received, but also after replacing or
reassembling parts.
[How to Read Tables]

Components of the tables used in this section are as
follows:
1. Mode
Adjustment mode to be selected.
[P] : P mode
[25] : 25 mode
[36] : 36 mode
[47] : 47 mode
2. Code
Code and copy quantity setting button used in
each mode.
3. Page
Page in the “ADJUSTMENT” section.
4. Circled numbers
1 , 2 … : Indicates adjustments (including
checks) must be made in order of prec-
edence.
(Circle without numeric character) :
Indicates adjustments (including
checks) can be made independently.
1-2
1 ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
Mode
Code
Page
Drum
Developer
High voltage unit
Write unit
Dust-proof glass
Each tray unit
Bypass paper feed unit
Paper up/down plate hoist wires
Tray pick-up solenoid
Registration roller
Registration unit
Registration dutch
Mis-centering detection sensor
ADU unit
Read unit
Fixing unit
Memory board
RADF unit
Finisher
1 Process High voltage High voltage auto 1-1-1 1-53
adjustment adjustment adjustment
2 Drum peculiarity Blade setting mode 1-2-1 1-54 1
adjustment Auto drum potential
3
adjustment 1-2-2 1-55 2 1
4 Auto maximum density
adjustment 1-2-3 1-55 3 2 2 2
5 Auto dot diameter
adjustment 1-2-4 1-56 4 3 1 1
6 LD1 offset adjustment 1-2-5 1-56 5 4
7 LD2 offset adjustment 1-2-6 1-57 6 5
8 Auto gamma adjustment 1-2-7 1-58 7 6 3 3
9 Image Tray adjustment 2-1 1-59
adjustment Magnification Printer drum clock
10
adjustment adjustment 2-3-1 1-60
11 Printer horizontal
adjustment 2-3-2 1-61
12 Scanner drum clock
2-3-3 1-61
adjustment
13 RADF drum clock
adjustment 2-3-4 1-62 ( )
14 Timing Printer restart timing
adjustment adjustment 2-4-1 1-63
15 Printer resist loop
16 Printer pre-resist
adjustment 36 2-4-3 1-64
17 Printer lead edge timing
2-4-4 1-65
adjustment
18 Scanner restart timing
19 RADF restart timing

20 RADF resist loop
21 RADF RADF density adjustment 2-5-1 1-67 ( )
adjustment RADF original size
22 2-5-2 1-68
adjustment
23 RADF sensitivity adjustment 2-5-3 1-68
24 RADF incline offset
25 Centering Printer centering
2-6-1 1-70
adjustment adjustment
26 Scanner centering
27 RADF centering
28 Warp Scanner (platen) warp adj. (Main) 2-8 1-71
adjustment Scanner (platen) warp adj. (Deputy) 2-8 1-71
29 (Copier)
30 Scanner (RADF) warp adj. (Main) 2-8 1-71
31 Scanner (RADF) warp adj. (Deputy) 2-8 1-71
1-3
1 ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT
Mode
Code
Page
Drum
Toner (developer)
High voltage unit
Write unit
Dust-proof glass
Each tray unit
Bypass paper feed unit
Paper up/down plate wires
Tray pick-up roller unit drive solenoid
Registration roller
Registration unit
Registration dutch
Mis-centering detection sensor
ADU unit
Read unit
Fixing unit
Memory board
RADF unit
Finisher
32 Finisher Center bind stopper position adjustment 6-1
33 adjustment Center fold stopper position adjustment 6-2
36
34 Cover sheet tray size adjustment 6-4 1-131
35 Cutting stopper position adjustment
36 Tray centering adjustment 1-93~94
37 Paper up/down plate horizontal adjustment 1-96~97
38 Skew adjustment 1-98
39 Tray spring pressure adjustment 1-99~100
40 Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment 1-100~102
41 Pick-up release amount adjustment 1-103~104
42 Alignment with pick-up unit
43 AC and DC drawer positioning
44 ADU gate gap adjustment
45 RADF mounting position adjustment 1-105
46 RADF hinge spring pressure adjustment 1-109
47 RADF distortion adjustment
48 Drum count reset 25 5-1-3 1-22
* When adjustments must be made in order of precedence, numbers will be shown in circles.
Cautions:
• When a damaged control board is replaced, the memory board on this board must be used on the new
control board.
Only when the memory board is also damaged, use a new memory board on a new control board.
Since the new memory board does not have adjustment data, the above adjustments are required.
Before making the above adjustments, make the “47-92” setting to make the new memory board
effective.
• After making any adjustment, make the “”47-96” setting so that this adjustment value can be restored
simply by making the “47-93” setting even if another adjustment is made later.
• Various adjustments (stapling stopper position adjustment, folding stopper position adjustment) must
be made to the FNS (FN-4) and an adjustment (cover sheet tray size adjustment) must be made to the
PI (Cover Inserter A).
1-4
1 ADJUSTMENT
LCD ADJUSTMENT
LCD ADJUSTMENT
[1] LCD Touch Panel Adjustment [2] LCD Contrast/Buzzer Adjustment
Enter the key operator mode and select "10: LCD touch Enter the key operator mode and select "7: LCD
panel adjustment" to adjust the LCD touch panel. contrast/buzzer adjustment" to adjust the contrast,
If you cannot select the touch panel adjustment mode backlight, and/or buzzer as desired.
after entering the key operator mode because the touch
panel is displaced absolutely, press numeric keys to
select "10: LCD touch panel adjustment."
1-5
1 ADJUSTMENT
P ADJUSTMENT
SETTINGS AND MODE CHANGING

ADJUSTMENTS MADE MENU
WITH THE P FUNCTION [1] Mode Selection
The P function allows you to perform following checks You can select a mode from the following [Mode
using the Utility button: changing menu: Select mode] without turning the
power switch ON and OFF.
• Total counter [1 ] Basic screen
• Copy counter [2 ] 3-6 mode
• Print counter [3] 2-5 mode
* PM counter [4] Key operator mode
* PM counter is only displayed when Check key [5] 4-7 mode
is pressed on the counter list view screen.
This section explains the checks that can be performed

by customer engineers. For the checks that can be
performed by customers, see the “OPERATION” sec-
tion.
[1] Selecting and Cancelling the P

Function
Step Operation
a. Turn ON the main switch. 1 Turn on the main power switch.
b. Press the Utility button. 2 Press Utility button and wait until [Enter
c. Counter list is displayed. password for mode selection] message
d. Using the quantity setting button, enter the appears.
desired number according to the message 3 Enter the password 9272 and press the
displayed on the operation panel. Copy button.
e. Press the START PRINT button to check the Note that this password is fixed and can
data displayed in the message area, or output not be changed.
user data. The Mode changing menu appears.
f. Press the End button. 4 Enter the number to select the desired
mode.
5 To return to the [Mode changing menu],
press Utility button and wait until the menu
appears again.
6 Upon completion of the adjustment, press
[1] Basic screen button to return to the
Basic screen.
1-6
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
[1] Selecting and Cancelling the 25 [2] Setting Software DIP Switches
Mode 1. Procedure
This machine has an adjustment mode called the “25 Bring up the Software DIP SW Setting screen
Mode.” Select this mode to rewrite data in the nonvola- and set software DIP switches.
tile memory or make various settings.
Step Operation
1. Turn OFF the main switch.
1 Enter the 25 mode.
2. While pressing the copy quantity setting buttons 2
2 [25 Mode Menu Screen]
and 5, turn ON the main switch.
Select 1 Software DIP SW setting.
The 25 Mode Menu screen will appear.
3 [Software DIP SW Setting Screen]
Now the machine is in the 25 mode, disabling normal
Select a DIP switch number.
copy operations.
Use the or button at the left.
[25 Mode Menu screen]
To use numeric keys, invert the DIP
switch number at the left before entering
a DIP switch number.
4 Select a bit number of the selected DIP
switch.
Use the or button at the right.
To use numeric keys, invert the bit
number at the upper center before
entering a DIP switch number.
5 Select ON (= 1) or OFF (= 0) of the
switch.
Use the ON or OFF button.
Pressing the ON button turns ON the
bit.
Pressing the OFF button turns OFF the
bit.
6 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN button to
return to the 25 Mode Menu screen.
For functions of individual software DIP switches,

3. Press the numeric button of the desired setting
see “List of Software Switches.”
item.
The associated setting screen will appear.
4. Enter data in the setting screen.
5. Turning OFF the main switch cancels the 25
mode.
6. New data will take effect after restart.
1-7
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
< List of Software Switches >
Initial Value
DIPSW No. Bit Function 0 1 North
Japan Europe
America
0 Condition for stopping copying after *1 *1 1 1 1
indication of toner supply
1 Ditto *1 *1 0 0 0
2 Method for stopping copying after *2 *2
indication of toner supply 1 1 1
DIPSW 1 3 Ditto *2 *2 0 0 0
4 Inhibition of copying when PM count is Not inhibited Inhibited 0 0 0
reached
5 Number of copies made before inhibition *3 *3 0 0 0
of copying
6 Ditto *3 *3 0 0 0
7 Ditto *3 *3 0 0 0
0 – – – – – –
1 Electrode cleaning cycle (before starting *4 *4 0 0 0
work every morning)
2 Ditto *4 *4 0 0 0
DIPSW 2 3 Ditto *4 *4 0 0 0
4 Electrode cleaning cycle (after printout) *5 *5 0 0 0
5 Ditto *5 *5 0 0 0
6 Blade replacement count *6 *6 0 0 0
7 Ditto *6 *6 0 0 0
0 – – – – – –
1 SC latch Unatched Latched 0 0 0
2 25, 36, 47 mode password request Not requested Requested 0 0 0
(password: 9272)
DIPSW 3 3 Charging corona unit cleaning function ON Off 0 0 0
4 Transfer /separation corona unit cleaning ON Off 0 0 0
function
5 Blade replacement request Not requested Requested 0 0 0
6 47 mode 15-01 data collection clearing Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
7 – – –
0 ADF skewed image correction enabled/ Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
disabled
1 Inhibition of post card/thick paper/double Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
side
DIPSW 4 2 Destination selection *7 *7 0 1 0
3 Ditto *7 *7 0 0 1
4 – – – – – –
5 InhibitionofmagnifiedAPS(Japan/Europe) Enabled Disabled 0 1 0
6 Fixed magnification rate setting change Enabled Disabled 1 0 0
7 A3 (11 x 17) counting method Incremented by 1 Incrementedby2 0 0 0
1-8
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Initial Value
Japan Europe
America
0 Toner concentration threshold *8 *8 0 0 0
1 Ditto *8 *8 0 0 0
2 – – – – – –
DIPSW 5 3 – – – – – –
4 2 dot PWM table in photo mode *9 *9 0 0 0
5 Ditto *9 *9 1 1 1
6 – – – – – –
7 – – – – – –
0 Transfer/separation corona unit output * 10 * 10 0 0 0
for plain paper
1 Ditto * 10 * 10 0 0 0
2 Ditto * 10 * 10 0 0 0
DIPSW 6 for thick paper
4 Ditto * 11 * 11 0 0 0
for thin paper
6 Ditto * 12 * 12 0 0 0
7 Potential control (Note 1) Performed Not performed 0 0 0
0 – – – – – –
1 – – – – – –
2 – – – – – –
3 – – – – – –
DIPSW 7 4 – – – – – –
for recycled paper
6 Ditto * 13 * 13 0 0 0
7 Ditto * 13 * 13 0 0 0
0 Fixing temperature setting switchover * 14 * 14 0 0 0
1 Ditto * 14 * 14 0 0 0
2 Fixing upper roller initial rotation * 15 * 15 0 0 1
DIPSW 8 3 Ditto * 15 * 15 0 0 0
4 Fixing upper roller initial rotation time * 16 * 16 0 0 0
5 Ditto * 16 * 16 0 0 0
6 A3(11x17) PM counter switch 1 count 2 count 0 0 0
7 – – – – – –
0 – – – – – –
1 – – – – – –
2 Copy card message * 17 * 17 0 0 0
DIPSW 9 3 Ditto * 17 * 17 0 0 0
4 Copy count limit * 18 * 18 0 0 0
5 Ditto * 18 * 18 0 0 0
6 Ditto * 18 * 18 0 0 0
7 Ditto * 18 * 18 0 0 0
1-9
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Initial Value
Japan Europe
America
0 – – – – – –
1 – – – – – –
2 – – – – – –
DIPSW 10 3 – – – – – –
4 – – – – – –
5 – – – – – –
6 – – – – – –
7 – – – – – –
0 SC detection Detected Not detected 0 0 0
1 Post card bypass feed (Note 2) Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
2 – – – – – –
3 SC/E code screen switchover Switched Not switched 0 0 0
DIPSW 11 4 Selection of filter for jagged edges on Not selected Selected 0 0 0
slanting lines
5 Image quality mode selection * 19 * 19 0 0 0
6 Ditto * 19 * 19 0 0 0
7 Jam indication screen type Without jam With jam code 0 0 0
code
0 Black band print interval Every10copies Every50copies 0 0 0
1 – – – – – –
2 Operating jam detection Detected Not detected 0 0 0
DIPSW 12 3 Printer centering adjustment Adjusted Not adjusted 0 0 0
4 HV manual adjustment output Output Not output 0 0 0
5 – – – – – –
6 – – – – – –
7 γ selection γ conversion γ conversion 0 0 0
made not made
0 Size detection 1 A5 5.5 x 8.5 0 1 0
1 Size detection 2 A4R 8.5 x 11R 0 1 0
2 Size detection 3 8.5 x 14 F4 0 0 1
DIPSW 13 3 Size detection 4 * 20 * 20 0 0 0
4 Ditto * 20 * 20 0 1 0
5 F4 size detection * 21 * 21 0 0 0
6 Ditto * 21 * 21 0 0 0
7 – – – – – –
1 - 10
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Initial Value
Japan Europe
America
0 Size detection 5 (main unit) B4 · 11 x 17/ 8K/16K 0 0 0
B5 · 8.5 x 11
1 – – – – – –
2 – – – – – –
3 Size detection 5 (bypass feed) B4 · 11 x 17/ 8K/16K 0 0 0
DIPSW 14 B5 · 8.5 x 11
4 Size detection 5 (platen) B4 · 11 x 17/ 8K/16K 0 0 0
B5 · 8.5 x 11
5 Size detection 5 (ADF) B4 · 11 x 17/ 8K/16K 0 0 0
B5 · 8.5 x 11
6 – – – – – –
7 – – – – – –
0 – – –
1 Maximum number of sheets that can be stapled * 22 * 22 – – –
2 Ditto * 22 * 22 0 0 0
3 FNS alarm stop SW * 23 * 23 0 0 0
DIPSW 15 4 Ditto * 23 * 23 0 0 0
5
6 Dmax. value in printer mode 1.35 1.42 0 0 0
7 PWM selection for 1-bit ED 230 255 0 0 0
0 Non-image area automatic erasure Rectangular Tilted erasure 1 0 0
method erasure
1 Dual inhibition Reservation Reservation 0 0 0
enabled disabled
2 – – – – – –
DIPSW 16 3 C(K) counting in printer mode Counted Not counted
4 TC start date indication Indicated Not indicated
5 Non-original area automatic erasure * 24 * 24 0 0 0
mode judgement level
6 Ditto * 24 * 24 0 0 0
7 Ditto * 24 * 24 0 0 0
0 WT summer time setting * 25 * 25 0 0 0
1 Ditto * 25 * 25 1 1 1
2 Ditto * 25 * 25 1 1 1
DIPSW 17 3 Ditto * 25 * 25 0 0 0
4 – – – – – –
5 – – – – – –
6 – – – – – –
7 – – – – – –
0 Tray 1's faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
DIPSW 18 3 Tray 4's (LCT's) faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
4 ADF faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
5 Folding, stapling and folding faulty part
isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
6 CF faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
7 – – – – – –
1 - 11
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Initial Value
Japan Europe
America
0 – – – – – –
1 – – – – – –
2 – – – – – –
DIPSW 19 3 – – – – – –
4 – – – – – –
5 – – – – – –
6 – – – – – –
7 – – – – – –
0 Group stapling Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
1 – – – – – –
2 – – – – – –
DIPSW 20 3 – – – – – –
4 – – – – – –
5 – – – – – –
6 – – – – – –
7 – – – – – –
0 – – – – – –
1 – – – – – –
DIPSW 21 2 – – – – – –
3 – – – – – –
4 – – – – – –
DIPSW 27 5 – – – – – –
6 – – – – – –
7 – – – – – –
0 – – – – – –
1 – – – – – –
2 – – – – – –
DIPSW 28 3 – – – – – –
4 – – – – – –
5 – – – – – –
6 – – – – – –
7 – – – – – –
0 – – – – – –
1 – – – – – –
2 – – – – – –
DIPSW 29 3 – – – – – –
4 – – – – – –
5 – – – – – –
6 – – – – – –
7 – – –
0 – – – – – –
1 25 mode collection data for 5-11 verification Display restriction Nodisplayrestriction 0 0 0
2 – – – – – –
DIPSW 30 3 – – – – – –
4 – – – – – –
5 – – – – – –
6 – – – – – –
7 – – – – – –
1 - 12
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Note 1: Bit 7 of DIP SW6 (potential control performed/not performed) is set to determine whether potential
control is to be performed using the drum potential sensor. This setting is used to check whether
the image quality has been deteriorated due to a faulty drum potential sensor.
Note 2: When feeding a postcard from the bypass paper feed tray, release timing of the paper feed roller
can be delayed to improve the paper feed capability.
1 - 13
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
* 1 Condition for stopping copying after indication of * 5 Electrode cleaning cycle (after printout)
toner supply request
Mode 2-5 2-4
Mode 1-1 1-0 Count 20,000 0 0
Stops after printing 1500 copies 0 0 Count 30,000 0 1
Stops after printing 5000 copies 1 1
* 6 Blade replacement count
* 2 Method for stopping copying after indication of
toner supply request Mode 2-7 2-6
Count 250,000 0 0
Mode 1-3 1-2 Count 300,000 0 1
Stops after ejecting the paper 0 0 Count 350,000 1 0
remaining in the machine Count 400,000 1 1
Stops after printing specified 0 1
number of copies * 7 Destination switchover
Stops at the end of the current 1 0
job Mode 4-3 4-2
Does not stop 1 1 Japan 0 0
USA 0 1
* 3 Number of copies made before inhibition of copying Europe 1 0
Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5

1,000 copies 0 0 0 * 8 Toner concentration threshold
2,000 copies 0 0 1 This bit sets the read level of the toner concen-
3,000 copies 0 1 0 tration patch formed on the drum to determine
4,000 copies 0 1 1 the toner concentration. The setting can be made
5,000 copies 1 0 0 by shifting the threshold of black patch to the posi-
1,000 copies 1 0 1 tive or negative side.
1,000 copies 1 1 0 • Standard –3 : The image becomes darker.
1,000 copies 1 1 1 • Standard +3 : The image becomes lighter.
• Standard +5 : The image becomes far
* 4 Electrode cleaning cycle (before work every lighter.
morning)
Mode 5-1 5-0
Mode 2-3 2-2 2-1 Standard 0 0
Clean work every 0 0 0 Standard –3 0 1
morning Standard +3 1 0
Count 5,000 0 0 1 Standard +5 1 1
Count 10,000 0 1 0
Count 15,000 0 1 1
Count 20,000 1 0 0
Count 25,000 1 0 1
Count 30,000 1 1 0
Need not clean every 1 1 1
morning
1 - 14
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
* 9 2 dot PWM table in photo mode * 13 Transfer/separation corona unit output for recy-
cled paper
Mode 5-5 5-4
1 dot PWM 0 0 Mode 7-7 7-6 7-5
Table 1 0 1 0 0 0
Table 2 1 0 55 kg plain paper (Japan) 0 0 1
Table 3 1 1 20 lb plain paper (USA) 0 1 0
80 g plain paper (Europe) 0 1 1
* 10 Transfer/separation corona unit output for plain pa- Recycled paper 1 (Japan) 1 0 0
per Recycled paper 2 (USA) 1 0 1
Recycled paper 3 (Europe) 1 1 0
Mode 6-2 6-1 6-0 Special paper 1 1 1
Not specified 0 0 0
55 kg plain paper (Japan) 0 0 1 * 14 Fixing temperature setting switchover
20 lb plain paper (USA) 0 1 0 This bit is used to change the fixing temperature
80 g plain paper (Europe) 0 1 1 when fixing is insufficient or paper is curled
Recycled paper 1 (Japan) 1 0 0 largely. This setting is effective only for plain pa-
Recycled paper 2 (USA) 1 0 1 per. It is not reflected in thick paper, thin paper,
Recycled paper 3 (Europe) 1 1 0 and preheat temperature.
Special paper 1 1 1 • Standard: Standard setting
• Standard +5°C: Select this setting when
* 11 Transfer/separation corona unit output for thick fusion is insufficient.
paper • Standard –5°C: Select this setting when
paper is curled largely.
Mode 6-4 6-3 • Standard –10°C: Select this setting when
No specification 0 0 paper is curled far largely.
200 g paper 0 1
170 g paper 1 0 Mode 8-1 8-0
Postcard 1 1 Standard 0 0
Standard +5°C 0 1
Standard –5°C 1 0
* 12 Transfer/separation corona unit output for thin Standard –10°C 1 1
paper
Mode 6-6 6-5
No specification 0 0
45 g paper 0 1
48 g paper 1 0
16 lb/80 g paper 1 1
1 - 15
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
* 15 Fixing upper roller initial rotation * 18 Copy count limit

Fixing may be insufficient in the morning if the
temperature of the place where the machine is Mode 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4
installed is low. To prevent this, increase the No limit 0 0 0 0
warm-up time (fixing upper roller initial rotation 1 copy 0 0 0 1
time) to allow the fixing lower roller to be warmed 3 copies 0 0 1 0
up to the normal temperature. This bit specifies 5 copies 0 0 1 1
the condition(s) under which initial rotation of the 9 copies 0 1 0 1
fixing upper roller is required. 10 copies 0 1 0 1
• Low temperature: Initial rotation of the fixing 20 copies 0 1 1 0
upper roller is carried out only under the low 30 copies 0 1 1 1
temperature condition. 50 copies 1 0 0 0
• Low and normal temperatures: Initial rotation 99 copies 1 0 0 1
of the fixing upper roller is carried out under low No limit 1 0 1 0
and normal temperature conditions. No limit 1 0 1 1
• Low, normal, and high temperatures: Initial ro- No limit 1 1 0 0
tation of the fixing upper roller is carried out No limit 1 1 0 1
under low, normal, and high temperature condi- No limit 1 1 1 0
tions. No limit 1 1 1 1
Destination Mode 8-3 8-2
Japan/US Low temperature 0 0 * 19 Image quality mode
Europe Low and normal 1 0
Mode 11-6 11-5
temperature
Normal: 1ED; Fine: 2ED 0 0
Low, normal, and high 1 1
temperatures
– 1 1
* 16 Fixing upper roller initial rotation time
This bit sets the maximum time of initial rotation
of the fixing upper roller. When 0 second is speci- * 20 Size detection 4
fied, initial rotation of the fixing upper roller is not
carried out. Destination Mode 13-4 13-3
Japan/Europe A5R 0 0
Mode 8-5 8-4
B6R 0 1
180 seconds 0 0
USA 5.5 x 8.5R 1 0
300 seconds 0 1
60 seconds 1 0
0 seconds 1 1 * 21 F4 size detection
Mode 13-6 13-5

*17 Copy card message
8 x 13 0 0
Mode 9-3 9-2 8.25 x 13 0 1
Insert copy card. 0 1 8.125 x 13.25 1 0
Insert coins. 1 0 8 x 13 1 1
1 - 16
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
* 22 Maximum number of sheets that can be stapled • To copy only image size area determined by
the APS sensor, select “Erase the area outside
Mode 15-2 15-1 the original.”
50 sheets 0 0 • To copy the entire area of the original to the
45 sheets 0 1 selected paper, select “Do not erase the area
40 sheets 1 0 outside the original.”
35 sheets 1 1 Note:
The APS sensor is effective if copy paper is se-
* 23 FNS alarm stop SW
lected manually.
Mode 15-4 15-3
Stop immediately after detection 0 0 Mode Area 16-7 16-6 16-5 16-0
Stop at end of copy after 0 1 Standard Standard original 0 0 0 0
detection Dark original Standard original 0 0 1 0
No alarm stop 1 0 Darker original Standard original 0 1 0 0
No alarm stop 1 1 Interference light Standard original 0 1 1 0
Uneven stripes Standard original 1 0 0 0
* 24 Selection of area to be erased in non-original area Standard Nonstandard original 0 0 0 1
automatic erasure Nonstandard original
This bit is used to make a setting associated with Dark original Nonstandard original 0 0 1 1
the non-original automatic erasure mode (appli- Nonstandard original
cation function). Darker original Nonstandard original 0 1 0 1
1. Selection of the area to erase
There are two methods for selecting the area to Interference light 0 1 1 1
be erased, “rectangular erasure” and “ tilted eras-
ure.” Select the desired method. Uneven stripes 1 0 0 1
· Tilted erasure: The original is not rectangular
(e.g., circular original).
· Rectangular erasure: The original is rectangular * For rectangular original density (dark original /
(e.g., original of a standard size). darker original)
If a rectangular original is placed in a tilted posi- Use this mode to set the density level threshhold
tion, black stripes may appear in the “rectangular value to the dark when copying a news article
erasure” mode. If there is a black area on the on a newspaper.
periphery of the original, this area may be judged (This mode is for copying a newspaper whose
as being outside the original, resulting in improper texture color is dark. Margin for interference light
erasure of the area outside the original. In such decreases.)
a case, the “rectangular erasure” mode is selected * As a preventive measure to cope with the non-
automatically. standard original density (appearance of uneven
2. Selection of identification level stripes)
When the original is dark or external light (from Use this mode to suppress uneven stripes ap-
the fluorescent lamp or sun) enters the machine, pearing on a copied paper when copying a news-
it becomes sometimes difficult to discriminate paper whose texture color is dark.
between the area inside the original and the area (Margin for interference light decreases.)
outside it. In such a case, the original area iden-
tification level can be changed. * Threshold for coping with interference light
Remarks: Use this mode to increase the probability of
In the key operator mode, you can use the copier to operate normal, when it is hard to pre-
memory switch that has a non-original area au- vent interference light penetrating to scan area,
tomatic erasure function. This memory switch and when copying comparatively low density
allows you to select the area to be copied when (bright texture color) original.
copy paper is selected manually.
1 - 17
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
* 25 WT summer time setting [3] Setting the Tray Size

This function stores the tray size in the memory of the
Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0 main unit when it has been changed by the service-
0 minute 0 0 0 0 personnel. This function is effective when the machine
10 minutes 0 0 0 1 is equipped with an optional LCT.
20 minutes 0 0 1 0
30 minutes 0 0 1 1 Select a tray size among standard, nonstandard paper
40 minutes 0 1 0 0 sizes. After selecting a tray size, specify a paper size.
50 minutes 0 1 0 1
60 minutes 0 1 1 0 1. Setting the standard size
70 minutes 0 1 1 1
80 minutes 1 0 0 0
Step Operation
90 minutes 1 0 0 1
100 minutes 1 0 1 0
110 minutes 1 0 1 1
Select “ 2 Tray Size Setting.”
120 minutes 1 1 0 0
3 [Tray Size Setting Screen]
130 minutes 1 1 0 1
Press the STANDARD SIZE button.
140 minutes 1 1 1 0
4 [Tray Size Selection Screen]
150 minutes 1 1 1 1
Press the or button to select a
paper size.
5 Press the OK button to finish setting.
To cancel the new setting, press the
CANCEL button.
Pressing either button will display the 25
Mode Menu screen again.
1 - 18
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
2. Setting the nonstandard size [4] PM Count Resetting

Care should be taken not to reset the PM count by mis-
Step Operation
take.
2 [25 Mode Menu Screen] Step Operation
Select “ 2 Tray Size Setting.” 1 Enter the 25 mode.
3 [Tray Size Setting Screen] 2 [25 Mode Menu Screen]
Press the NON-STANDARD SIZE button. Select “ 3 PM count.”
4 [Tray Size Selection Screen] 3 [PM Count/Cycle Setting Screen]
Press the key for specifying the main Press the RESET COUNT button.
(vertical) scanning direction to display it 4 [Reset Confirmation Screen]
in reverse video. Press the YES button.
5 Press the or button or numeric The PM count is reset and the start date
keys to enter the size in the main is input automatically.
(vertical)scanning direction. Pressing the NO button closes the
6 Press the button for specifying the sub Reset Confirmation screen at once.
(horizontal) scanning direction to display 5 Press the OK button to finish setting.
it in reverse video. To cancel the new setting, press the
7 Press the or button or numeric CANCEL button.
keys to enter the size in the sub (hori- Pressing either button will display the 25
zontal) scanning direction. Mode Menu screen again.
8 Press the OK button to finish setting.
To cancel the new setting, press the
CANCEL button.
[5] Setting the PM Cycle
This function allows you to change the PM cycle.
Caution: The PM cycle is factory-set. Use this
function to change the factory-set PM
cycle.
Reference 1:
Each time the current tray size is changed on Step Operation
this screen, the new setting will be written into 1 Enter the 25 mode.
the nonvolatile memory. 2 [25 Mode Menu Screen]
Reference 2: Select “ 3 PM count.”
Standard sizes that can be set for the LCT are 3 [PM Count/Cycle Setting Screen]
as follows: A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 Press the PM CYCLE SET button.
4 After making sure that three digits of the
Caution: cycle value are displayed in reverse
Sizes of tray 1 (upper tray), tray 2 (middle tray), video, enter a desired cycle value using
tray 3 (lower tray), and bypasses tray are not set numeric keys.
using the nonvolatile memory. Only the three digits of the cycle value
For trays 1, 2, and 3, their guide plate positions can be entered. The entered digits will
are read by sensors. For the bypass tray, its pa- be shifted to the left, one after another.
per setting position and guide plate position are 5 Press the OK button to finish setting.
read by sensors. To cancel the new setting, press the
CANCEL button.
1 - 19
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
[6] Collecting Data 3. Viewing Collected Data 5 to Collected

This function allows you to view various data retained Data 11
by the machine.
Step Operation
1. Data that can be Viewed 1 Enter the 25 mode.
No. Data Type Preparation Select “ 1 Software DIP SW Setting.”
1 Total count by paper size 3 [Software DIP SW Setting Screen]
2 Copy count by paper size Set bit 1 of DIP switch 30 to 1.
3 Print count by paper size 4 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN button to
4 ADF paper passage Enter the 25 return to the 25 Mode Menu screen.
count mode, select 5 [25 Mode Menu Screen]
5 Time series jam data “ 1 Software Select “ 4 Data Collection.”
6 Jam occurrence count DIP SW 6 [Collected Data Selection Screen]
7 Count by copy mode Setting,” and Select the collected data you want to
8 SC occurrence count set bit 1 of DIP view by pressing one of numeric keys
9 Paper conveyance time switch 30 to 1. 5 to 11 .
data (Note 1) To select key 11 press the key.
10 Local jam occurrence If the key is pressed with key 11 dis-
count played, the Collected Data Selection
11 Local SC occurrence screen containing keys 1 to 10 appears
count again.
7 [Individual Data View Screen]
Note : When bit 1 of DIP switch 30 is set to 0, View the selected data by scrolling the
only collected data 1 to collected data screen using and keys. (Note 1)
4 can be viewed. 8 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN button to
2. Viewing Collected Data 1 to Collected
Data 4 Note : On the Individual Data View screen
showing the local jam occurrence count
Step Operation
(collected data 10 ) or local SC occur-
rence count (collected data 11 ), the
COUNT RESET button appears.
Select “ 4 Data Collection.”
Pressing the COUNT RESET button re-
3 Select the collected data you want to
sets the selected data count.
view by pressing one of numeric keys
1 to 4 .
4 [Individual Data View Screen]
View the selected data by scrolling the
screen using and keys.
1 - 20
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
4. Details on Display Data

(1) Total count by paper size
Destination
NO Maximum count Remarks
Japan U.S.A. Europe
1 A2 17x22 A2 99999999 All counters are 8-digit counters.
2 A3 11x17 A3 99999999
3 B4 8.5x14 B4 99999999
4 A4 8.5x11 A4 99999999
5 B5 5.5x8.5 B5 99999999
6 A5 — A5 99999999
7 B6 — F4 99999999
8 8.5x14 — — 99999999
9 8.5x11 A4 — 99999999
10 Special Special Special 99999999
1. Each time a printed copy is ejected, the counter is incremented by 1 regardless of the paper size.
2. If the size of the paper used is none of the paper sizes 1-9 listed above, the counter is incremented in a special
manner (SEF and LEF are counted assuming that they are of the same size.)
1 - 21
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
(2) Copy count by fixed part
NO Part name Maximum count Counting condition
1 Fixing unit cleaning web 99999999 Count 1 per ejected paper for single sided, 2 for
double sided
2 Developer 99999999 Always unaffected by 25DIPSW
For A3, 11x17, count 2 per ejected paper for single
sided, 4 for double sided
3 Photosensitive drum 99999999 Always unaffected by 25DIPSW
For A3, 11x17, count 2 per ejected paper for single
sided, 4 for double sided
4 Cleaning blade 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
=0: Count 1 per ejected paper for single sided, 2
for double sided
=1: For A3, 11x17, count 2 per ejected paper for
single sided, 4 for double sided
5 Fur brush 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
6 Charging grid 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
7 Charging corona unit cleaning 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
8 Suction filter 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
9 Separation claw 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
10 Transfer/separation wires 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
1 - 22
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
11 Transfer/separation corona unit 99999999 25DIPSW8-6

for double sided
12 Fixing upper roller 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
13 Fixing lower roller assembly 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
14 Fixing upper claw 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
15 Fixing lower claw 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
16 Insulating sleeve 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
17 Upper roller bearing 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
18 Cleaning roller 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
19 Drum temperature sensor 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
1 - 23
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
20 Transfer/separation corona unit 99999999 25DIPSW8-6

for double sided
21 Insulation sleeve (heating) 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
22 Heating roller bearing 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
23 Upper roller error detection sensor 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
24 Heating roller error detection sensor 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
25 Fixing unit heating roller 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
26 Ozone filter 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
27 Charging corona unit 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
28 PCL 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
1 - 24
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
29 Developer 99999999 25DIPSW8-6

for double sided
30 TSL 99999999 25DIPSW8-6
for double sided
31 Tray 1 paper feed roller 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1 is
ejected.
32 Tray 1 conveyance roller/reversal roller 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1 is
ejected.
33 Tray 1 paper feed clutch 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1 is
ejected.
34 Tray 1 conveyance clutch 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1 is
ejected.
35 Tray 1 paper passage count 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1 is
ejected.
36 Tray 2 paper feed roller 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2 is
ejected.
37 Tray 2 conveyance roller/ 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2 is
reversal roller ejected.
38 Tray 2 paper pickup clutch 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2 is
ejected.
ejected.
ejected.
41 Tray 3 feed roller 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 is
ejected.
42 Tray 3 conveyance roller/ 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 is
reversal roller ejected.
43 Tray 3 paper pickup clutch 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 is
ejected.
ejected.
ejected.
46 By-pass tray paper feed roller 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from bypass tray
is ejected.
47 By-pass tray conveyance roller/ 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from bypass tray
reversal roller is ejected.
48 By-pass tray paper passage 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from bypass tray
count is ejected.
1 - 25
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
49 LCT feed roller 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from LCT is
ejected.
50 LCT conveyance roller/reversal 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from LCT is
roller ejected.
51 LCT paper feed clutch 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from LCT is
ejected.
52 LCT conveyance clutch 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from LCT is
ejected.
53 LCT paper passage count 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from LCT is
ejected.
54 Conveyance roller at vertical 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1/2/3 is
conveyance exit ejected.
55 Conveyance roller (middle) of 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2/3 is
vertical conveyance unit ejected.
56 Conveyance roller (lower) of 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 is
vertical paper conveyance unit ejected.
57 Conveyance clutch of vertical 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2/3 is
paper conveyance unit ejected.
58 FNS up/down motor 99999999 1 is counted each time the paper from FNS main
tray is ejected.1 is counted each time a copy is
ejected in stapling mode.
59 FNS stapler (front) 99999999 1 is counted each time a copy is ejected in SS front
1-point stapling, SS2-point stapling, or middle bind-
ing mode.
60 FNS stapler (rear) 99999999 1 is counted each time a copy is ejected in SS rear
1-point stapling, SS2-point stapling, or middle bind-
ing mode.
61 FNS shift motor 99999999 1 is counted each time even-numbered paper is
ejected.
62 FNS ejection slot open/close 99999999 1 is counted each time large size (A4R/8.5 x 11R
motor or larger) job starts.
1 is counted each time paper is ejected from each
section.
1 is counted each time middle binding or folding
job starts.
63 FNS center binding stopper 99999999 1 is counted each time paper is ejected in center
motor binding or folding mode.
64 FNS folding motor 99999999 1 is counted each time paper is ejected in center
binding or folding mode.
65 FNS paper feed clutch 99999999 1 is counted each time cover sheet is ejected.
66 ADF pickup roller 99999999 Number of originals passes in all modes
67 ADF original feed roller 99999999 Number of originals passes in all modes
68 ADF double feed prevention 99999999 Number of originals passes in all modes
roller (retard roller)
69 ADF original pickup auxiliary 99999999 Number of originals passes in all modes
roller
1 - 26
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
70 ADF torque limiter 99999999 Number of originals passes in all modes

71 ADF SDF solenoid 99999999 All originals passed in SDF mode
72 ADF LSB40 solenoid 99999999 1) 1 is counted each time original is set in large
size 1-sided original mode.
2) 1 is counted each time original is set in large
size 2-sided original mode. See note on page 1-28
73 ADF separation solenoid 99999999 1 is counted each time original is set in large size
2-sided original mode.
74 ADF SSB solenoid 99999999 1 is counted each time all-size 2-sided original
mode.
75 Toner seal board assembly 99999999 1 is counted each time 1-sided original is ejected;
2 is counted each time 2-sided original is ejected.
76 Guide plate assembly 99999999 1 is counted each time 1-sided original is ejected;
77 Registration clutch 99999999 1 is counted each time 1-sided original is ejected;
78 ADU pre-registration clutch 99999999 2 is counted each time 2-sided paper is ejected. (0
is counted when 1-sided paper is ejected.)
79 Count of paper passed through 99999999 1 is counted each time 1-sided paper is ejected; 2
registration unit is counted each time 2-sided paper is ejected.
80 Count of paper passed through 99999999 2 is counted each time 1-sided paper is ejected
paper reverse/eject unit after being reversed; 0 is counted each time 1-
sided paper is ejected straight; 1 is counted each
time 2-sided paper is ejected.
81 Count of paper passed through 99999999 2 is counted each time 2-sided paper is ejected. (0
ADU is counted when 1-sided paper is ejected.)
82 Exposure lamp ON time 99999999 Unit
83 Main SW 99999999 1 is counted each time the power is turned OFF
with the main SW set at OFF.
84 Door SW 99999999 1 is counted each time front door is opened.
85 Cleaning web drive motor 99999999 1 is counted each time 1-sided paper is ejected; 2
is counted each time 2-sided paper is ejected.
86 99999999
87 99999999
88 99999999
89 99999999
89 99999999
90 99999999
91 99999999
92 99999999
93 99999999
94 99999999
95 99999999
96 99999999
97 99999999
98 99999999
1 - 27
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
99 99999999
100 99999999
101 99999999
102 99999999
103 99999999
104 99999999
105 99999999
106 99999999
107 99999999
108 99999999
109 99999999
110 99999999
111 99999999
112 99999999
113 99999999
114 99999999
115 99999999
116 99999999
117 99999999
118 99999999
119 99999999
120 99999999
121 99999999
122 99999999
1237 99999999
124 99999999
125 99999999
126 99999999
127 99999999
128 99999999
Note: Definition of large-size originals in terms of part counting.

The following originals are defined as large size original.
1. Sizes of originals ejected to L ejection tray (A4/B4/A4R/B5R/F4/11x17/8.5x14/8.5x11R)
2. All originals ejected in multi-size-mixed mode
1 - 28
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
(3) Copy count by arbitrary part
NO Item Contents Remarks

Counter by part (1) 12345678 8-digit counter
Limit by part (1) 12345678 8-digit counter
1
Part No. (1) 123456789 Enter nine numeric characters.
Part name (1) ABCDEFGH Enter eight alphanumeric characters.
2
~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~
~
~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~
30
1. Each counter is incremented when copy operation (including print operation) stops. All 30 counters count
paper sides on which images have been copied (printed) from start to stop of the copy (print) operation. (1 is
counted regardless of the paper size each time copying (printing) on a paper side is completed.)
2. Item definitions (name and No.) and limit value may be changed as desired.
3. The part that has exceeded the limit is marked with *.
1 - 29
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
(4) ADF paper passage count
Maximum
NO Items Remarks
count
1 Number of original sides passed in ADF mode 99999999 All counters are 8-digit
counters.
2 Number of original sides passed in RADF mode 99999999
3 Number of 1-sided original sides passed in SDF mode 99999999
4 Number of 2-sided original sides passed in SDF mode 99999999
5 Number of 1-sided original sides passed in mixed original mode 99999999
6 Number of 2-sided original sides passed in mixed original mode 99999999
7 Number of 1-sided original sides passed in Z-fold mode 99999999
8 Number of 2-sided original sides passed in Z-fold mode 99999999
9 Undefined 99999999
1. The counter is incremented each time one original side has been scanned in each mode.
2. Counters 1 and 2 count original sides independently of counters 3-8.
1 - 30
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
(5) Jam occurrence count
Description of jam Jam

Code displayed position
NO when display of display Maximum Counting condition
Location of jam jam code is on count
selected by 25- operation
mode DIP switch panel
1 By-pass paper feed 10-1 5 999999 All counters are 6-
digit counters.
2 By-pass paper feed 10-2 5 999999
3 Tray 1 paper feed 11-1 1 999999
4 Tray 1 paper feed 11-2 1 999999
5 Tray 2 paper feed 12-1 2 999999
6 Tray 2 paper feed 12-2 2 999999
7 Tray 3 paper feed 13-1 3 999999
8 Tray 3 paper feed 13-2 3 999999
9 Tray 4 (LCT) 14-1 4 999999
10 Tray 4 (LCT) 14-2 4 999999
11 Paper feed conveyance 17-1 8 999999
(common to all trays)
12 Paper feed conveyance (tray 1) 17-2 6 999999
13 Paper feed conveyance (tray 2/3) 17-3 6 999999
16 Paper feed conveyance (LCT) 17-6 7 999999
17 Drum 21-1 9 999999
18 Second paper feed conveyance 31-1 8 999999
19 Second paper feed conveyance 31-2 9 999999
20 Fixing unit /exit (straight ejection) 32-1 10 999999
21 Fixing unit /exit (reverse and eject) 32-2 10 999999
22 Fixing unit exit (reverse and eject) 32-3 10 999999
23 Fixing unit exit (reverse and eject) 32-4 10 999999
24 Fixing unit /exit 32-5 10 999999
25 ADU inlet paper conveyance 92-1 12 999999
26 ADU inlet paper conveyance 92-2 11 999999
27 ADU paper reversal and conveyance 93-1 12 999999
28 ADU exit paper conveyance 94-1 12 999999
29 ADU exit paper conveyance 94-2 12 999999
30 Vertical paper conveyance jam 19-1 6 999999
access door
31 LCT side door 19-2 6 999999
32 Front door 51-1 8 999999
33 Finisher door 71-1 13 999999
34 ADF 62-1 14 999999
35 ADF 62-2 14 999999
36 ADF 62-3 14 999999
37 ADF 62-4 14 999999
38 ADF 62-5 14 999999
1 - 31
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Description of jam Jam

Code displayed position
NO when display of display Maximum Counting condition
Location of jam jam code is on count
selected by 25- operation
mode DIP switch panel
39 ADF 62-6 14 999999
40 ADF 62-7 14 999999
41 ADF 62-8 14 999999
42 ADF 62-9 14 999999
43 ADF 62-10 14 999999
44 ADF 63-1 15 999999
45 ADF 63-2 15 999999
46 ADF 63-3 15 999999
47 ADF 63-4 15 999999
48 ADF 63-5 15 999999
49 ADF 63-6 15 999999
50 ADF 63-7 15 999999
51 ADF 63-8 15 999999
52 ADF 63-9 15 999999
53 ADF 63-10 15 999999
54 ADF 63-11 15 999999
55 ADF 61-1 - 999999
56 ADF 61-2 - 999999
57 FNS 72-16 13 999999
58 FNS 72-17 13 999999
59 FNS 72-18 13 999999
60 FNS 72-19 13 999999
61 FNS 72-20 13 999999
62 FNS 72-21 13 999999
63 FNS 72-22 17 999999
64 FNS 72-23 17 999999
65 FNS 72-24 18 999999
66 FNS 72-25 18 999999
67 FNS 72-26 18 999999
68 FNS 72-27 13 999999
69 FNS 72-28 13 999999
70 FNS 72-29 13 999999
71 FNS 72-30 13 999999
72 FNS 72-32 18 999999
73 FNS 72-33 18 999999
74 FNS 72-34 18 999999
75 FNS 72-35 17 999999
76 FNS 72-36 17 999999
77 FNS 72-37 17 999999
78 FNS 72-81 13 999999
79 FNS 72-82 13 999999
80 FNS 72-83 13 999999
1. When a jam occurs, the associated counter is incremented by 1 (stationary jams are not counted).
1 - 32
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
(6) Copy count by copy mode
Maximum
NO Item count Counting condition
1 1-1 mode 99999999 All counters are 8-digit

counters.
2 1-2 mode 99999999
3 2-1 mode 99999999
4 2-2 mode 99999999
5 ADF1-1 mode 99999999
6 ADF1-2 mode 99999999
7 Mixed original mode 99999999
8 SDF mode 99999999
9 Z-fold original mode 99999999
10 Normal 99999999
11 Fine 99999999
12 Super fine 99999999
13 600 dpi 99999999
14 Auto (text/photo) 99999999
15 Text 99999999
16 Photo 99999999
17 Increase contrast 99999999
18 Nonstandard size original 99999999
19 1-point stapling (upper left/normal setting) 99999999
20 1-point stapling (upper right/reverse setting) 99999999
21 1-point stapling (upper left/reverse setting) 99999999
22 1-point stapling (upper right/reverse setting) 99999999
23 2-point stapling (left binding/normal setting) 99999999
24 2-point stapling (upper binding/normal setting) 99999999
25 2-point stapling (left binding/reverse setting) 99999999
26 2-point stapling (upper binding/reverse setting) 99999999
27 Middle binding 99999999
28 Middle folding 99999999
29 Main tray: Group 99999999
30 Main tray: Sort 99999999
31 Main tray: Non-sort 99999999
32 Sub-tray: Group (face down) 99999999
33 Sub-tray: Group (face up) 99999999
34 Sub-tray: Sort (face down) 99999999
35 Sub-tray: Sort (face up) 99999999
36 Sub-tray: Non-sort (face down) 99999999
37 Sub-tray: Non-sort (face up) 99999999
38 Cover sheet 99999999
39 Paper cutting 99999999
40 Copying at 1:1 99999999
41 Fixed magnification E4 99999999
1 - 33
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Maximum
43 Fixed magnification E2 99999999 All counters are 8-digit

counters.
45 Fixed magnification R4 99999999
49 User-set magnification 1 99999999
52 ZOOM 99999999
53 Independent variable magnification 99999999
54 Maximum zooming magnification 99999999
55 Minimum zooming magnification 99999999
56 APS 99999999
57 AMS 99999999
58 EE 99999999
59 User-set density 1 99999999
60 User-set density 2 99999999
61 Interrupt copy 99999999
62 Automatic image rotation cancellation 99999999
63 Sheet/cover interleave 99999999
64 Chapter 99999999
65 Combination 99999999
66 Booklet 99999999
67 Transparency copy interleave 99999999
68 Transparency white paper interleave 99999999
69 Image insert 99999999
70 Book copy 99999999
71 Program job 99999999
72 Non-image area automatic erasure 99999999
73 Reverse image 99999999
74 Repeat (automatic) 99999999
75 Repeat (manual) 99999999
76 Standard repeat 99999999
77 Frame erasure 99999999
78 Fold erasure 99999999
79 Auto layout 99999999
80 Image only 99999999
81 Shift 99999999
82 Reduced shift 99999999
83 Overlay 99999999
84 Water mark (not used for the present) 99999999
85 Standard stamp (not used for the present) 99999999
86 Date and time (not used for the present) 99999999
87 Page (not used for the present) 99999999
1 - 34
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Maximum
88 Numbering (not used for the present) 99999999

89 Set copy count 1 99999999
90 Set copy count of 2-5 99999999
91 Set copy count of 6-10 99999999
92 Set copy count of 11 or more 99999999
93 Power supply 1 ON time 99999999 Total period of time dur-
ing which image control
board is energized (re-
mote power supply 1 is
ON). 1 is counted per
minute. This value is writ-
ten into nonvolatile
memory at power-off.
ing which remote power
supply 2 is ON. 1 is
counted per minute. This
value is written into non-
volatile memory when
image control is turned
OFF.
supply 2 is ON and 24 V
relay is ON. The count is
incremented by 1 per
memory when image con-
trol is turned OFF.
supply 3 is ON. The count
is incremented by 1 per
memory when image con-
trol is turned OFF.
97 Lower power mode time 99999999 Total period of time dur-
ing which low power mode
is selected. The count is
minute.
1 - 35
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Maximum
98 WUP time 99999999 Total period of time dur-

ing which fixing unit
heater is ON when ma-
chine is not ready for fus-
ing. The count is
second.
99 Front door open time 99999999 Total period of time dur-
ing which front door is
open. The count is
second.
100 1-sided straight ejection print operation time 99999999 Total time from start to
end of printing. The
count is incremented by
1 per second. Data is
output per minute. (Halt
time (machine is not
operational due to jam,
etc.) is excluded.)
101 1-sided reverse ejection print operation time 99999999 Total time from start to
end of printing. The
count is incremented by
1 per second. Data is
output per minute. (Halt
time (machine is not
etc.) is excluded.)
102 2-sided print operation time 99999999 Total time from start to
end of printing. The count
is incremented by 1 per
second. Data is output
per minute. (Halt time
(machine is not
etc.) is excluded.)
103 ADF operation time 99999999 Total operation time of
ADF. The count is incre-
mented by 1 per second.
104 Morning correction operation count 99999999 The count is incremented
by 1 each time correction
is made before starting
work in the morning.
1 - 36
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Maximum
105 APS sensor ON time 99999999 Total period of time during

which APS sensor is ON.
The count is incremented
by 1 per second. Data is
output per minute.
106 Number of jobs used main tray 99999999 Job count
107 Number of jobs used sub-tray 99999999 Job count
108 Number of jobs performed middle binding 99999999 Job count
109 Number of jobs performed middle folding 99999999 Job count
110 ADF NF occurrence count 99999999
111 ADF special error 1 occurrence count 99999999 Original size detection
error occurrence count
112 ADF special error 2 occurrence count 99999999 Next original information
error occurrence count
113 ADF special error 3 occurrence count 99999999 Mixed loading prohibited
original size error
occurrence count
114 Scanner's scanning count 99999999 The count is incremented
by 1 each time Platen
Mode Copy button is
pressed.
115 Electrode cleaning count 99999999
116 Memory overflow occurrence count 99999999
117 Fixing alarm occurrence count 99999999
118 No toner stop occurrence count 99999999
119 AGC retry count 99999999
120 Sub-scanning beam correction error 99999999
121 Late for mis-centering correction 99999999
122 Late for ADF skew correction 99999999
123 ADF skew correction data error count 99999999
124 Compressed memory overflow 99999999
125 Paper memory overflow (scan) 99999999
126 Page memory overflow (print) 99999999
127 FNS alarm (tray/cutting) 99999999
128 FNS alarm (stapling) 99999999
1. The copy count is incremented by 1 each time copy operation stops in each copy mode irrespective of the
paper size.
2. Time is counted up by the cycle timer.
3. Others are counted at occurrence of an error or at the start of operation.
1 - 37
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
(7) SC count / Local count
Trouble Maximum
NO code Description count Remarks
1 13 1 Paper feed MT EM 9999 All counters are 4-

digit counters.
2 13 2 LCT conveyance MT EM 9999
3 13 3 Loop roller motor fuse blowing 9999
4 18 11 Tray 1 up error 1 9999
5 18 12 Tray 1 up error 2 9999
6 18 13 Tray 1 up error 3 9999
7 18 10 Tray 1 up MT EM 9999
8 18 21 Tray 2 up error 1 9999
9 18 22 Tray 2 up error 2 9999
10 18 23 Tray 2 up error 3 9999
11 18 20 Tray 2 up MT EM 9999
12 18 31 Tray 3 up error 1 9999
13 18 32 Tray 3 up error 2 9999
14 18 33 Tray 3 up error 3 9999
15 18 30 Tray 3 up MT EM 9999
16 18 41 LCT up/down error 1 9999
19 18 40 LCT up/down MT EM 9999
20 18 51 By-pass tray up error 1 9999
23 21 1 Charging corona unit cleaning MT error 1 9999
26 21 4 Transfer/separation corona wire 9999
cleaning MT error 1
27 21 5 Transfer/separation corona unit 9999
cleaning MT error 2
28 21 6 Transfer/separation corona unit 9999
cleaning MT error 3
29 23 1 Toner bottle MT EM 9999
30 23 2 Developing MT EM 9999
31 23 3 Blademotorexcessivecurrentdetection 9999
32 23 4 Drum ready 1 9999
33 23 5 Drum ready 2 9999
34 23 6 Drum ready 3 9999
35 23 7 Blade ready 1 9999
36 23 8 Blade ready 2 9999
37 23 9 Blade ready 3 9999
38 23 10 Drum ready 2 9999
39 23 11 Toner screw motor fuse blowing 9999
40 24 1 Drum temperature sensor break 9999
detection
1 - 38
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Trouble Maximum
41 24 2 Drum temperature sensor grounding 9999
error detection
42 24 3 Drum heater open detection 1 9999
43 24 4 Drum heater open error detection 2 9999
44 28 1 Charging EM 9999
45 28 2 Transfer EM 9999
46 28 3 Separation EM 9999
47 28 4 High-voltage 24 V fuse blowing 9999
48 29 1 Maximum density correction error 1 9999
51 29 4 γ correction error 1 9999
54 29 7 Dot diameter correction error 1 9999
55 29 8 Dot diameter correction error 2 9999
56 29 9 Potential correction error 1 9999
59 29 12 Transfer adjustment error 9999
60 29 13 Separation AC adjustment error 9999
61 29 14 Separation DC adjustment error 9999
62 29 15 Developing bias adjustment error 9999
63 32 1 Suction fan MT EM1 9999
66 32 4 Fixing unit cooling fan MT EM1 9999
70 33 1 Second paper feed MT EM 9999
71 33 2 Paper reverse and eject 9999
motor fuse blowing
72 33 3 Pre-transfer R-motor fuse blowing 9999
73 33 4 Ejection motor fuse blowing 9999
74 33 5 Web motor fuse 9999
blowing detection 1
75 33 6 Web motor fuse 9999
blowing detection 2
76 34 1 Fixing upper roller high 9999
temperature error detection
77 34 2 Fixing heat roller high 9999
1 - 39
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Trouble Maximum
78 34 3 Fixing upper roller high 9999

79 34 4 Fixing heat roller high 9999
80 35 1 Fixing upper roller low 9999
81 35 2 Fixing heat roller low 9999
82 36 1 Fixing upper roller sensor error 9999
detection
83 36 2 Fixing heat roller sensor error 9999
detection
84 36 3 Fixing upper roller sensor error 9999
85 36 4 Fixing heat roller sensor error 9999
86 36 5 Fixing upper roller S2 error 9999
detection
87 36 6 Fixing heat roller S4 error detection 9999
88 41 1 Optics unit HP return error 1 9999
94 41 7 Right overrun error 1 9999
95 41 8 Right overrun error 2 9999
96 41 9 Left overrun error 9999
97 41 10 Polygon mirror MT error 1 9999
98 41 11 Polygon mirror MT error 2 9999
99 42 1 Optics unit cooling fan MT EM1 9999
102 42 4 Write unit cooling fan MT EM1 9999
106 46 1 APC error 9999
107 46 2 Scanner FIFO error 9999
108 46 3 Printer FIFO error 9999
109 46 5 Compressed input/output FIFO error 9999
110 46 6 Expansion error 9999
111 46 8 Index sensor error 9999
112 46 10 No margin of scanner control 9999
113 46 11 No margin of printer control 9999
114 46 12 SVV length error 9999
115 46 13 Scanner time-out 9999
116 46 14 Printer time-out 9999
1 - 40
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Trouble Maximum
117 46 15 Expansion device access error 9999

118 46 16 Compression device access error 9999
119 46 17 Filter factor error 9999
120 46 19 Memory in data flow 9999
121 46 21 Data flow memory mode 9999
122 46 23 SVV off error 9999
123 46 24 Black/white collection error 9999
124 46 25 Level adjustment error 9999
125 46 26 Invalid correction data by resolution 9999
126 46 27 Density conversion 9999
(γ curve generation error)
127 46 28 PWM (γ curve generation error) 9999
128 46 80 Insufficient/broken message queue 9999
129 46 81 Invalid message or method parameter 9999
130 46 82 Invalid task 9999
131 46 83 Invalid event 9999
132 46 90 Memory access error 9999
133 46 91 Header access error 9999
134 50 1 Main unit drive serial input error 1 9999
135 50 2 Main unit serial input error 2 9999
138 50 5 Drive board communication reception 9999
error detection
139 50 10 Image control board communication 9999
connection error
140 50 11 Image control board communication 9999
141 52 1 Internal cooling fan MT12 EM1 9999
150 52 10 Internal cooling fan MT1/2 EM 9999
151 52 11 Internal cooling fan MT3 EM 9999
152 53 1 Main MT EM 9999
153 53 2 TC fuse blowing detection 1 9999
154 53 3 TC fuse blowing detection 2 9999
155 53 4 Key counter fuse blowing detection 1 9999
156 53 5 Key counter fuse blowing detection 2 9999
157 53 6 12V fuse blowing detection 9999
1 - 41
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Trouble Maximum
159 53 8 Printer control 12V detection 9999

160 53 9 Excessive AC voltage detection 9999
162 53 11 SD/MC fuse blowing detection 1 9999
163 53 12 SD/MC fuse blowing detection 9999
164 56 2 Initial communication failure 9999
165 56 1* Operation panel ISW not written 9999
166 60 1 Communication (send) error 9999
167 60 2 Communication (reception) error 9999
168 60 11 DDF ISW not written 9999
169 67 1 Registration sensor error 9999
170 67 2 Read sensor error 9999
171 67 3 LSB sensor error 9999
172 67 4 Nonvolatile memory error 9999
173 67 5 Fan motor driving error 9999
174 67 6 CBS sensor error 9999
175 67 7 SSB sensor error 9999
176 67 8 Paper feed tray up/down driving error 9999
177 70 1 FN-104 communication 9999
178 70 2 FN-104 communication start 9999
acknowledgment error detection error
179 77 1 Shift driving error 9999
180 77 2 Tray up/down driving error 9999
181 77 3 Matching plate drive error 9999
182 77 4 Ejection roller drive error 9999
183 77 5 Ejection slot driving error 9999
184 77 6 Stapler movement unit driving error 9999
185 77 7 Stapler rotation unit driving error 9999
186 77 8 Stapler rotation unit driving error 9999
187 77 11 Stapler F-unit error 9999
188 77 12 Stapler R-unit error 9999
189 77 15 Edge conveyance motor driving error 9999
190 77 21 Stapler rear end stopper motor 9999
191 77 22 Stapler side guide motor 9999
192 77 23 Stapler stopper release motor 9999
193 77 24 Center fold rear end stopper motor 9999
194 77 25 Center fold knife motor driving error 9999
195 77 26 Middle fold conveyance motor driving error 9999
196 77 31 Cutter transfer driving error 9999
197 77 32 Cutter driving error 9999
198 77 33 Cutter rear end stopper driving error 9999
199 77 34 Cutter rear end release motor driving 9999
error
200 77 35 Cutter press motor driving error 9999
1 - 42
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
Trouble Maximum
201 77 41 Sheet feeder up motor driving error 9999

202 77 91 Sub-CPU reception error 9999
203 77 92 Main CPU reception error 9999
204 80 1* Printer control ISW not written 9999
205
206 80 30 ISW time-out 9999
207 80 31 ISW data error 9999
208 80 32 ISW write error 9999
209 90 1 ADU drive serial input error 1 9999
210 90 2 ADU drive serial input error 2 9999
211 93 1 12 V fuse blowing detection 9999
212 93 2 -5 V fuse blowing detection 9999
213 93 3 ADU conveyance motor fuse blowing 9999
detection
214 93 4 ADU reversal motor fuse blowing 9999
1. When an SC occurs, the associated counter is incremented by 1.

2. When DIPSW3-1 is set to 1, SCs34, 35, and 36 are not counted.
1 - 43
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT

(Fixed Parts)
This function allows you to display or reset the copy
count for a fixed part or data.
Step Operation
Select “ 5 Copy Count by Parts to be
Replaced.”
3 [Parts Counter Menu Screen]
Select “ 1 Fixed Parts Count.”
4 [Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced
(Fixed) Screen]
Data numbers (No.), par t names
(Name), and count values are displayed
in a list format.
Using and buttons, select a part
name.
To scroll the screen, use and
keys.
5 Press the COUNT RESET button to reset
the count value of the part displayed in
reverse video.
[List of Parts to be replaced]

No. Part Name Reference No. Minolta Part No.
1 Fixing cleaning web 55VA-524 4014-3030-01
2 Developer 55VA3060 8971-101
3 OPC drum 55VA-240 8971-1291
4 Cleaning blade 55VA5601 4014-3021-01
5 Toner guide brush 55VA-574 4014-3032-01
6 Charging grid 55VA2508 4014-3009-01
7 Charging cleaning unit 55VA-255 4014-3022-01
8 Suction filter 55VA3108 4014-3014-01
9 Separation claws 55VA2919 4014-3013-01
10 Trans./sep. wire 55VA2613 4014-3011-01
11 Trans./sep. CL unit 55VA-276/ 4014-3023-01
55VA-277 4014-3024-01
12 Fix. roller (U) 55VA5304 4014-3015-01
13 Fix. roller unit (L) 55VA-528 4014-3031-01
14 Fixing claws upper 55VA5321 4014-3017-01
15 Fixing claws lower 25AA5329 4014-3002-01
16 Heat insu. sleeve (U) 45405339 4014-3007-01
17 Upper roller bearing 45407504 4014-1747-01
18 Cleaning rollers 55VA5386 4014-3019-01
Note: The Minolta Part Numbers will replace the Reference Numbers in the future.
1 - 44
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT

19 Temperature sensor 55VA-209 4014-3259-01
20 Trans./sep. unit 55VA-270 4014-3202-01
21 Heat insulate sleeve 26AA5315 4014-3005-01
22 Heat roller holder 26AA5316 4014-3006-01
23 Upper roller sensor 55VA8804 4014-2300-01
24 Heat roller sensor 55VA8806 4014-2302-01
25 Fixing heat rollers 55VA5307 4014-3016-01
26 Ozone filter 55FA7301/ 4014-1795-01
55VA1107 4014-1843-01
27 Charging corona 55VA-250 4014-3200-01
28 PCL 55VA8307 4014-3201-01
29 Developing unit 55VA-300 4014-3025-01
30 TSL 55VA8308 4014-2292-01
31 Tray 1 feed roller 55VA-464 4014-3027-01
32 Tray 1 conv/rev roller 55VA-463 4014-3026-01
33 Tray 1 feed clutch 55VA8201 4014-2290-01
34 Tray 1 convey clutch 55VA8201 4014-2290-01
35 Tray 1 feed count 55VA-400
46 Bypass feed roller 55VA-464 4014-3027-01
47 BP conv/rev roller 55VA-463 4014-3026-01
48 Bypass feed count 55VA-500
49 LCT feed roller 55VA-484 4014-3029-01
50 LCT conv/rev roller 55VA-483 4014-3028-01
51 LCT feed clutch 55VA8201 4014-2290-01
52 LCT convey clutch 55VA8201 4014-2290-01
53 LCT feed count 13GG-050
54 V-convey exit roller 55VA4410 4014-2023-01
55 V-convey roller/M 55VA4411 4014-2024-01
56 V-convey roller/L 55VA4411 4014-2024-01
57 V-convey clutch 55VA8202 4014-2291-01
58 FNS Up/Down motor 129U8004 4014-1155-01
59 FNS stapler/front 129U4266 4014-1095-01
60 FNS stapler/rear 129U4266 4014-1095-01
61 FNS shift motor 12QR-361 4014-3118-01
62 FNS exit cont. motor 12QR-361 4014-3118-01
1 - 45
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT

63 Saddle stitch stop M 129X8011 4014-1227-01
64 FNS folding motor 129U8004 4014-1155-01
65 FNS feed clutch 25SA8203 4014-1696-01
66 ADF pickup roller 13GA4604 4014-1146-01
67 ADF feed roller 13GA4605 4014-1447-01
68 ADF double feed 13GA4606 4014-1448-01
prevention roller
69 ADF sub pick roller 13GA4601 4014-1443-01
70 ADF torque limiter 13GA-135 4014-3136-01
71 ADF SDF solenoid 13GA8252 4014-1522-01
72 ADF LSB solenoid 13GA8251 4014-1521-01
73 ADF press/release SD 13GA8251 4014-1521-01
74 ADF SSB solenoid 13GA8251 4014-1521-01
75 Toner seal board 55VA-568 4014-3240-01
76 Guide plate assy 55VA-561 4014-3235-01
77 Registration clutch 55VA8201 4014-2290-01
78 ADU pre-regis. CL 55VA8201 4014-2290-01
79 Regis. feed count
80 Reversal exit count
81 ADU paper feed count
82 Exposure Lamp 55TA8301 4014-1830-01
83 Main Switch 55GA8601 4014-1807-01
84 Door Switch 40AA8501 4014-1741-01
85 Web drive motor 40AA8501 4014-1741-01
1 - 46
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT

(Optional Parts)
This function allows you to make the following settings
for an optional part or data:
1. Copy count resetting
2. Limit value setting
3. Part number setting
4. Part name setting
The above settings can be made for 30 data numbers,
No.1 to No.30.
Initially, parts numbers are not set for any data number.
1. Resetting the Copy Count by Parts to be

Replaced (Optional Parts)
This function allows you to reset the copy count
by parts to be replaced (optional parts).
Step Operation
Select “ 5 Copy Count by Parts to be
Replaced.”
Select “ 2 Optional Parts Count.”
4 [Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced
(Optional Parts) Screen]
Data numbers (No.), par t names
(Name), part numbers (P/N), and count/
limit values are displayed in a list format.
Using and buttons, select a part
name.
To scroll the screen, use and
keys.
5 Press the COUNT RESET button to reset
the count value of the part displayed in
reverse video.
Reference:
If the copy count exceeds the limit, the * mark
appears to the right of the limit value.
1 - 47
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
2. Changing the data on the Copy Count by [9] Setting Passwords

Parts to be Replaced (Optional Parts) This function allows you to set the following passwords:
This function allows you to change the limit value, 1. Key operator password (4 digits)
part number, or part name for the desired op- This password is required to enter the key
tional copy count by parts to be replaced (op- operator mode.
tional parts). 2. EKC master key code (8 digits)
3. Weekly timer password (4 digits)
Step Operation This is a weekly timer master key code re-
1 Enter the 25 mode. quired to enter various weekly timer setting
2 [25 Mode Menu Screen] modes. This function cannot be used when
Select “ 5 Copy Count by Parts to be the machine is not equipped with a weekly
Replaced.” timer.
Select “ 2 Optional Parts Count.” Step Operation
4 [Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced 1 Enter the 25 mode.
(Optional Parts) Screen] 2 [25 Mode Menu Screen]
Data numbers (No.), par t names Select “ 6 Password Setting.”
(Name), part numbers (P/N), and count/ 3 [Password Setting Screen]
limit values are displayed in a list format. Select “Key operator password (4 digits),”
Using and buttons, select a data “EKC master key code (8 digits),” or
number (No.). “Weekly timer password (4 digits).”
To scroll the screen, use and keys 4 Enter a new password using numeric
5 Press the Part Name Set , P/N Set , or keys.
Limit Set button.
5 Perform steps 3 and 4 repeatedly to set
6 [Data Change Screen by Parts to be other passwords.
Replaced] 6 Press the OK button to allow the new
Press the Part Name Set , P/N Set , or passwords to take effect.
Limit Set button corresponding to the
To cancel the new passwords, press the
data you want to change.
CANCEL button.
7 Enter new data using alphabetic and Pressing either button will display the 25
numeric keys. Mode Menu screen again.
8 Perform steps 6 and 7 repeatedly to
change other data. Reference 1:
9 Press the OK key to allow the new data The digits entered in the data field of each data
to take effect. item will be shifted to the left one after another.
To cancel the new data, press the Reference 2:
CANCEL button.
When the number of entered digits exceeds 4 or
Pressing either button will display the 8, the leftmost character will disappear.
Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced Reference 3:
(Optional Parts) screen again. When “0000” is set as the key operator pass-
10 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN button to word or weekly timer password, the key operator
return to the 25 Mode Menu screen. mode or weekly timer mode can be used without
entering a password. That is, the menu screen
Reference 1: of each mode appears directly without display-
The characters entered in the data field of each data ing the password input screen.
item will be shifted to the left one after another. Reference 4:
Reference 2: The EKC master key code “00000000” is invalid.
When the number of entered characters exceeds Set any other 8-digit value.
10, the leftmost character will disappear.
1 - 48
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
[10] Setting the Telephone Number and/ [11] Displaying and Setting the Serial
or Fax Number of the Service Center Number
This function allows you to set the telephone number This function allows you to display, set, or change the
and/or fax number of the service center displayed when serial number of the main unit or option.
a service call occurs. The telephone number and/or
fax number are/is also displayed as the basic help topic Step Operation
“Contact Number of Service Center” on the user screen. 1 Enter the 25 mode.
Step Operation Select “ 8 Indication of m/c serial
1 Enter the 25 mode. number.”
2 [25 Mode Menu Screen] 3 [Serial Number Display Screen]
Select “ 7 Telephone Number Setting.” Press the Main machine , Option tray ,
3 [Ser vice Center TEL/FAX Setting RADF , or Finisher button.
Screen] 4 Enter the serial number using alphabetic

Select “Service center telephone number and numeric keys.
(16 digits)” or “Service center fax number 5 Perform steps 3 and 4 repeatedly to set
(16 digits).” other serial numbers.
4 Enter the telephone or fax number using 6 Press the OK key to allow the serial
numeric keys. numbers to take effect.
5 To set both telephone and fax numbers, To cancel the serial numbers, press the
perform steps 3 and 4 repeatedly. CANCEL button.
6 Press the OK key to allow the tel- Pressing either button will display the 25
ephone number and/or fax number to Mode Menu screen again.
take effect.
To cancel the telephone number and/or Reference 1:
fax number, press the CANCEL button. If the set serial number is invalid, a pop-up win-
Pressing either button will display the 25 dow appears to display a warning message.
Mode Menu screen again. Press the OK button to close the pop-up win-
dow, then enter a valid serial number again.
Reference 1: Reference 2:
If the length of a telephone or fax number is The entered characters will be shifted to the left
shorter than 16 digits, use a hyphen(s) to make one after another, starting at the right end.
the overall length 16 digits.
Reference 2:
The entered digits will be shifted to the left one
after another, starting at the right end.
1 - 49
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
[12] Displaying the ROM Version

This function allows you to display the versions of the
installed ROMs.
Step Operation
Select “ 9 Indication of ROM version.”
3 [ROM Version Display Screen]
The versions of the ROMs installed in
the printer control, finisher, RADF.
1 - 50
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 ADJUSTMENT
[13] List of Adjustment Items in the 25 Mode
Adjustment Item Menu Remarks

1 Software DIP SW setting. See “List of Software DIP
Switches.”
2 Tray size setting
3 PM count Resetting PM Count
Setting PM Cycle
4 Data collection 1 Total Count by Paper Size
2 Copy Count by Paper Size
3 Print Count by Paper Size
4 ADF Paper Passage Count
5 Time Series Jam Data
6 Jam Occurrence Count
7 Count by Copy Mode
8 SC Occurrence Count
9 Paper Conveyance Time Data
10 Local Jam Occurrence Count
11 Local SC Occurrence Count
5 Copy count by parts to be replaced 1 Fixed Parts Count COUNT CLEAR
2 Optional Parts Count COUNT CLEAR
Part Name Setting
Part No. Setting
Limit Setting
6 Password setting Key Operator Password 4 digits
EKC Master Key Code 8 digits
Weekly Timer Password 4 digits
7 Service center telephone number Service Center Phone Number 16 digits
setting Service Center FAX Number 16 digits
8 Indication of m/c serial number. Main Machine
Optional Tray
RADF
Finisher
9 Indication of ROM version Indication of versions of
ROMs installed in the main
machine, operation panel,
finisher, and ADF
10
11 ISW write
12 Installation date setting
1 - 51
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
[1] Setting Method [2] High Voltage Adjustment
A special adjustment mode called the 36 Mode is pro- Adjusting the high voltage for charging, transfer, sepa-
vided. This mode is used to perform various adjust- ration, and development.
ments. 1. Select 1 Process Adjustment in the 36 Mode
1. Turn off the main switch. Menu Screen to display the Process Adjustment
2. Turn on the main switch while holding down both Menu Screen.
paper quantity buttons 3 and 6. The 36 Mode 2. Press 1 High Voltage Adjustment in the Proc-
Menu Screen appears. ess Adjustment Menu Screen to display the High
At this point, you are in 36 mode and normal copy op- Voltage Adjustment Menu.
eration is disabled. 3. High Voltage Adjustment consists of the follow-
ing:
[36 Mode Menu Screen] [1] High Voltage Auto Adjustment
[2] High Voltage Adjustment (Charge)
[3] High Voltage Adjustment (Transfer)
[4] High Voltage Adjustment (Separation AC)
[5] High Voltage Adjustment (Separation DC)
[6] High Voltage Adjustment (Charging grid
voltage)
[7] High Voltage Adjustment (Bias of
development)
3. Press the number key corresponding to the item [8] Transfer Guide Confirm
to adjust. 4. Press the number button corresponding to the
The setting screen for each item is displayed. item to be adjusted.
4. Enter data in each adjustment screen. The adjustment screen of the selected item is
5. If there are several adjustment items, press the displayed.
NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM key to select the 5. When adjustment completes, the screen returns
desired item. If there are more screens, press to the High Voltage Adjustment Menu Screen.
the key displayed on screen to change screen. 6. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key in the High Volt-
6. Enter data and press the SET key if it is avail- age Adjustment Menu Screen to return to the
able, to confirm your entry. Process Adjustment Menu Screen.
7. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end adjust-
ment. Note: Adjustments 2-8 on step three are fac-
8. Turn off the main switch and exit the 36 mode. tory settings and should not be adjusted.
9. The new adjustment values take effect after re-
starting the machine.
1 - 52
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
1. High Voltage Auto Adjustment 2. High Voltage Adjustment (Charge)

Charging, separation (AC), separation (DC), de- High Voltage Adjustment (Charge) is inhibited in
velopment bias current and voltage are adjusted the field.
in sequence.
Preparation: Be sure the drum frame is set. 3. High Voltage Adjustment (Transfer)
Default setting value must be set under the
Step Operation guidance of Minolta.
1 Enter the 36 mode. Default: 39
Press 1 Process adjustment. 4. High Voltage Adjustment (Separation AC)
3 [Process Adjustment Menu Screen] Default setting value must be set under the
Press 1 High Voltage Adjustment. guidance of Minolta.
4 [High Voltage Adjustment Menu Screen] Default: 117
Press 1 High Voltage Auto Adjustment.
5 [High Voltage Auto Adjustment screen] 5. High Voltage Adjustment (Separation DC)
Press the START key. Default setting value must be set under the
Various high voltage adjustments are guidance of Minolta.
made automatically. Default: 90
Adjustment completes in about 30 sec-
onds and a message is displayed. 6. High Voltage Adjustment (Charging Grid
6 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- Voltage)
turn to the Process Adjustment Menu High Voltage Adjustment (Charging Grid Voltage)
Screen. is inhibited in the field.
7. High Voltage Adjustment (Bias of

Development)
Default setting value must be set under the
guidance of Minolta.
Default: 77
8. Transfer Guide Confirm

Transfer Guide Confirm is inhibited in the field.
1 - 53
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[3] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment 1. Blade setting mode

Adjusting the blade set, drum potential, maximum den- Automatically setting the blade.
sity (Dmax), dot diameter, laser offset and gamma. Perform this adjustment only when replacing the
1. Select 1 Process adjustment in the 36 Mode drum.
Menu Screen to display the Process Adjustment Preparation: Be sure the drum frame is set.
Menu Screen. Apply setting powder to all the sur-
2. Press 2 Drum peculiarity adjustment in the Proc- face of the drum.
ess Adjustment Menu Screen to display the Drum
Peculiarity Adjustment Menu Screen. Step Operation
3. Drum peculiarity adjustment consists of the fol- 1 Enter the 36 mode.
lowing: 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
[1] Blade setting mode Press 1 Process adjustment.
[2] Auto drum potential adjustment 3 [Process Adjustment Menu Screen]
[3] Auto maximum density adjustment (Dmax ad- Press 2 Drum peculiarity adjustment.
justment) 4 [Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu
[4] Auto dot diameter adjustment Screen]
[5] LD1 offset adjustment Press 1 Blade set mode.
[6] LD2 offset adjustment 5 [Blade Set Mode Adjustment Screen]
[7] Auto gamma adjustment Press the START key.
4. Press the number button corresponding to the Blade is set automatically.
item to be adjusted. Adjustment completes in about 5 sec-
The adjustment screen of the selected item is dis- onds and a message is displayed.
played. 6 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-
5. When adjustment completes, the screen returns turn to the Process Adjustment Menu
to the Drum Characteristic Adjustment Menu Screen.
Screen.
6. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key in the Drum
Characteristic Adjustment Menu Screen to return
to the Process Adjustment Menu Screen.
1 - 54
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
2. Auto drum potential adjustment 3. Auto maximum density adjustment

Automatically adjusting the development bias and (Dmax adjustment)
drum applied voltage by measuring the drum po- Automatically adjusting maximum density
tential. (Dmax).
This adjustment should be performed only when This adjustment should be performed only when
replacing the drum. replacing the drum.
Preparation: Be sure the drum frame is set. Preparation: Be sure the drum frame is set, de-
veloping solution is in the developer,
Step Operation and blade set mode is complete.
Press 1 Process adjustment. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
3 [Process Adjustment Menu Screen] 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
Press 2 Drum peculiarity Adjustment. Press 1 Process adjustment.
4 [Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu 3 [Process Adjustment Menu Screen]
Screen] Press 2 Drum peculiarity adjustment.
Press 2 Auto drum potential adjustment. 4 [Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu
5 [Auto Drum Potential Adjustment Screen]
Screen] Press 3 Auto maximum density adjust-
Press the START key. ment.
Drum bias and applied voltage are ad- 5 [Auto Maximum Density Adjustment
justed automatically. Screen]
Adjustment completes in about 10 sec- Press the START key.
onds and a message is displayed. The drum and developer operate to au-
6 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- tomatically adjust the maximum density
turn to the Process Adjustment Menu (Dmax).
Screen. Adjustment completes in about 20 sec-
onds and a message is displayed.
6 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-
turn to the Process Adjustment Menu
Screen.
1 - 55
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
4. Auto dot diameter adjustment 5. LD1 offset adjustment

Automatically adjusting the dot diameter. Adjusting the LD1 laser write position.
This adjustment should be performed only when This adjustment should be performed only when
replacing the drum. replacing the drum.
Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set, toner Preparation: Be sure the drum frame is set and
is in the developing unit, and blade Maximum density auto adjustment
mode is complete. (Dmax adjustment) is complete.
Step Operation Step Operation

1 Enter the 36 mode. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
Press 1 Process adjustment. Press 1 Process adjustment.
3 [Process Adjustment Menu Screen] 3 [Process Adjustment Menu Screen]
Press 2 Drum peculiarity adjustment. Press 2 Drum peculiarity adjustment.
4 [Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu 4 [Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu
Screen] Screen]
Press 4 Auto dot diameter adjustment. Press 5 LD1 offset adjustment.
5 [Auto Dot Diameter Adjustment Screen] 5 [LD1 Offset Adjustment Screen]
Press the START key. Press the COPY SCREEN key.
The drum and developing unit operate 6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1 and
to automatically adjust the dot diameter. press the Start button to print a test pat-
Adjustment completes in about 10 sec- tern.
onds and a message is displayed. 7 Check the test pattern.
6 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- Specification: The density of test pat-
turn to the Process Adjustment Menu tern image resulting from two laser out-
Screen. put (vertical and horizontal scanning)
must be even vertically and horizontally
between two image density reference
lines, as shown in the following figure.
Reference
line
LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1
1 - 56
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation 6. LD2 Offset Adjustment

8 If the specification is not satisfied, press Adjusting the LD2 laser write position.
the C button while pressing the Utility This adjustment should be performed only when
button. replacing the drum.
9 [LD1 Offset Adjustment Screen] Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set and
Enter an offset value using the numeric Maximum density auto adjustment
keys and press the SET key. (Dmax adjustment) and LD1 off-
Setting range: -128 to +127 set adjustment are complete.
10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the specifica-
tion is satisfied. Step Operation
11 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- 1 Enter the 36 mode.
turn to the Process Adjustment Menu 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
Screen. Press 1 Process adjustment.
3 [Process Adjustment Menu Screen]
Press 2 Drum peculiarity adjustment.
4 [Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu
Screen]
Press 6 LD2 offset adjustment.
5 [LD2 Offset Adjustment Screen]
Press the COPY SCREEN key.
6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1 and
press the Start button to print a test pat-
tern.
7 Check the test pattern.
Specification: The density of test pat-
tern image resulting from two laser out-
put (vertical and horizontal scanning)
must be even vertically and horizontally
between two image density reference
lines, as shown in the following figure.
Reference
line
LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1
1 - 57
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation [4] Drum Characteristic Adjustment

8 If the specification is not satisfied, press (manual)
the C button while pressing the Utility 1. Maximum density manual adjustment
button. Maximum density manual adjustment should be
9 [LD2 Offset Adjustment Screen] performed under the guidance of Minolta.
Enter an offset using the numeric keys Adjustment range: 0 to 255
and press the SET key.
Setting range: -128 to +127 2. Dot diameter correction manual adjust-
10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the specifica- ment
tion is satisfied. Dot diameter correction manual adjustment
11 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- should be performed under the guidance of
turn to the Process Adjustment Menu Minolta.
Screen. Adjustment range: 0 to 255
[5] User specified Paper Setting

7. Auto gamma adjustment
This adjustment is only performed when user uses
Automatically adjusting gamma.
special copy paper and can not be adjusted using the
This adjustment should be performed only when
standard adjustment process.
replacing the drum.
Preparation: Be sure the drum frame is set and
Step Operation
Maximum density auto adjustment
(Dmax adjustment), LD1 offset
adjustment and LD2 offset adjust-
Press 1 Process adjustment.
ment are complete.
Select 4 User specified paper setting.
Step Operation
4 Transfer/separation output screen ap-
pears.
Enter data according to the user
Press 1 Process adjustment.
specified paper.
Data should be input under the guidance
Press 2 Drum peculiarity adjustment.
of Minolta.
4 [Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu
Screen]
Press 7 Auto gamma adjustment.
5 [Auto Gamma Adjustment Screen]
Press the START key.
The drum and developer operate to au-
tomatically adjust gamma.
Adjustment completes in about 20 sec-
onds and a message is displayed.
turn to the Process Adjustment Menu
Screen.
1 - 58
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[6] Recall Standard Data (Process [7] Tray Adjustment

Adjustment) Perform this adjustment only when replacing the
Restoring process adjustment settings to standard tray and bypass feed unit.
values (data after process adjustment).
Step Operation
Step Operation 1 Enter the 36 mode.
1 Enter the 36 mode. 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] Press 2 Image adjustment.
Press 1 Process adjustment. 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
3 [Process Adjustment Menu Screen] Select 1 Tray adjustment.
Select 5 Recall standard data. 4 [Tray Adjustment Screen]
4 [Recall Standard Data Screen] Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM
Press the YES key. key to select the tray to be adjusted.
Various data are restored to standard The screen changes from Tray 1 to
values. Tray 2 to Tray 3 to Manual feed.
5 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- At this point, set the width between the
turn to the Process Adjustment Menu paper setting guide plates at both sides
Screen. of the tray. Set it to 250mm by measuring
the distance between inside surfaces of
the paper setting guide plates using a
scale. Likewise, set the bypass feed tray
to 210mm.
5 Press the START key.
The selected tray is automatically ad-
justed.
After adjustment completes, a message
is displayed.
1 - 59
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[8] Magnification Adjustment 1. Printer drum clock adjustment (FD Zoom)

Adjusting the printer and copy vertical and horizontal Adjusting the printer vertical magnification.
magnifications.
1. Select 2 Image adjustment in the 36 Mode Menu Step Operation
Screen to display the Image Adjustment Menu 1 Enter the 36 mode.
Screen. 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
2. Press 2 Magnification adjustment in the Image Press 2 Image adjustment.
Adjustment Menu Screen to display the Magnifi- 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
cation Adjustment Menu Screen. Press 2 Magnification adjustment.
3. Magnification adjustment consists of the following: 4 [Magnification Adjustment Menu
[1] Printer drum clock adjustment Screen]
[2] Printer horizontal adjustment Press 1 Printer drum clock adjustment.
[3] Scanner drum clock adjustment 5 [Printer Drum Clock Adjustment
[4] RADF drum clock adjustment Screen]
4. Press the number button corresponding to the Press the COPY SCREEN key.
item to be adjusted. 6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1 and
The adjustment screen for the selected item is press the Start button to print a test pat-
displayed. tern (No. 16).
5. After adjustment completes, the screen returns 7 Measure the vertical magnification with
to the Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen. a ruler.
6. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key on the Magnifi- Specification: ±0.5% or less (100%
cation Adjustment Menu Screen to return to the magnification) Within ±1mm with
Image adjustment Menu Screen. respect to 206 mm
Caution: Must check and adjust the vertical
magnification (printer) at maintenance.
When adjusted the vertical
magnification (printer), must adjust the
timing (printer) at the same time since 206 1
the leading edge detection timing
(paper feed restart timing) may be
shifted.
8 If the specification is not satisfied, press

the C button while pressing the Utility
button.
9 [Printer Drum Clock Adjustment
Screen]
Enter a value using the numeric keys
and press the SET key.
Setting range: -27 to +100
1 step=0.05%
tion is satisfied.
turn to the Magnification Adjustment
Menu Screen.
1 - 60
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
2. Printer horizontal adjustment (Zoom CD 3. Scanner drum clock adjustment (Scanner

Main Scan) FD Zoom)
Adjusting the printer horizontal magnification. Adjusting vertical magnification during platen copy.
Caution: There is no horizontal magnification
Step Operation adjustment for the scanner.
Press 2 Image adjustment. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
Press 2 Magnification adjustment. Press 2 Image adjustment.
4 [Magnification Adjustment Menu 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
Screen] Press 2 Magnification adjustment.
Press 2 Printer horizontal adjustment. 4 [Magnification Adjustment Menu
5 [Printer horizontal Adjustment Screen]
Screen] Press 3 Scanner drum clock adjust-
Press the COPY SCREEN key. ment.
6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1 and 5 [Scanner Drum Clock Adjustment
press the Start button to print a test pat- Screen]
tern (No. 16). Press the COPY SCREEN key.
7 Measure the horizontal magnification 6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1, set
with a ruler. test chart (p/n 9005-9005-19) on original
Specification: ±0.5% or less (100% glass and press the Start button.
magnification) Within ±1mm with 7 Measure the vertical magnification with
respect to 190 mm a ruler.
Specification: ±0.5% or less (100% mag-
nification)
Within ±1mm with respect to 200 mm
190

button. 200
9 [Printer Horizontal Adjustment
Screen] 8 If the specification is not satisfied, press
Enter a value with the numeric keys and the C button while pressing the Utility
press the SET key. button.
Setting range: -10 to +10 9 [Scanner Drum Clock Adjustment
1 step=0.1% Screen]
10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the specifica- Enter a value with the numeric keys and
tion is satisfied. press the SET key.
11 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- Setting range: -40 to +40
turn to the Magnification Adjustment 1 step=0.05%
Menu Screen. 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the specifica-
tion is satisfied.
turn to the Magnification Adjustment
Menu Screen.
1 - 61
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
4. RADF drum clock adjustment Step Operation

Adjusting vertical magnification during RADF 11 [RADF Drum Clock Adjustment (RADF
copy. copy) Screen]
Enter a value with the numeric keys and
Step Operation press the SET key.
1 Enter the 36 mode. Setting range: -40 to +40
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] 1 step=0.05%
Press 2 Image adjustment. 12 Repeat steps 5 to 11 until the specifica-
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] tion is satisfied.
Press 2 Magnification adjustment. 13 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-
4 [Magnification Adjustment Menu turn to the Magnification Adjustment
Screen] Menu Screen.
Press 4 RADF drum clock adjustment.
5 [RADF Drum Clock Adjustment
Screen]
Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM
key to select the magnification to be ad-
justed.
The screen rotates from 100% to 65%
to 200% to 400%.
6 Press the 400dpi or 600dpi key to se-
lect the resolution to be adjusted.
7 Press the COPY SCREEN key.
8 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1, set
adjustment chart on RADF and press the
Start button.
9 Measure the vertical magnification with
a ruler.
Specification: ±0.5% or less (100%
magnification) Within ±1mm with
respect to 190 mm

button.
1 - 62
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[9] Timing Adjustment 1. Printer restart timing adjustment (Lead

Adjusting the leading edge timing (paper feed restart Edge Registration)
timing), registration loop amount, and leading edge Adjusting the leading edge timing for post cards
blank cut amount. and other papers.
1. Select 2 Image adjustment in the 36 Mode Menu
Screen to display the Image Adjustment Menu Step Operation
Screen. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
2. Press 3 Timing adjustment in the Image Adjust- 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
ment Menu Screen to display the Timing Adjust- Press 2 Image adjustment.
ment Menu Screen. 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
3. Timing adjustment consists of the following ad- Press 3 Timing adjustment.
justments: 4 [Timing Adjustment Menu Screen]
[1] Printer restart timing adjustment Press 1 Printer restart timing adjust-
[2] Printer resist loop adjustment ment.
[3] Printer pre-resist adjustment 5 [Printer Restart Timing Adjustment
[4] Printer lead edge timing adjustment Screen]
[5] Scanner restart timing adjustment Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM
[6] RADF restart timing adjustment key to select the item to be adjusted.
[7] RADF resist loop adjustment The screen changes between Others
4. Press the number button corresponding to the and Post card.
item to be adjusted. 6 Press the COPY SCREEN key.
The adjustment screen of the selected item ap- 7 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1 and
pears. press the Start button to print a test pat-
5. The Timing Adjustment Menu Screen reappears tern (No. 16).
when adjustment completes. 8 Sight check the leading edge timing.
6. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key in the Timing Specification: 20 mm +1.0 mm 0 mm
Adjustment Menu Screen to return to the Image
Adjustment Menu Screen.
20

button.
10 [Printer Restart Timing Adjustment
Screen]
press the SET key.
1 step=0.1 mm
tion is satisfied.
turn to the Timing Adjustment Menu
Screen.
1 - 63
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
2 Printer Resist Loop Adjustment (Loop 3. Printer Pre-resist Adjustment

Timing) Adjusting the pre-resist for tray 1, tray 2, tray 3,
Adjusting the printer resist loop amount for trays tray 4 (LCT), and ADU.
(tray 1, 2, 3), manual feed tray, and ADU.
Step Operation
Step Operation 1 Enter the 36 mode.
1 Enter the 36 mode. 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] Press 2 Image adjustment.
Press 2 Image adjustment. 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] Press 3 Timing adjustment.
Press 3 Timing adjustment. 4 [Timing Adjustment Menu Screen]
4 [Timing Adjustment Menu Screen] Press 3 Printer Pre-resist adjustment
Press 2 Paper resist loop adjustment 5 [Printer Pre-resist Adjustment
5 [Printer Resist Loop Adjustment Screen]
Screen] Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM
Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM key to select the item to be adjusted.
key to select the item to be adjusted. The screen changes from Tray 1 to Tray
The screen changes from Tray to Manual 2 to Tray 3 to Tray 4 (LCT) to ADU.
tray to ADU. 6 Press the COPY SCREEN key.
6 Press the COPY SCREEN key. 7 Press the Start button to make a copy.
7 Press the Start button to make a copy. 8 Check the printer pre-registration.
8 Check the paper feed loop amount. 9 If the printer pre-registration is not ap-
9 If the printer registration loop amount is propriate, press the C button while
not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the Utility button.
pressing the Utility button. 10 [Printer Pre-resist Adjustment
10 [Printer Resist Loop Adjustment Screen]
Screen] Enter a value with the numeric keys and
Enter a value with the numeric keys and press the SET key.
press the SET key. • Tray 1, 2, 3, 4 (LCT)
• Tray (tray 1, 2, 3) Setting range: -5 to +5
Setting range: -5 to +5 1 step= 2 ms
1 step= 2 ms • ADU
• Manual feed tray Setting range: -10 to +10
Setting range: -10 to +10 1 step= 2 ms
1 step= 2 ms 11 Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the printer pre-
• ADU registration is appropriate.
Setting range: -10 to +10 12 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-
1 step= 2 ms turn to the Timing Adjustment Menu
11 Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the printer reg- Screen.
istration loop amount is appropriate.
Screen.
1 - 64
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
4. Printer lead edge timing adjustment 5. Scanner restart timing adjustment

(Lead Edge Erase) (Lead Edge Registration)
Adjusting the printer lead edge timing (original Adjusting the scanner restart timing during platen
erasure amount). copy.
Caution: Printer lead edge timing adjustment
Step Operation must be completed before performing
1 Enter the 36 mode. this adjustment.
Press 2 Image adjustment. Step Operation
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] 1 Enter the 36 mode.
Press 3 Timing adjustment. 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
4 [Timing Adjustment Menu Screen] Press 2 Image adjustment.
Press 4 Printer lead edge timing ad- 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
justment Press 3 Timing adjustment.
5 [Printer Lead Edge Timing Adjust- 4 [Timing Adjustment Menu Screen]
ment Screen] Press 5 Scanner restart timing adjust-
Press the COPY SCREEN key. ment
6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1, 5 [Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment
place test chart (p/n 9005-9005-19) on Screen]
original glass, and press the Start but- Press the COPY SCREEN key.
ton. 6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1,
7 Check the printer leading edge blank cut place test chart (p/n 9005-9005-19)on
amount. original glass, and press the Start but-
Specification: within 3 mm ton.
8 If the printer leading edge blank cut 7 Check the tip timing.
amount is not appropriate, press the C Specification: within 3 mm
button while pressing the Utility button. 8 If the leading edge timing is not appro-
9 [Printer Lead Edge Timing Adjust- priate, press the C button while press-
ment Screen] ing the Utility button.
Enter a value with the numeric keys and 9 [Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment
Press the SET key. Screen]
Setting range: -20 to +40 Enter a value with the numeric keys and
1 step=0.1 mm press the SET key.
10 Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the printer Setting range: -60 to +20
leading edge blank cut amount is within 1 step=0.1 mm
specification. 10 Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the leading
11 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- edge timing is within specification.
turn to the Timing Adjustment Menu 11 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-
Screen. turn to the Timing Adjustment Menu
Screen.
1 - 65
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
6. RADF restart timing adjustment (Lead 7. RADF resist loop adjustment (Loop for
Edge from RADF) RADF)
Adjusting the scanner restart timing during RADF Adjusting the resist loop amount during RADF
copy. copy.
Caution: Printer lead edge timing adjustment Caution: Printer lead edge timing adjustment
must be completed before performing must be completed before performing
this adjustment. this adjustment.
Step Operation Step Operation

1 Enter the 36 mode. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
Press 2 Image adjustment. Press 2 Image adjustment.
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
Press 3 Timing adjustment. Press 3 Timing adjustment.
4 [Timing Adjustment Menu Screen] 4 [Timing Adjustment Menu Screen]
Press 6 RADF restart timing adjust- Press 7 RADF resist loop adjustment.
ment. 5 [RADF Resist Loop Adjustment
5 [RADF Restart Timing Adjustment Screen]
Screen] Press the 400dpi or 600dpi key to se-
Press the COPY SCREEN key. lect the resolution to adjust.
6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1, 6 Press the COPY SCREEN key and then
place adjustment chart on RADF, and switch to Both side - Single side copy
press the Start button. mode.
7 Check the leading edge timing on front 7 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1, set
and back side. adjustment chart on RADF, and press
Specification: within 3 mm the Start button.
8 If the leading edge timing is not appro- 8 Check the front and back side registra-
priate, press the C button while press- tion loop amount.
ing the Utility button. 9 If the registration loop amount is not ap-
9 [RADF Restart Timing Adjustment propriate, press the C button while press-
Screen] ing the Utility button.
Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM 10 [RADF Resist Loop Adjustment
key to select the item to be adjusted. Screen]
The screen changes from front side to Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM
back side. key to select the item to be adjusted.
10 Enter a value with the numeric keys and The screen changes from front side to
press the SET key. back side.
Setting range: -60 to +50 11 Enter a value with the numeric keys and
1 step=0.1 mm press the SET key.
11 Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the leading Setting range: -10 to +10
edge timing is within specification. 1 step=0.5 mm
12 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- 12 Repeat steps 5 to 11 until the registra-
turn to the Timing Adjustment Menu tion loop amount is within specification.
Screen. 13 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-
Screen.
1 - 66
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[10] RADF Adjustment 1. RADF density adjustment

Performing RADF density adjustment, RADF original When the original reader slit glass is replaced,
size adjustment, RADF sensitivity adjustment, and the density when reading original with RADF must
RADF incline offset adjustment. be adjusted.
1. Select 2 Image adjustment in the 36 Mode Menu Preparation: Wipe the original reader slit glass
Screen and display the Image Adjustment Menu clean. Check that the white chart
Screen. is not dir ty or folded. Load
2. Press 4 RADF adjustment in the Image Adjust- A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1.
ment Menu Screen and display the RADF Ad-
justment Menu Screen. Step Operation
3. RADF adjustment consists of the following items: 1 Enter the 36 mode.
[1] RADF density adjustment 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
[2] RADF original size adjustment Press 2 Image adjustment.
[3] RADF sensitivity adjustment 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
[4] RADF incline offset adjustment Press 4 RADF adjustment.
4. Press the number button corresponding to the 4 [RADF Adjustment Menu Screen]
item to adjust. Press 1 RADF density adjustment.
The adjustment screen of the selected item ap- 5 [RADF Density Adjustment Screen]
pears. Set white chart on RADF (Caution 1).
5. The RADF Adjustment Menu Screen reappears 6 Press the START key.
when adjustment completes. RADF density is adjusted automatically.
6. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key in the RADF When adjustment completes, a message
Adjustment Menu Screen to return to the Image appears on the screen.
Adjustment Menu Screen. 7 If an error message is displayed, repeat
steps 5 and 6 (Caution 2).
turn to the RADF Adjustment Menu
Screen.
Caution 1: Be sure to set the white test chart in

A4(8.5x11) orientation.
Caution 2: If the error message appears repeat-
edly, there is a possibility of scan-
ner-system mechanical, optical, or
electrical adjustment error or parts
defect.
1 - 67
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
2. RADF original size adjustment 3. RADF sensitivity adjustment

Perform this adjustment when the RADF origi- Perform this adjustment when replacing the
nal size detection does not operate properly or RADF control board.
when replacing the RADF control board.
Caution: RADF original size adjustment consists Step Operation
of A4/8.5 x 11 and B6/5.5 x 8.5R. Use 1 Enter the 36 mode.
the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM key 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
to select the desired adjustment item. Press 2 Image adjustment.
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
Step Operation Press 4 RADF adjustment.
1 Enter the 36 mode. 4 [RADF Adjustment Menu Screen]
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] Press 3 RADF sensitivity adjustment.
Press 2 Image adjustment. 5 [RADF Sensitivity Adjustment
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] Screen]
Press 4 RADF adjustment. Press the START key.
4 [RADF Adjustment Menu Screen] RADF sensitivity is adjusted automati-
Press 2 RADF original size adjustment. cally.
5 [RADF Original Size Adjustment 6 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-
Screen] turn to the RADF Adjustment Menu
Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM Screen.
key to select original size to adjust.
The screen changes between A4/8.5 x
11 and B6/5.5 x 8.5R.
6 Set the original of the selected size on
RADF and press the START key.
RADF original size is adjusted automati-
cally.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 and adjust both
sizes.
Screen.
1 - 68
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
4. RADF incline offset adjustment (Skew [11] Centering Adjustment

Adjustment) Perform this adjustment to center the image in the pa-
Perform this adjustment when replacing the per feed direction.
RADF control board. 1. Select 2 Image adjustment in the 36 Mode Menu
Screen to display the Image Adjustment Menu
Step Operation Screen.
1 Enter the 36 mode. 2. Press 5 Centering adjustment in the Image
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] Adjustment Menu Screen to display the Centering
Press 2 Image adjustment. Adjustment Menu Screen.
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] 3. Centering adjustment consists of the following:
Press 4 RADF adjustment. [1] Printer centering adjustment
4 [RADF Adjustment Menu Screen] [2] Scanner centering adjustment
Press 4 RADF incline offset adjust- [3] RADF centering adjustment
ment. 4. Press the button corresponding to the item to ad-
5 [RADF Incline Offset Adjustment just.
Screen] The adjustment screen of the selected item ap-
Press the COPY SCREEN key. pears.
6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1, set 5. The Centering Adjustment Menu Screen reap-
adjustment chart on RADF, and press pears when adjustment completes.
the Start button. 6. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key in the Centering
7 Check the RADF incline offset. Adjustment Menu Screen to return to the Image
Specification: 0.5% Adjustment Menu Screen.
8 If the RADF incline offset is not appro-
priate, press the C button while press-
ing the Utility button.
9 [RADF Incline Offset Adjustment
Screen]
press the SET key.
1 step= 0.05%
10 If the RADF incline offset is not within
specification, repeat steps 5 to 9.
Screen.
1 - 69
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
1. Printer Centering Adjustment 2. Scanner Centering Adjustment

Adjusting the printer centering. Adjusting the scanner centering.
Preparation: Printer centering adjustment must
Step Operation be completed before performing
1 Enter the 36 mode. this adjustment.
Press 2 Image adjustment. Step Operation
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] 1 Enter the 36 mode.
Press 5 Centering adjustment. 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
4 [Centering Adjustment Menu Screen] Press 2 Image adjustment.
Press 1 Printer centering adjustment. 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
5 [Printer Centering Adjustment Press 5 Centering adjustment.
Screen] 4 [Centering Adjustment Menu Screen]
Press the COPY SCREEN key. Press 2 Scanner centering adjustment.
6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1 and 5 [Scanner Centering Adjustment
press the Start button to print a test pat- Screen]
tern (No. 16). Press the COPY SCREEN key.
7 Fold A3(11x17) size paper in half in the 6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1,
short edge (landscape) orientation and place test chart (p/n 9005-9005-19) on
check whether the lines on the left and original glass, and press the Start but-
right overlap completely. ton.
Specification: ±1mm 7 Fold A3(11x17) size paper in half in the
8 • If the printed image is not appropriate, short edge (landscape) orientation and
press the C button while pressing the check whether the lines on the left and
Utility button. right overlap completely.
9 [Printer Centering Adjustment Specification: ±2mm
Screen] 8 If the offset is not within specification,
Enter a value with the numeric keys and press the C button while pressing the
press the SET key. Utility button.
Setting range: -64 to +63 9 [Scanner Centering Adjustment
1 step=0.1 mm Screen]
10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the offset is Enter a value with the numeric keys and
within specification. press the SET key.
11 Repeat steps 5 to 10 to adjust tray 2, Setting range: -30 to +30
tray 3, manual feed tray, and LCT. Use 1 step=0.1 mm
appropriate paper for each tray to check 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the offset is
the centering. within specification.
12 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- 11 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re-
turn to the Centering Adjustment Menu turn to the Centering Adjustment Menu
Screen. Screen.
1 - 70
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
3. RADF Centering Adjustment [12] Warp Adjustment (Copier)

Adjusting the RADF copy centering. This is to correct warp during platen/RADF copy-
The adjustment items are as follows: ing. There are four adjustment items for warp
• Small size front side(B5R), (invoice) correction:
• Small size back side(B5R), (invoice) Scanner (Platen) warp adjustment (Main)
• Large size front side(A3), (11 x 17) Scanner (Platen) warp adjustment (Deputy),
• Large size back side(A3), (11 x 17) (Subscan)
Scanner (RADF) adjustment (Main)
Step Operation Scanner (RADF) adjustment (Deputy), (Subscan)
Press 2 Image adjustment. 1 Enter 36 to select the 36 mode.
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] 2 [36 Mode Menu Screen]
Press 5 Centering adjustment. Press 2 Image adjustment.
4 [Centering Adjustment Menu Screen] 3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen]
Press 3 RADF centering adjustment. Press 6 Warp adjustment (Copier).
5 [RADF Centering Adjustment Screen] 4 [Warp Adjustment (Copier) Screen]
Press the COPY SCREEN key and enter Press the Copy Screen key.
Both side - Single side copy mode. 5 Set A3(11x17) paper in tray 1, then place
6 Load A3(11x17) size paper in tray 1, an adjustment chart on the platen for
place small size or large size original on checking platen copy warp, or on the
RADF, and press the Start button. RADF for checking RADF copy warp.
7 Fold the paper in half at the center and 6 Check for platen copy warp or RADF
check whether the lines on the left and copy warp.
right overlap completely. Allowable warp range: The difference in
Specification: ±1mm lengths of two diagonals of a 200 mm
8 If the offset is not within specification, square must be within 1.4 mm.
press the C button while pressing the 7 If the platen copy warp or RADF copy
Utility button. warp is outside the allowable warp range,
9 [RADF Centering Adjustment Screen] press the Utility button, and the C button
Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM with the Utility button held pressed.
key to select the item to adjust. 8 [Warp Adjustment (Copier) Screen]
The screen changes from Small size Press the NEXT ITEM or PREVIOUS ITEM
front side to Small size back side to key to select the desired adjustment item.
Large size front side to Large size back 9 Enter a number with ten keys, and press
side. the Set key.
10 Enter a value with the numeric keys and Range of setting: -50 to +50
press the SET key. Warp correction unit: 0.06%
Setting range: -30 to +30 10 Repeat steps 6 through 9 until the warp
1 step=0.1 mm is within the allowable range.
11 Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the offset is 11 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to
within specification. return to the Warp Adjustment (Copier)
12 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- screen.
turn to the Centering Adjustment Menu
Screen.
1 - 71
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[13] Recall Standard Data [14] Running Test Mode

(Image Adjustment) Testing continuous copy operation.
Restoring image adjustment settings to standard val- Select 3 Running Test Mode in the 36 Mode Menu
ues (data after process adjustment). Screen.
This adjustment consists of the following items:
Step Operation 1. Intermittent copy mode
1 Enter the 36 mode. In this mode, the machine goes into the copy
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] ready state after completing a set number of copy
Press 2 Image adjustment. operation, waits 0.5 sec, and then repeats the
3 [Image Adjustment Menu Screen] same operation.
Select 7 Recall standard data. 2. Paperless intermittent copy mode
4 [Recall Standard Data Screen] In this mode, the machine makes copies at approxi-
Press the YES key. mately the same timing as for normal copy without
Various data are restored to standard performing paper detection or jam detection. In
values. addition, similar to intermittent copy mode, the ma-
5 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to re- chine goes into the copy ready state after complet-
turn to the Image Adjustment Menu ing a set number of copy operation, waits 0.5 sec,
Screen. and then repeats the same operation.
3. Paperless mode
In this mode, the machine makes copies at approxi-
mately the same timing as for normal copy without
performing paper detection or jam detection.
4. Paperless endless mode
In this mode, the copy quantity is set to infinity.
In addition, similar to Paperless mode, the ma-
chine makes copies at approximately the same
timing as for normal copy without performing
paper detection or jam detection.
5. Running mode
This mode consists of Paperless endless mode
with repetitive optical scan and auto paper feed
tray change.
Step Operation
Press 3 Running test mode.
3 [Running Test Mode Menu Screen]
Press mode keys 1 to 5 .
4 [Copy Screen]
Press the Start button.
5 Check the copy operation and then press
the Stop/Clear button to stop.
6 Turn off the main switch and exit Run-
ning Test Mode.
1 - 72
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[15] Test Pattern Output

Output test pattern.
Select [4] Test pattern output mode in the 36 Mode
Menu Screen to display the Test Pattern Output Mode
Screen.
Caution: Do not touch any mode that is not spe-
cifically described.
Step Operation
Press 4 Test pattern output mode.
3 [Test Pattern Output Mode Screen]
Use the numeric keys to enter the
number of the test pattern to output and
press the SET key..
4 Press the COPY SCREEN key.
5 [Copy Screen]
Press the Start button to output a test
pattern.
6 To output another test pattern, press the
C button while pressing the Utility button
and repeat steps 3 to 5.
7 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end.
1 - 73
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
No. 1 Overall halftone
[Check item]
• When density is set to 70 (halftone)

If there are white stripes, black stripes, or uneven density, determine whether the fault is with the
scanner or the printer.
• When density is set to 0 (white)
If the test pattern is blurred, determine whether the fault is with the scanner or the printer.
• When density is set to 255 (black)
If the density is light, determine whether the fault is with the scanner or the printer.
* The above density settings are typical values. See [15] Test Pattern Density Setting for more
information on density setting.
Test patterns
DENSITY SET TO 70 DENSITY SET TO 0 DENSITY SET TO 255
1 - 74
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
No. 2 Gray scale pattern
[Check Item]
If the test pattern is blurred or the density is light, determine whether the fault is with the processing
system or with γ correction. If the copy image is abnormal despite this test pattern being normal,
either the image processing system or the scanner system is abnormal.
Test patterns
1 - 75
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[Check item]
If the test pattern is abnormal, check whether the two lasers are emitting light normally.
Test patterns
1 - 76
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[Check Item]
If the test pattern is abnormal, check whether the two laser outputs are uniform.
Test patterns
LD-2 LD-1
1 - 77
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
No. 11 Beam misalignment check
[Check Item]
If the test pattern is abnormal, check to see if position correction of the two laser beams is normal.
Test patterns
1 - 78
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
No. 16 Linearity evaluation pattern
[Check Item]
Use this test pattern to determine whether the fault is with the scanner or the printer. The printer
horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, tilt, and leading edge timing can be checked. If the
copy image is defective despite no abnormality in the test pattern, the scanner is at fault.
Test patterns
Edge of paper
31mm 237mm
Edge of paper
20mm
190mm
m
0m
28
206mm
28
0m
m
190mm
1 - 79
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 ADJUSTMENT
[16] Test Pattern Density Setting [17] List Output Mode

Setting the test pattern density. Outputing various data.
Select 5 Test pattern density setting in the 36 Mode 1. Select 7 List output mode in the 36 Mode Menu
Menu Screen to display the Test Pattern Density Set- Screen to display the List Output Mode Menu
ting Screen. Screen.
2. List output mode menu consists of the following:
Step Operation [1] Machine management list 1
1 Enter the 36 mode. [2] Adjustment data list
2 [36 Mode Menu Screen] [3] Machine management list 2
Press 5 Test pattern density setting. [4] Parameter list
3 [Test Pattern Density Setting Screen] [5] Dump memory list
Use the numeric keys to enter a number [6] Font pattern list
and press the SET key. 3. Press the number button corresponding to the
Setting range: 0 to 255 item to adjust.
4 Press the COPY SCREEN key. The output setting screen for the selected item
5 [Copy Screen] appears.
Press the Start button to output a test 4. The List Output Mode Menu Screen reappears
pattern. after each list is output.
6 To output another test pattern, press the 5. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key in the List Out-
C button while pressing the Utility button put Menu Screen to return to 36 Mode Menu
and repeat steps 3 to 5. Screen.
7 Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to end.
Note: List output screen is not displayed for
[3] Data list 2 and subsequent items
unless address 30-1 is set to 1 with
software DIPSW in 25 Mode [1].
1 - 80
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
[1] 47 Mode/Multi Mode Setting Method Step Operation
1. 47 mode 1 Turn on the main switch while holding
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (in- down 4 and 7 of the copy quantity but-
put/output check function) to check and adjust ton.
various signals and loads. 2 [47 Mode (I/O Check Mode) Screen]
Use the copy quantity button to enter the
2. 47 mode operation code.
(1) Starting 47 mode 3 Check the input signal check result dis-
a. Turn off the main switch. played after “IN:” in the second row of
b. Turn the main switch back on while holding the message area.
down 4 and 7 of the copy quantity button. 4 To perform the output check, press the
c. Check that the 47 mode is started when mes- Start button to check the output load.
sage “I/O check mode” appears in the first 5 Press the Stop/Clear button to end out-
row of the message area. put check.
(2) Input/output check 6 To perform other checks, enter a new
a. Refer to the I/O check code list and use the code using the copy quantity button.
copy quantity button to enter the code for the 7 Turn off the main switch to exit the 47
desired signal (such as sensor). mode.
b. The entered code appears enclosed in <> in
the second row of the message area. Note 1: No data appears on the second row of
c. The numbers are shifted left as they are dis- the message area when 47 mode is en-
played. tered. Message appears when a number
d. Check the status of the signal displayed as H is entered.
or L after “IN:” in the second row of the mes- Note 2: Simply enter a new code to switch to
sage display area. another code.
Caution: H and L indicate the level of the sig- Note 3: The new code will overwrite the old one.
nal input to CB (control board). Note 4: To reset the machine without turning off
Note the relationship between the the power, press the Stop/Clear button
status of the input signal source and while holding down the Utility button. (The
the message display. 47 mode initial state is entered.)
(3) Output check
a. Refer to the I/O check code list and use the
copy quantity button to enter the code for the
desired output load.
b. Press the Start button.
Depending on the output, a load will be acti-
vated or a signal will be output.
Start button Code Description

Before pressing Input Input signal level
indication
After pressing Output Output load
operation/signal
(4) Ending 47 mode

a. Press stop/clear button to cancel the operation.
b. Turn off the main switch to exit the 47 mode.
1 - 81
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT
3. Multi mode
Step Operation
This mode is entered from the 47 mode. It ena-
bles multiple I/O checks using a single I/O check 1 Enter the 47 mode.
code. 2 [47 Mode (I/O Check Mode) Screen]
Use the copy quantity button and enter the
code.
4. Multi mode operation method
Enter the 47 mode and proceed as follows: 3 Press the Utility button.
4 Enter the multi number using the copy
(1) To check the input
quantity button.
a. Using the copy quantity button, enter the
5 Press the Utility button.
check code for the desired I/O.
6 Check the input signal check result dis-
b. The 47 mode code appears enclosed in <>
played after “IN:” in the second row of
in the second row of the message area.
the message area.
c. Press the Utility button.
7 To perform the output check, press the
d. “-” (hyphen) will be displayed following the 47
Start button to check the output load.
mode code enclosed in <>. (only codes that
8 Press the Stop/Clear button to end the
support the multi mode can be used)
output check.
e. Enter the desired multi number using the copy
9 Turn off the main switch to exit the 47
quantity button. (Refer to the multi mode list.)
mode.
f. The multi number will be displayed enclosed
in <>, following the 47 mode code and “-”.
Note 1: To check another multi number in the
same code, press the Utility button after
I/O Check Mode
completing step 8. Only data enclosed in
<10-01> IN:-- OUT:--
<> will be cleared. Then enter another
multi number.
g. Press the Utility button.
Note 2: To return to the normal 47 mode, press
h. Check the status of the code displayed as H
the Stop/Clear button while holding down
or L after “IN:” in the second row of the mes-
the Utility button after completing step 8.
sage display area.
(The screen will return to the 47 mode
initial state.)
(2) To check the output
a. Press the Start button.
b. Press the Stop/Clear button after checking the
output.
(3) Ending multi mode

a. Turn off the main switch to exit the 47 mode
(multi mode).
1 - 82
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT
[2] Initial Set [3] 47 Mode/Multi Mode Setting Method

Restoring various data to default at factory shipment. Listing the machine adjustment values.
No adjustment can be made in this mode.
1. Adjustment Method
1. Adjustment Method
Step Operation (Display) Operation
Point Step Operation (Display) Operation
1 Turn on the main Paper quantity Point
switch while holding button 1 Turn on the main Paper quantity
down the paper Main switch switch while holding button
quantity buttons 4 down the paper Main switch
and 7. quantity buttons 4
2 Enter 093 with the Paper quantity and 7.
paper quantity button. button 2 Enter 094 with the Paper quantity
Check that 93 ap- paper quantity button. button
pears in the message Check that 94 ap-
display area. pears in the message
3 Press the Start Start button display area.
button. 3 Press the Start Start button
button.
1 - 83
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT
[4] Input checklist

Classi- Code Symbol Multi Display and
fication mode Name Signal Source
H L
001 TLD Remaining toner detection signal Yes No
002 TH5 Drum (internal) temperature detection signal
003 TH1 Fixing upper roller temperature detection signal
Analog signal
004 TH3 Heat roller temperature detection signal

005 Humidity sensor signal
006 Dmax MONI signal
007 Dmax signal
008 γ signal
009 Drum potential signal
010 Drum jam signal
PS26 1 Tray 1 no paper detection signal
PS27 2 Tray 2 no paper detection signal
011 PS28 3 Tray 3 no paper detection signal ON OFF
PS29 4 Bypass feed tray no paper detection signal
PS108 5 LCT no paper detection signal
PS34 1 Tray 1 remaining paper detection signal
012 PS102 4 LCT remaining paper detection signal 1 ON OFF
PS103 5 LCT remaining paper detection signal 2
PS32 1 Tray 1 paper size detection signal 1
Paper feed

013 PS36 4 Tray 2 paper size detection signal 2 ON OFF
PS55 7 By-pass feed tray paper size detection signal 1
PS56 8 By-pass feed tray paper size detection signal
VR1 1 Tray 1 paper size detection VR signal
014 0~255
VR4 4 By-pass paper feed tray paper size detection VR signal
1 Tray 1 paper size signal 0:11x17, 1:A3,2:B4, 3:8.5x14, 4:A4R, 5:8.5x11R,
2 Tray 2 paper size signal 6:B5R, 7:8.5x11, 8:5.5x8.5R, 9:A4, 10:A5R,
3 Tray 3 paper size signal 11:B5, 12:A5, 13:B6R, 14:5.5x8.5. 14:5.5x8.5,
015 4 By-pass feed tray 15:B6, 16:Special, 17:F4(8.125x13.25),
paper size signal 18:F4(8x13), 19:F4(8.25x13), 20:F4(8.5x13),
21:Postcard
1 - 84
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT

H L
PS20 1 Tray 1 upper limit detection signal Yes No
PS21 2 Tray 2 upper limit detection signal
PS22 3 Tray 3 upper limit detection signal
016 PS23 4 By-pass feed tray upper limit detection signal ON OFF
PS43 5 By-pass feed tray lower limit detection signal
Paper feed
PS109 6 LCT upper limit detection signal

PS101 7 LCT lower limit detection signal
1 Tray 1 tray set detection signal
017 2 Tray 2 tray set detection signal ON OFF
3 Tray 3 tray set detection signal
PS14 1 Tray 1 handle release detection signal
018 PS15 2 Tray 2 handle release detection signal ON OFF
PS16 3 Tray 3 handle release detection signal
PS48 1 Tray 1 paper pre-registration detection signal
020 ON OFF
PS107 4 LCT paper pre-registration detection signal
PS18 1 Tray 1 paper conveyance detection signal
021 PS53 2 Tray 2 paper conveyance detection signal ON OFF
PS19 3 Tray 3 paper conveyance detection signal
PS47 1 Tray 1 paper feed detection signal
022 ON OFF
Paper feed/conveyance
PS106 4 LCT paper feed detection signal

PS45 1 Copy paper leading edge detection signal
023 PS54 2 Paper loop detection signal ON OFF
PS44 3 Second paper feed detection signal
PS2 1 Fixing unit paper ejection detection signal
PS61 2 Paper eject detection signal
024 PS57 3 Paper reversal detection signal ON OFF
PS8 4 Paper reverse and conveyance detection signal
PS3 5 Fixing unit jam detection signal
Vertical conveyance jam access door open/close detection
PS17 1
signal 2
PS24 2 Front door open/close detection signal 1 (right front door)
PS25 3 Front door open/close detection signal 2 (left front door) Open Close
025 MS1,MS2 4 Front door open/close detection SW signal
PS100 5 LCT top cover open/close detection signal
PS110 6 LCT jam access cover open/close detection signal
7 Fixing unit set detection signal
ON OFF
8 Drum unit set detection signal
PS5 1 Scanner home position detection signal
Optics unit
PS6 2 Exposure home position detection signal

030 ON OFF
PS7 3 ADF braking detection signal 1 (paper ejection side)
PS4 4 Scanner reversal detection signal 2 (paper feed side)
1 - 85
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT

H L
PS62 1 APS sensor 1 detection signal
Optics unit

PS65 4 APS sensor 4 detection signal ON OFF
031
PS315 8 APS timing detection signal
051 SW100 LCT tray down SW detection signal ON OFF
Optics unit unique func-
052 C(K) Key counter detection signal Yes No

053 Power supply identification signal 200V 100V
PS41 1 Charging cleaning pad home position detection signal
tions
PS42 2 Charging cleaning pad drive limit detection signal

Transfer/separation cleaning pad home
054 PS11 3 ON OFF
position detection signal
Transfer/separation cleaning pad drive limit
PS12 4
detection signal
PS302 1 Original size detection signal 1 Not
Detect
PS303 2 Original size detection signal 2 detect
PS306 3 Original registration detection signal
PS308 4 Original conveyance detection signal
PS309 5 Original reversal detection signal
ON OFF
PS307 6 Original ejection detection signal 1
PS313 7 Original ejection to reverse detection signal
RADF
060
PS314 8 Original ejection detection signal 2
PS310 9 Last original detection signal
PS301 10 DF open/close detection signal
MS301 11 Cover open/close MS detection signal
— 12 Pressure plate open detection signal Detect Not
PS304 13 Jam in original reversal section detection signal detect
— 14 Separation error detection signal
PS305 15 No original detection signal
PS1 0 Sub-tray paper exit
PS2 1 Tray upper limit
PS3 2 Tray lower limit
PS4 3 FIN entrance passage
PS5 4 Stacker conveyance passage
PS6 5 Paper exit 1
FN-104/FN-4
PS7 6 Staple paper exit upper limit

PS8 7 Alignment plate/upper HP
076
PS9 8 Paper exit belt HP OFF ON
PS10 9 Paper exit 2
PS11 10 Stapler movement HP
PS12 11 Paper exit opening
PS13 12 Entrance paper detection
PS14 13 Stapler rotation HP
PS15 14 Tray no paper detection
PS18 15 Roller shift HP
1 - 86
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT

H L
PS20 16 Stacker no paper detection
PS21 17 Stapling and folding stopper release motor HP
PS22 18 Folding knife HP
PS23 19 Stapling and folding stopper HP
PS24 20 Alignment plate/lower HP OFF ON
PS25 21 Folding paper exit
PS26 22 Folding passage/2
PS27 23 Folding stopper HP
PS28 24 Folding passage/1
M1 32 Motor lock signal
M7 33 Motor lock signal Lock Ope-
076 M20 34 Motor lock signal rating
— 37 Folding unit No unit With unit
— 39 Cover Inserter A No Cover With Cover
FN-104/FN-4
Inserter A Inserter A
— 40 Stapler (R) abnormality EC02

— 41 Stapler (R) abnormality EC01 Normal Abnormal
— 42 Stapler (R) abnormality EC00
— 43 Stapler (R) Ready signal Busy Ready
— 44 Stapler (R) Busy signal Ready Busy
— 45 Stapler (R) Clear-request signal Normal Demand
— 46 Cover Inserter A start key
OFF ON
— 47 Cover Inserter A mode key
— 48 Stapler (F) abnormality EC02
— 49 Stapler (F) abnormality EC01 Normal Abnormal
— 50 Stapler (F) abnormality EC00
— 51 Stapler (F) Ready signal Busy Ready
— 52 Stapler (F) Busy signal Ready Busy
— 53 Stapler (F) Clear-demand signal Normal Demand
PS208 54 Sheet set
PS209 55 Pre no paper OFF ON
PS201 56 Sheet passage
Cover Inserter A
no paper with paper

PS202 57 No sheet
PS203 58 Sheet tray lower limit
OFF ON
PS204 59 Sheet tray upper limit
PS205 60 Sheet size (small) OFF ON
PS206 61 Sheet size (large) no paper with paper
PS207 62 Paper exit cover open/close detection Open Close
VR1 63 Sheet width Small size Large size
FN-104/
FN-4
MS1 64 Interlock Open Close
1 - 87
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT

H L
PS9 1 ADU paper conveyance detection signal
PS46 2 Paper at ADU exit detection signal
PS58 3 ADU paper reversal detection signal
ADU
080 PS59 4 ADU paper conveyance slowdown timing detection signal ON OFF
PS10 5 ADU handle release detection signal
PS13 6 ADU no paper detection signal
PS60 7 ADU paper feed detection signal
1 - 88
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT
[5] Output checklist

Classi- Code Symbol Multi Cannot be set
fication mode Name or changed in
field
000 L1 Exposure lamp
001 M15 Toner supply motor
002 HV1 Charging corona unit x
Analog signal
003 HV2 Transfer corona unit x

004 HV2 Separation corona unit (AC+DC)
005 Dmax LED x
006 g LED x
007 Jam detection LED
008 HV1 Transfer corona unit installation guide plate x
009 HV1 Bias
First paper feed SD
020 M 1: Tray 1 2: Tray 2 3: Tray 3
4: LCT 5: By-pass paper feed tray
Paper feed MC
021 M 1: Tray 1 2: Tray 2 3: Tray 3
4: LCT 5: Vertical conveyance
First paper feed MC
022 M 1: Tray 1 2: Tray 2 3: Tray 3
4: LCT
Tray up motor /LCT UP/DOWN motor
Paper feed
1: Tray 1 2: Tray 2 3: Tray 3

023 M
4: LCT UP drive 5: LCT DOWN drive 6: By-pass UP
7: By-pass DOWN
Lock SD
024 M
1: Tray 1 2: Tray 2 3: Tray 3
025 MC1 Second paper feed MC
Loop roller drive motor
026 M6 M 1: Fast forward 2: Slow forward
3: Fast backward 4: Slow backward
Paper reverse and eject roller drive motor
027 M5 M
1: Fast 2: Slow
028 M 1: Paper feed motor 2: LCT paper feed motor
029 SD4 Separation claw SD
1 - 89
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT

field
030 M13 Optics unit right shift
031 M13 Optics unit left shift
Optics unit
Polygon motor
032 M17 M
1: 400 dpi
Shading correction
034 M
1: 400 dpi
040 M1 Main motor
041 M2 Drum drive motor
Fan motor
1: Scanner cooling fan
034 M
2: Write unit cooling fan (fast)
3: Write unit cooling fan (slow)
Fan motor
4: Developing suction (fast)
5: Developing suction (slow)
6: Main unit cooling fan 1 (fast)
7: Main unit cooling fan 1 (slow)
Main unit
042 M
12: Fixing unit cooling fan
Counter
043 M
1: Total counter 2: Key counter
045 M16 M 6: Cleaning web drive motor
Charging corona unit cleaning pad drive motor
046 M23 M
1: Move to rear 2: Move to front
Transfer/separaton corona unit cleaning pads drive motor
047 M18 M
1: Move to rear 2: Move to front
048 Control panel LED test (turn on all lights)
050 M3 Developing drive motor
functions
051 PCL PCL

Unique
052 TSL TSL

054 M11 Toner agitation motor
055 JAMIB Jam display board test (turn on all lights)
Drive (EDH-2)
M302 1: Original feed motor (forward)
M302 2: Original feed motor (backward)
M301 3: Original conveyance motor (forward)
M301 4: Original conveyance motor (backward)
RADF
M304 5: Original exit motor 1 (forward)

060 M
M304 6: Original exit motor 1 (backward)
M305 7: Original exit motor 2 (forward)
M305 8: Original exit motor 2 (backward)
M303 9: Tray up motor (forward)
M303 10: Tray upmotor (backward)
1 - 90
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT

field
SD302 11: Pressure roller release SD
12: -
RADF
SD301 13: Flapper drive SD

060 M
SD303 14: Original ejection gate SD
SD304 15: SDF switch SD
SD301 16: ADF fan
Drive (FN-104/FN-4, Cover Inserter A)
M1 1: FNS conveyance motor
M2 2: Roller shift motor (HP search)
M2 3: Roller shift motor (shift position transfer)
M2 4: Roller shift motor (1 rotation)
M3 5: Tray up-down motor (HP search)
M3 6: Tray up-down motor (Move to lower limit)
M3 7: Tray up-down motor (Up-down operation with
only few sheets at staple mode)
M5 8: Alignment plate motor/ upper (HP search)
M7 9: Paper exit roller motor (staple mode HP search)
M7 10: Paper exit roller motor (reverse rotation)
M8 11: Paper exit opening motor HP search
M8 12: Paper exit opening motor open slot transfer
M21/M22 13: Stapler unit (R) (initial)
M21/M22 14: Stapler unit (R) (staple operation)
M23/M24 15: Stapler unit (F) (initial)
M23/M24 16: Stapler unit (F) (staple operation)
FN-104/FN-4
075 M11 M 17: Stapler movement motor HP search (Move to double

staple position)
M11 18: Stapler movement motor (Move to single staple position
for A4 or 8.5x11)
M13 19: Stacker entrance motor
M14 20: Stapling and folding stopper motor (HP search)
M15 21: Alignment plate motor/lower (HP search)
M18 22: Folding stopper motor (HP search)
M19 23: Folding knife motor (HP search)
M20 24: Folding conveyance motor
M17 25: Stapling and folding stopper release motor (HP search)
M17 26: Stapling and folding stopper release motor (set)
M17 27: Stapling and folding stopper release motor (release)
SD1 28: Gate solenoid
SD2 29: Sub-tray paper exit solenoid
SD4 31: Paper exit opening solenoid
SD5 32: By-pass solenoid
M5 33: Alignment plate motor/upper Open (A4 or 8.5x11
position) enable only from HP position
M5 34: Alignment plate motor/upper Close (A4 or 8.5x11
1 - 91
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 ADJUSTMENT

field
M5 35: Alignment plate motor/upper rocking
(enable only from Open position)
M15 36: Alignment plate motor/lower Open (A4 or 8.5x11
FN-104/FN-4
075 M15 M 37: Alignment plate motor/lower Close (A4 or 8.5x11

M15 38: Alignment plate motor/lower rocking
(enable only from Open position)
M14 39: Stapling and folding stopper motor (Move to A4R or
8.5x11 position transfer)
M18 40: Folding stopper motor (A4R or 8.5x11 position transfer)
MC201 64: Paper feed clutch
Inserter A
Cover
M201 65: Sheet tray motor HP search (Move to lower limit)

M201 66: Sheet tray motor (Move to upper limit)
SD201 67: Paper feed solenoid
1: Paper gate solenoid
080 M 2: ADU lock solenoid
3: Fixing guide solenoid
081 MC2 ADU paper feed MS
082 M9 Pre-transfer roller drive motor
ADU
083 M12 Second paper feed motor

ADU reversal motor
084 M7 M
1: Fast forward 2: Slow forward 3: Fast backward
ADU conveyance motor
085 M8 M
1: Fast 2: Slow
Reverse and eject motor
086 M5 M
1: Fast forward 2: Slow forward 3: Fast backward
092 Factory initial set (field use prohibited) x
process, etc.
Adjustment
093 Field initial set (restore factory default)

094 Adjust mode list display mode
096 Factory shipment completion set (field use prohibited) x
097 Electronic RDH SIMM capacity check
098 Electronic RDH SIMM check
1 - 92
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1] Centering Adjustment a. Adjustment method
Caution: Centering adjustment need not be
performed normally because paper Step Operation
inclination is detected in the second 1 Draw out the tray.
paper feed section and original image 2 Loosen the two screws at the center of
is corrected in the image processing the tray.
unit to fit an inclined paper. Centering 3 Slide the guide plate to adjust the center
adjustment is required only when the position.
detected paper inclination is not within 4 Tighten the two screws securely.
the automatic image correction range. 5 Insert the tray and make a copy to check
1. Tool the result.
• Screwdriver (Phillips) 6 Perform steps 1-5 repeatedly until mis-
centering is included in the automatic
2. Tray 1/2/3 centering adjustment adjustment range (±3 mm).
Caution: Disable the mis-centering

correction function by setting
the dip switch 12-3 and confirm
it. Confirm it using the internal
pattern No.16.(Enter 1 to set to
ON)
Standard value of mis-centering: ±3 mm
Guide plate
±3 mm Image center
Screws
Paper center
1 - 93
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
3. LCT tray centering adjustment a. Adjustment method
Step Operation
Guide plate Guide plate
1 Move the paper up/down plate.
2 Open the top cover.
3 Remove the four screws to detach the
side cover (right).
Screws Screws Screws
Side cover
Screws (right) Screws
4 Loosen the two screws to slide the upper

and lower guide plates the same amount
in the same direction.
Center positioning 5 Secure the upper and lower guide plates
bracket
by tightening two screws firmly.
6 Loosen the two screws to slide the center
positioning bracket in the same manner
as for the upper and lower guide plates
(same amount and same direction).
7 Secure the centering piece by tighten-
ing two screws firmly.
8 Put the LCT back into the original
position and make a copy to check the
result.
9 Perform steps 1-8 repeatedly until mis-
centering is included in the automatic
adjustment range (±3 mm).
Caution: Disable the mis-centering correction

function by setting the dip switch 12-
3(DIPSW12-3) and confirm it. Confirm
it using the inter nal patter n
No.16.(Enter 1 to set to ON)
1 - 94
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[2] Paper up/down plate centering

Standard value of mis-centering: ±3 mm
adjustment
Caution: Paper up/down plate centering
adjustment must be carried out when
a paper feed jam occurs frequently or
after replacement of the paper up/
±3 mm Image center down plate wire of a tray.
1. Tool
• Screwdriver (Phillips)
Paper center 2. Tray 1/2/3 up/down plate horizontal ad-

justment
Paper up/down Paper up/down

plate plate
Screws
Paper up/down
plate drive
1 - 95
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
a. Adjustment method 3. LCT paper up/down plate horizontal

adjustment
Step Operation
1 To remove the tray with the paper up/
Screws
down plate held up, set the tray with a
rubber eraser or the like inserted under
the paper up/down plate drive linkage
lever.
Paper up/down Paper up/down

plate drive pulley
Adjusting
screws
Rubber eraser
or the like
Paper up/down plate
drive linkage lever Screw
2 Make sure the paper up/down plate has

moved up by hearing the motor sound,
then draw out the tray.
3 Remove the two screws to remove the Paper up/down Paper up/down
tray from the left and right guide rails. plate plate drive pulley
4 Loosen the two screws and adjust the
position of each paper up/down plate
drive pulley so that the front and rear of
the paper up/down plate drive are at the
same height.
5 Secure the paper up/down plate drive
pulleys by tightening the screw.
6 Secure the tray on the guide rails.
7 Set the tray.
1 - 96
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
a. Adjustment method 5 Remove the two screws to detach the

clutch replacement cover.
Step Operation
1 Move the paper up/down plate up. Clutch replacement cover
3 Remove the four screws to detach the
side cover (right).
Screws
Screws
6 Remove the five screws to detach the

rear cover.
Side cover Screws

(right) Screws
4 Open the jam door, then remove the four

screws to detach the front cover.
Jam door
Rear
cover
Screws Screws
7 Loosen the two screws and adjust the

position of each paper up/down plate
drive pulley using an adjustment screw
Screws Screws so that the front and rear of the paper
Side cover (right) up/down plate are at the same height.
8 Secure the paper up/down plate drive
pulleys by tightening the two screws (per
up/down pulley).
9 Install the rear cover, clutch replacement
cover, front cover, and side cover (right).
1 - 97
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[3] Skew Adjustment 3. LCT main body skew adjustment

Caution: Tilt adjustment must be performed 1. Tool
when the paper supplied from the cur- • Screwdriver (Phillips)
rent tray is different from the paper
supplied from other trays in the way 2. Adjustment of skew in LCT main body
they are skewed. However, since tilt
of paper supplied from all trays is cor-
rected in the second paper feed unit,
this adjustment has little effect.
1. Tool
Positioning
2. Adjustment of angle of conveyance bracket
Screws
roller of tray 1/2/3
a. Adjustment method
Step Operation
1 Adjust the reference pin position of the
positioning bracket of the LCT paper lift-
up plate.
Bearing fixing plate
4. ADU (Rear) Skew Adjustment
Caution: Tilt adjustment must be performed when
the paper supplied from the current
tray is different from the paper supplied
from other trays in the way they are
Screws tilted. However, since skew of paper
supplied from all trays is corrected in
the second paper feed unit, this
adjustment has little effect.
Step Operation 1. Tools
1 Draw out the tray and detach the front • Screwdriver (Phillips)
cover.
2 Loosen the two screws to slide the 2. Adjustment of tilt of ADU (rear)
bearing fixing plate. a. Adjustment method
3 Secure the fixing plate by tightening the
Step Operation
two screws.
1 Draw out the ADU and detach the ADU
4 Install the front cover and set the tray.
cover.
2 Loosen the two screws to slide the pre-
registration roller unit installation position.
3 Secure the fixing plate by tightening the
two screws.
4 Install the ADU cover and set the ADU.
1 - 98
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[4] Tray Spring Pressure Adjustment 3. By-pass paper feed spring pressure ad-
Caution: Tray spring pressure adjustment must justment
be performed when no feed or double
feed of paper occurs. Tray spring
pressure may be affected by a type of
paper used or operating environment
(under the low temperature condition,
no feed of paper tends to occur).
Under the high temperature condition,
double feed of paper tends to occur.
Excessive adjustment of tray spring
pressure may exaggerate the problem. Strong
Use caution.
Weak
1. Tools
• Screwdriver (Phillips) Spring
• Flat-nose pliers
2. Tray 1/2/3 spring pressure adjustment

Step Operation
1 Disconnect LCT form the main unit.
2 Change the spring hooking position.
Weak: Double feed is prevented.
Strong: No feed is prevented.
Reference: The spring load changes

about 10% each time the
spring is hooked in the next
Weak
slit.
3 Connect LCT back to the main unit.
Strong Spring
Step Operation
1 Draw out the tray.
Weak: Double feed is prevented.
Strong: No feed is prevented.

slit.
3 Set the tray.
1 - 99
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
4. LCT spring pressure adjustment [5] Paper Feed Height (Upper Limit)
Adjustment
Caution 1: Paper feed height (upper limit)
adjustment must be performed
Spring when no paper feed occurs, when
the leading edge of the fed paper
is folded or when a curled paper is
fed. To perform this adjustment,
Strong Weak move the upper limit sensor
mounting bracket vertically.
Caution 2: This adjustment may affect the
release amount of the pick-up so
that [7] pick-up roller release
amount adjustment must be
performed after this adjustment.
1. Tools
• Scale
Step Operation 2. Adjustment of paper feed height (upper

1 Draw out the LCT from the main body. limit) of tray 1/2/3
Weak: Double feed is prevented. Paper
Strong: No feed is prevented. up/down
plate
slit.
3 Install the LCT. Paper feed guide
Screws
Sensor mounting bracket
1 - 100
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
a. Adjustment method 7 Remove the two screws securing the

sensor mounting bracket and install them
Step Operation
in the outside mounting holes (oblong
1 To draw out the tray with the paper up/
holes) temporarily.
down plate held up, set the tray with a
8 <When the heights are not within
rubber eraser or the like inserted under
specifications>
the paper up/down plate drive linkage
Adjust the position of the sensor
lever.
mounting bracket vertically so that the
distance between the top surfaces of the
entrance guide and paper up/down plate
is within the specifications.
Larger than the standard value:

Lower the sensor mounting bracket
(Raise the paper up/down plate).
Rubber eraser Less than the standard value:
or the like
Raise the sensor mounting bracket
Paper up/down plate (Lower the paper up/down plate).
drive linkage lever
<When any fault has occurred>

Folded leading edge of paper:
Raise the sensor mounting bracket.
Curled paper:
3 Place the paper feed roller unit upright.
Lower the sensor mounting bracket.
4 Measure the distance between the top
9 Install the paper feed roller unit and pa-
surfaces of the paper feed guide and
per conveyance unit cover.
paper up/down plate and check whether
10 Set the tray.
it is within specifications.
Standard value: 2-5 mm
3. Adjustment of paper feed height (upper
If the leading edge of the paper is folded
limit) of LCT
irrespective of whether the above
distance is within specifications, perform Paper feed guide
steps 5 and later.
5 Loosen the four screws to detach the
conveyance cover.
6 Remove the two retaining rings to slide
the two bearings outward, then remove
the paper feed roller unit.
Paper up/down
plate
Screws
Retaining
ring
Sensor mounting bracket
Bearing
Bearing
Paper feed Retaining ring
roller unit
1 - 101
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
a. Adjustment method 6 Remove the two screws securing the

sensor mounting bracket and install them
Step Operation
in the outside mounting holes (oblong
1 Move the paper up/down plate up.
holes) temporarily.
7 <When the heights are not within specifi-
3 Measure the distance between the top
cations>
surfaces of the paper feed guide and
Adjust the position of the sensor mount-
paper up/down plate and check whether
ing bracket vertically so that the distance
it is within specifications.
between the top surfaces of the paper
Standard value: 2 ~ 5 mm
feed guide and paper up/down plate is
If the leading edge of the paper is folded
within the specifications.
irrespective of whether the above
distance is within specifications, perform
When raising the height of the paper up/
steps 5 and later.
down plate:
4 Remove the spring from the paper pick-
up roller unit.
When lowering the height of the paper up/
down plate:
Top cover
Raise the sensor mounting bracket.
Spring
<When any fault has occurred>

Folded leading edge of paper:
Remove Raise the sensor mounting bracket.
Curled paper:
Paper feed roller 8 Install the paper feed roller unit and
unit spring.
Paper feed roller unit 9 Close the top cover.
5 Remove the two retaining rings to slide

the two bearings outward, then remove
the paper feed roller unit.
Paper pick-up roller unit
Bearing Bearing
Retaining ring Retaining ring
1 - 102
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[6] Pick-up Release Amount a. Adjustment method

Adjustment
Caution: Pick-up release amount adjustment Step Operation
must be performed when a no-feed 1 To draw the tray with the paper up/down
jam occurs frequently. To perform this plate held up, set the tray with a rubber
adjustment, adjust the mounting eraser or the like inserted under the pa-
position of the pickup solenoid. per up/down plate drive linkage lever.
1. Tools
• Scale
2. Adjustment of pick-up release amount of

tray 1/2/3
Paper up/down Paper pick-up roller Rubber eraser

plate or the like
Paper up/down plate

drive linkage lever

Pick-up solenoid
3 Pull the movable portion of the pick-up
solenoid and check whether the distance
between the bottom of the paper feed
roller and the top surface of the paper
up/down plate is within specifications.
Screws Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5 mm
If the distance is not within specifications,
perform steps 4 and later.
4 Loosen one screw and adjust the mount-
ing position of the pick-up solenoid.
Caution: Take a note to remember the
initial mounting position.
5 Secure the pick-up solenoid by tighten-
ing the screws.
6 Set the tray.
1 - 103
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
3. Adjustment of pick-up release amount of a. Adjustment method

LCT Step Operation
1 Move the paper up/down plate up.
Paper feed roller 2 Open the top cover.
3 Remove the spring from the paper
pick-up roller unit.
Top cover
Paper up/down Spring
plate
Pick-up solenoid
Remove
Paper feed roller

unit
Screw
Paper feed roller unit
4 Pull the movable portion of the pick-up

solenoid and check whether the distance
between the bottom of the paper feed roller
and the top surface of the paper up/down
plate is within specifications.
Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5 mm
If the distance is not within specifications,
perform steps 5 and later.
5 Loosen one screw to adjust the mount-
ing position of the pick-up solenoid.
Caution: Take a note to remember the
initial mounting position.
6 Secure the pick-up solenoid by tighten-
ing the screw.
7 Install the spring.
8 Close the top cover.
1 - 104
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[7] RADF Mounting Position 3 If both stopper pieces do not touch the
Adjustment slit glass, make adjustments using ad-
justing screws A and B alternately.
1. Tool
4 Perform steps 2 and 3 repeatedly until
• Screwdriver (Phillips) the two stopper pieces touch the slit
glass at the same time.
2. Adjustment method
Adjusting screw B Adjusting screw A
Step Operation
1 Close the RADF.
2 Check whether both stopper pieces on
the RADF side touch the slit glass.
Caution: The state of contact between
the stopper pieces and the silt
glass can be checked by
looking into the slits in the top
cover (middle) of the main unit.
Stopper
piece
Stopper
piece
Slit glass
Top cover
(middle)
Slit Slit
1 - 105
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[8] RADF Skew Adjustment 4 Close the RADF, turn the skew
1. Tools adjustment screws and adjust the skew.
• Driver (plus) For skew pattern A:
Turn the skew adjustment screw
2. Adjustment method counterclockwise.
For skew pattern B:
Turn the skew adjustment screw
clockwise.
Skew 5 Make a test copy and check the skew.
adjustment
screw 6 Tighten the four hinge securing screws
(two on both the left and right.)
7 Make adjustment by repeating steps 3
to 6.
Skew
pattern A
Skew
pattern B
Step Operation
1 Set A3 paper into the tray1.
2 Set the adjustment chart on the RADF,
make a copy, and check the skew.
Standard value: within ±0.3%
Feed
direction
Skew pattern A Skew pattern B
Perform the following adjustment if the

skew is beyond the standard value.
3 Open the RADF and loosen the four
hinge set screws (two on both the left
and right).
Hinge set
screws
1 - 106
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[9] RADF Paper Skew Adjustment Step Operation

1. Face (side 1) of original paper skew 4 Move the registration pulley bracket one
Note: Always perform this adjustment after calibration in the direction below accord-
completing the RADF skew adjusting to the paper skew pattern.
ment. (Refer to the previous page.)
For skew in pattern A:
Move the registration pulley
Screw bracket downwards (direction
down with original feed flow).
Registration pulley bracket For skew in pattern B:
Upwards open/close
cover Move the registration pulley
bracket upwards (direction up
towards original feed flow).
Downwards Note: Make sure that the registration
pulley shaft does not touch the
open/close cover spring holder
unit.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the original skew
is within specified range (0.5% or less)
Registration
roller
Specified range: Paper skew ±0.5% or less
(Paper skew in the paper feed direction)
Step Operation
1 Make a copy in the single sided to single
sided copy mode, then check the skew
of the original. (Either pattern A or B)
Image
Copy paper feed

direction
Copy paper
Paper skew Paper skew
pattern A pattern B
2 Open the open/close cover.

3 Loosen the retaining screw to release the
registration pulley bracket.
1 - 107
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
2. Back side (side 2) of original paper skew Step Operation

adjustment 4 Move the R range adjustment plate one
calibration in the direction below
Open/close according to the paper skew pattern.
cover
For skew in pattern A:
Move the R range adjustment
plate to left side.
Left side Right side
For skew in pattern B:
Move the R range adjustment
plate to right side.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the original skew
is within specified range (0.5% or less)
R range adjustment plate Screw

Specified range: Paper skew ±0.5% or less
(Paper skew in the paper feed direction)
Step Operation
1 Make a copy in the double sided →
single sided copy mode, then check the
skew of the original. (Either pattern A or
B)
Image
Copy paper feed

direction
Copy paper
Paper skew Paper skew
pattern A pattern B
2 Open the open/close cover.

3 Loosen the set screw and release the R
range adjustment plate.
1 - 108
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[10] RADF Hinge Spring Pressure

Adjustment
1. Tools
• Screwdriver (standard)
• Wrench or flat-nose pliers
2. Adjustment method
Nut
Adjusting screw
Step Operation
1 Close the RADF.
2 Loosen the nut on the left side and the
nut on the right side.
3 Turn the adjusting screws to adjust the
pressure of hinge springs.
Tightening (turning clockwise): Spring
pressure reduces.
Loosening (turning counterclockwise):
Spring pressure increases.
4 Tighten the nut on the left side and the
nut on the right side.
1 - 109
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[11] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on (4) Remove the E-ring and the gear.
Conveyance Guide Plate B (5) Adhere the magnets to conveyance guide plate A
1. Tool used and retighten the set screws.
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Magnet
2. Preparation (rear)
(1) Open the front cover. Magnet
(front)
(2) Check whether conveyance guide plate B makes
contact with the cushioning rubber when the
Gear
magnets are stuck to conveyance guide plate A.
(3) If plate B does not make contact with the cushion-
E-ring
ing rubber, remove the rear cover and carry out
adjustment as described below.
3. Adjustment Procedure Conveyance Conveyance

Guide Plate B Guide Plate A
(1) Detach all FNS CB (FNS control board) connec-
tors.
(6) Reassemble in opposite sequence to removal.
(2) Remove the 2 set screws holding the FNS CB in
place. Remove the FNS CB together with its
bracket.
Bracket FNS CB (Finisher Control Board)
Screws
(3) Loosen the 4 magnet-holding set screws (two at

the front and two at the back), and move convey-
ance guide plate B all the way in the direction
indicated by the arrow.
1 - 110
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[12] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on (4) Adhere the magnets to conveyance guide plate A
Conveyance Guide Plate C and retighten the screws.
1. Tool used
Magnet
• Phillips-head screwdriver (rear)
Magnet
(front)
2. Preparation
(1) Open the front cover.
(2) Check whether conveyance guide plate C makes
contact with the cushioning rubber when the
magnets are stuck to conveyance guide plate D.
(3) If plate C does not make contact with the cushion-
ing rubber, remove the rear cover and carry out
Conveyance Guide Plate C Conveyance
Guide Plate D
3. Adjustment Procedure
(1) Detach all FNS CB (FNS control board) connec- (5) Reassemble in opposite sequence to removal.
tors.
place. Remove the FNS CB together with its
bracket.
Screws
(3) Loosen the 4 magnet-holding set screws (two at

the front and two at the back), and move convey-
ance guide plate C all the way in the direction
indicated by the arrow.
1 - 111
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[13] FNS Adjusting the Sub-tray Paper (4) With SD2 ON, measure the gap between the
Exit Gate solenoid plunger and the bracket stopper (indi-
1. Tools used cated by B in the illustration).
• Phillips-head screwdriver Spec value for gap: B = 5 ±0.5mm.
• Scale
2. Preparation
(1) Remove the 2 set screws holding the FNS CB
SD2
(FNS control board) in place. Remove the FNS Sub-tray Gate (Sub-tray
Paper Exit)
CB together with its bracket.
(5) If either gap is out of spec, carry out adjustment

as described below.
Screws
(2) Remove the wirings from the clamps, and move

the FNS CB together with its bracket.
Clamps
Clamps
Clamps
Clamp
Clamps Clamps
(3) With SD2 (sub-tray paper exit) OFF, measure the

gap between the sub-tray gate and the guide
plate (indicated by A in the illustration).
Spec value for gap: A = 4 ±0.5mm.
1 - 112
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
3. Adjustment Procedure [14] FNS Adjusting the Paper-Path

(1) Loosen the 2 set screws holding the solenoid in Switching Gate
place, and move the solenoid as necessary to 1. Tools used
adjust. • Phillips-head screwdriver
• Scale
2. Preparation
Screws
(1) Remove the following parts.
• Rear cover
• Top cover
• Cover Inserter A (if installed)
(2) Remove the 2 set screws holding the FNS CB
(FNS control board) in place. Remove the FNS
CB together with its bracket.
Solenoid
(2) Retighten the screws.

(3) Reinstall in opposite sequence to removal.
Screws
(3) Remove the wirings from the clamps, and move

the FNS CB together with its bracket.
Clamps
Clamps
Clamps
Clamp
Clamps Clamps
1 - 113
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
(4) With SD1 (gate) ON, measure the distance be- [15] FNS Adjusting the By-pass Gate
tween the long gate and the guide plate, indicated 1. Tools used
by A in the illustration. • Phillips-head screwdriver
Spec value for distance: A = 7.6±0.5mm. • Scale
(5) Again with SD1 ON, measure the gap between
2. Preparation
the solenoid plunger and the bracket stopper
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(indicated by B in the illustration).
(2) Open the front cover and the guide plate.
Spec value for gap: B = 5±0.5mm.
Guide Plate
Gate
Guide Plate
SD1 (Gate)

(6) If either measurement is out of spec, carry out place. Remove the FNS CB together with its
adjustment as described below. bracket.
3. Adjustment Procedure Bracket FNS CB (Finisher Control Board)
(1) Loosen the 2 set screws holding the solenoid in

place, and move the solenoid as necessary to
adjust.
Screws
Screws
Solenoid

(3) Reassemble in the opposite sequence to re-
moval.
1 - 114
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
(4) Remove the wirings from the clamps, and move 3. Adjustment Procedure
the FNS CB together with its bracket. (1) Loosen the 2 set screws holding the solenoid in
place, and move the solenoid as necessary to
Clamps
adjust.
Solenoid
Clamps
Clamps
Clamp
Clamps Clamps
Screws
(5) With SD5 (by-pass) OFF, measure the distance

between the by-pass gate and the guide plate,
indicated by A in the illustration. (2) Retighten the screws.
Spec value for distance: A = 4.3±0.5mm (3) Reassemble in the opposite sequence to re-
(6) With SD5 ON, measure the gap between the moval.
solenoid plunger and the bracket stopper (indi-
cated by B in the illustration).
Spec value for gap: B = 5±0.5mm
SD5 (By-pass)
Gate
Guide Plate
(7) If either measurement is out of spec, carry out

1 - 115
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[16] FNS Adjusting the Shift Position 3. Adjustment Procedure

1. Tool used (1) Loosen the screw holding the PS18 (roller shift
• Phillips-head screwdriver HP) bracket in place, and adjust the bracket
position as necessary.
2. Preparation
(1) Remove the following parts. Screw
• Rear cover
• Top cover
(2) Switch the power OFF → ON → OFF.
(3) With the roller shift motor (M2) OFF (home posi-
tion), check that the actuator on PS18 (roller shift
HP) is correctly aligned with the cutout on the
shift-unit mounting plate.
Actuator
Bracket
(2) Retighten the screw.

moval.
Cutout on Mounting Plate
(4) If the actuator is not correctly aligned with the

cutout, carry out adjustment as described.
1 - 116
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[17] FNS Adjusting Opening/Closing at 3. Adjustment Procedure

the Paper Exit (1) Loosen the set screw holding the PS12 (paper
1. Tool used exit-opening detector) bracket in place, and ad-
• Phillips-head screwdriver just the bracket position as necessary.
2. Preparation Bracket
• Rear cover
• Top cover
(2) Switch the power OFF → ON → OFF. Then, with
the paper exit closed, confirm that the paper exit
casing is firmly against the stopper section.
Screw
(2) Retighten the bracket set screw.

moval.
Casing
Stopper Section Paper Exit Opening
(3) If the casing is not in firm contact with the stopper,

carry out adjustment described as follows.
1 - 117
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[18] FNS Adjusting the Paper Exit- 3. Adjustment Procedure

Opening Solenoid (1) Remove the 2 set screws holding the solenoid
1. Tools used bracket in place, and remove the solenoid to-
• Phillips-head screwdriver gether with the bracket.
• Scale
2. Preparation Solenoid Bracket

• Rear cover
• Top cover
(2) With SD4 (paper exit-opening solenoid) ON,
measure the gap between the solenoid plunger
and the bracket stopper.
Spec value for gap: A = 6.0 ±0.5mm
Screws
SD4 (Exit Opening)
(2) Loosen the 2 screws holding the solenoid to the

bracket, and adjust the position of solenoid.
Solenoid Bracket
(3) If the gap is out of spec, carry out adjustment

describe as follows.
Screws
(3) Retighten the 2 solenoid screws, then replace the

solenoid and bracket into their original position
and screw in the 2 bracket screws.
moval.
1 - 118
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[19] FNS Adjusting the Paper Exit- (3) Hold down the paper exit-opening guide plate
Opening Lower Guide Plate with your hand so that the paper exit roller makes
1. Tools used contact, and check that the remaining stroke for
• Phillips-head screwdriver solenoid SD4 (distance B) is within spec.
• Scale
Spec value: B = 2.5±0.5mm
2. Preparation
B=2.5–0.5mm
• Rear cover SD4 (Paper Exit
Opening)
• Top cover
(2) With SD4 (paper exit-opening solenoid) OFF,
confirm that the paper exit-opening lower guide
plate is a sufficient distance (distance A) higher Paper Exit
Lower
than the sponge rollers. Guide Plate
Spec value: A = 1.5mm and greater
Lower Guide Plate
A=1.5mm and greater (4) If either measurement is out of spec, carry out
(1) Loosen the 2 set screws holding the solenoid
bracket in place, and adjust the position of the
bracket so that distances A and B are within spec.
Sponge Roller
Solenoid Bracket
Screws
(2) Retighten the 2 bracket set screws.

(3) Reassemble in the reverse sequence to removal.
1 - 119
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[20] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the [21] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location
Stacker Paper Exit Belt of the Upper Alignment Plates
1. Tools used 1. Tools used
• Phillips-head screwdriver • Phillips-head screwdriver
• Tension gauge or spring balance • Scale
2. Preparation 2. Preparation
(1) If the belt tensioner has been loosened as a result (1) Open the front cover and pull out the stacker/
of belt replacement or for some other reason, stapler unit.
adjust as described below.
3. Adjustment Procedure (1) Move the upper alignment plates into home posi-
(1) Loosen the 4 set screws (see illustration). tion. (Move so that the actuator on the upper-
(2) Using a tension gauge or spring balance, pull the alignment-plate drive belt is at PS8 (upper-align-
belt-tensioner pulley shaft so that tension A is at ment-plate HP).
the value indicated below. Maintain this tension
while retightening the screws. PS8
Actuator
(Upper Alignment Plate HP)
Spec value for tension: A = 2kg
Screws
A
Screws Pulley Shaft Belt Tensioner
(3) Reassemble in the opposite sequence to removal.
1 - 120
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
(2) Loosen the 2 set screws fixing the upper align- [22] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the
ment plates in place (one screw on each plate), Upper-Alignment-Plate Drive Timing
and adjust the plates so that distances A and B Belt
are within specification. 1. Tools used
Spec values: A = 337±0.5mm • Phillips-head screwdriver
B = 41.2±0.5mm
2. Preparation
(1) If the upper-alignment-plate drive belt tensioner
Screws has been loosened as a result of belt replace-
Rear Panel ment or for some other reason, adjust as de-
scribed below.
(1) Loosen the 2 set screws (see illustration).
(2) Move the belt tensioner so that the end is aligned
with the center mark on the scale, and retighten
the screws.
Upper Alignment Plates
Screws Scale
Belt Tensioner
1 - 121
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[23] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location (2) Loosen the 2 set screws fixing the lower align-
of the Lower Alignment Plates (FN-4 ment plates in place (one screw on each plate),
only) and adjust the plates so that distances A and B
1. Tool used are within specification.
• Phillips-head screwdriver Spec values: A = 337±0.5mm
B = 40.4±0.5mm
2. Preparation
(1) Open the front cover and pull out the stacker/
stapler unit. Screws Rear Panel
(1) Move the lower alignment plates into home posi-
tion. (Move so that the actuator on the lower-
alignment-plate drive belt is at PS24 (lower-
alignment-plate HP). 2.0mm
337–0.5mm 40.4–0.5mm
Actuator
PS24
(Lower Alignment Plate HP)
1 - 122
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[24] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the [25] FNS Adjusting the Stapling Position
Lower-Alignment-Plate Drive Timing (Flat Stapling)
Belt (FN-4 only) 1. Tools used
1. Tool used • Phillips-head screwdriver
• Phillips-head screwdriver • Scale
(1) If the lower-alignment-plate drive belt tensioner (1) Check whether the virtual line running between
has been loosened as a result of belt replace- the stoppers is parallel to the virtual line between
ment or for some other reason, adjust as de- the staplers.
scribed below.
(1) Loosen the 2 set screws (see illustration).
(2) Move the belt tensioner so that the end is aligned
with the center mark on the scale, and retighten
the screws.
Staple Positions
Belt Tensioner
Screws Scale
Flat-Stapling Stoppers
(2) If the lines are not parallel or if you need to change

the stapling position, carry out adjustment as
described below.
1 - 123
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
3. Adjustment Procedure [26] FNS Adjusting the Stapler Vertical

(1) Loosen the 3 set screws holding the flat-stapling Positioning
stopper bracket in place, and position the bracket 1. Tools used
so that distance A is within the specification • Phillips-head screwdriver
range. • Jig
Spec range: A = 5.5 to 11.5mm
2. Preparation
(initial value = 8.5mm)
(1) When replacing or reinstalling a stapler or clincher,
adjust the vertical alignment as described below.
(1) If installing a stapler, mount the stapler into place.
(2) Loosely fasten the clincher in place with 4 screws.
(If the clincher is already fastened in place, loosen
the 4 screws so that you can adjust it.)
(3) Remove the plate from the jig.
Jig positioning
Plate section
Adjust.
Jig
Scale Scale Scale
(2) Hold paper against the stoppers and confirm that

all three stoppers are in alignment.
(3) Execute stapling to confirm that the stopper line Guide pins
and stapler line are parallel.
1 - 124
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
(4) Remove the cartridge, and install the plate that

you took from the jig.
Clincher Clincher unit

Cartridge
Jig
Plate Peg
Guide pin hole
Caution: The positioning portion of the jig

(5) Install the cartridge. need not be engaged with the
Caution: Remove the remaining staples on clincher completely. Only part of
the upper surface. Remove the the end of the positioning portion
staple sheet if it is bent. must be engaged so long as it is
(6) Insert the two guide pins of the jig in the guide pin not disengaged.
holes, and engage the end of the positioning
portion of the jig with the clincher. (7) Rotate the stapler gears downward. Adjust the
clincher position so that the plate on the cartridge
fits smoothly into the groove on the jig. Rotate the
stapler gear further to fit the plate in the groove in
the jig and the jig in the clincher unit completely.
Jig
Gears
1 - 125
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[27] FNS Adjusting the Angle of the

Groove
Folding Stopper (FN-4 only)
Plate
1. Tool used
• Phillips-head screwdriver
2. Preparation
(1) If the staple orientation is not parallel with the
paper edge, adjust as described below.
Stapler (1) Open the front cover and pull the stacker/stapler
unit part of the way out..
(2) Remove the 2 rail-stopper screws. Then pull the
stacker/stapler unit all of the way out.
(8) Tighten the 4 clincher screws to fasten the
Rail Stopper Screw
clincher into place.
(9) Rotate the stapler gears back upwards, and
remove the jig.
Caution: When removing the jig, be careful
not to damage the mylar of the
clincher unit.
(10) Remove the plate from the cartridge and set it
back into the jig.
(11) Reinstall the cartridge and check that stapler
operates correctly.
Stacker/Stapler Unit
Rail Stopper Screw
1 - 126
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
(3) Remove the 4 set screws holding the cover in [28] FNS Adjusting the Staple Position
place, and remove the cover. (Stapling-and-Folding) (FN-4 only)
1. Tool used
• Scale
Screws
2. Preparation
(1) Connect the finisher to the main body.
(2) Load paper of the appropriate size into the main
body.
(3) Before proceeding, be sure that you have cor-
rectly adjusted the angle of the stapling-and-
folding stopper.
(4) For each paper size, confirm that is stapling is
Cover
positioned correctly at the center of the sheets.
Screws
(5) If stapling is off-center, adjust as described be-
low.
(4) Loosen 4 more set screws. 3. Adjustment Procedure

(5) Rotate the stapling-and-folding stopper assem- (1) Hold down keys [3] and [6] on the copier’s nu-
bly as necessary to adjust the alignment. meric keypad while setting the main switch ON.
The copier will enter finisher-adjustment mode.
Scale (2) Select [[6] Finisher Adjust] at the copier display.
Screw
(3) Select [Copy Screen] at the copier display. The
display switches to the Copy screen.
(4) Take a staple-and-fold sample using the paper
size that you want to adjust for.
(5) Return to the adjustment screen and select [[1]
Stapling-and-folding stopper adjust].
(6) Select the size for adjustment by pressing the up
or down arrow button on the display as neces-
sary.
(7) Enter the adjustment value using the [+← →-]
button or the numeric keypad. (0.1mm/step)
(8) Press the [Set] button to register the adjustment.
(9) Return to the Copy screen and take another
sample. Check that the discrepancy is within the
limit.
(10) Repeat the above adjustment procedure for other
paper sizes.
1 - 127
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[29] FNS Adjusting the Angle of the 3. Adjustment Procedure

Folding (1) Take a fold sample using A3 or 11x17 paper.
Stopper (FN-4 only) (2) Check the discrepancy along the folded set’s
1. Tools used trailing edge, and use this information to judge
• Phillips-head screwdriver the direction and amount by which the stopper
• Phillips-head stubby screwdriver angle must be corrected.
(3) Loosen the 2 front set screws holding the stopper
2. Preparation
in place, and adjust the stopper angle by rotating
around the rear screw.
(2) Load A3 or 11x17 paper into the main body.
(3) Remove the paper exit-guide-plate adjustment
cover.
Folding Stopper Screws
Adjustment Cover Screw
(4) Retighten the 2 front screws.

(4) Check whether the following conditions hold. (5) Take another sample and check the discrepancy.
• Check that the fold line (the folding stopper) is (6) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until the discrepancy is
perpendicular to the conveyance direction.
within the specified limit.
• Check that the fold side discrepancy (for A3 or
(7) Replace the adjustment cover.
11x17 paper) is within the limit.
Limit: A = 1mm
A=Within1mm
(5) If either or both of the above conditions does not

hold, adjust as described below.
1 - 128
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[30] FNS Adjusting the Folding-Stopper (5) Return to the adjustment screen and select [[2]
Positions (FN-4 only) Folding stopper adjust].
1. Tool used (6) Select the size for adjustment by pressing the up
• Scale or down arrow button on the display as neces-
sary.
2. Preparation
(7) Enter the adjustment value [=half the value of the
discrepancy along the folded set’s trailing edge]
(2) Load paper of the appropriate size into the main
using the [+/–] button or the numeric keypad.
body.
(0.1mm/step)
(3) Before proceeding, be sure that you have cor-
If the lower pages are jutting out past the upper
rectly adjusted the angle of the folding stopper.
pages, the fold is too much to the “+” side; correct
(4) Check whether the following conditions hold.
by adjusting to the “–” side. If the upper pages are
• For each paper size: Paper is correctly folded
jutting out, the fold is too much to the “–” side;
at the center.
• For each paper size: Discrepancy along the correct by adjusting to the “+” side.
trailing edge of the folded paper is within the (8) Press the [Set] button to register the adjustment.
limit. (9) Return to the Copy screen and take another
Limit: A=1mm sample. Check that the discrepancy is within the
limit.
(10) Repeat the above adjustment procedure for other
paper sizes.
A=Within1mm
4. Example
(1) Assume that at time of ejection the lower pages
are extending out 1.4mm relative to the upper
pages.
(5) If either or both of the above conditions does not

m
hold, adjust as described below. 1.
4m
3. Adjustment Procedure Paper exit direction
(1) Hold down keys [3] and [6] on the copier’s nu-
meric keypad while setting the main switch ON.
(2) Select [[6] Finisher Adjust] at the copier display.
(3) Select [Copy Screen] at the copier display. The (2) Since the lower pages are jutting out, the discrep-
display switches to the Copy screen. ancy is on the “+” side. Correct by entering an
(4) Take a fold sample using the paper size that you adjustment of [-7].
want to adjust for.
1 - 129
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[31] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the [32] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the
Stapler- Movement Timing Belt Stapler- Rotation Timing Belt
1. Tools used 1. Tools used
• Phillips-head screwdriver • Phillips-head screwdriver
• Tension gauge or spring balance • Tension gauge or spring balance
(1) If the belt tensioner has become loose as a result (1) If the belt tensioner has been loosened as a result
of belt replacement or for some other reason, of belt replacement or for some other reason,
adjust as described below. adjust as described below.
3. Adjustment Procedure 3. Adjustment Procedure

(1) Loosen the 2 screws holding the tensioner in (1) Loosen the 2 screws holding the tensioner in
place. place.
(2) Using a tension gauge or spring balance, pull the (2) Using a tension gauge or spring balance, pull the
belt-tensioner so that tension A is at the value belt-tensioner so that tension A is at the value
indicated below. Maintain this tension while re- indicated below. Maintain this tension while re-
tightening the screws. tightening the screws.
Spec value for tension: A = 1.5±0.5kg Spec value for tension: A = 0.75 ±0.05kg
1 - 130
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[33] FNS Adjusting the Folding Force [34] Cover Inserter A Adjusting the Size
(FN-4 only) of the Coversheet-Tray Width
1. Preparation Regulation Plates
(1) If necessary, you can change the force of the 1. Preparation
folding and pressure rollers as described below. (1) Install the coversheet tray (Cover Inserter A) on
Caution: If changing the forces, be sure to the finisher.
make the same change for all roll- (2) Connect the finisher to the copier.
ers at the same time. (3) Check whether all paper sizes are correctly de-
tected.
(4) If one or more sizes are not correctly detected,
(1) Set the springs as illustrated below; a pressure
carry out adjustment as described below.
spring on the folding roller, and a fold spring on
the pressure roller.
2. Adjustment procedure
Force: If A = 7.8kgf
(1) Hold down keys [3] and [6] on the copier’s nu-
If B = 8.9kgf
meric keypad while setting the main switch ON.
If C = 10.0kgf
Caution: Be sure to attach the springs into
(2) Select [[6] Finisher Adjust] at the copier display.
like-labelled holes (either A, or B,
or C). (3) Again at the copier display, select [[4] Adjust
coversheet tray size].
(4) Push the width regulation plates out to maximum
width.
Pressure Spring
Fold Spring
Width
Regulation Plates
(5) At the screen, select [YES].

(6) Confirm that the following message is displayed,
Pressure Spring indicating that adjustment is finished.
Adjust coversheet tray size

----Adjustment completed.----
Fold Spring
1 - 131
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 - 132
ISW
2
2 ISW
2 ISW
ISW
What is ISW ?
ISW (In-System Writer) is a process of updating the control programs stored in flash ROM mounted on various
control boards in a Minolta digital copier without isolating the boards from the copier. Running ISW enables you
to upgrade control programs without replacing the boards and maintain the boards during their replacement.
Tools available for running ISW include ISW Trns (PC software), which connects a personal computer (PC) to the
digital copier.
This tool can be plugged into the ISW connector of the digital copier to directly update the control programs in the
flash ROM assembled in the unit.
2 ISW
This chapter focuses on instructions on setting up the Di750 to run ISW. For how to run ISW Trns refer to Minolta
ISW (In-System Writer) Service Manual.
2-1
ISW
SETUP
[1] ISW-compatible boards 2. 25 mode
The Di750 allows ROM data residing on the fol- The 25 mode works only where the copier has
lowing boards to be updated via ISW Tool: both the graphics control and operation control
- Graphics control board programs installed.
- Printer control board (Some parts of HELP+CHECK mode are used
- Operation control board to update the operation control program in 25
- ADF control board mode.)
The ROMs of other boards than the above need
to be replaced.
2 ISW
[2] Data flow

PC/ISW Tool Graphics control Operation control board
Printer control board
ADF control board
Important Note:
The availability of the Graphics control board is pre-
requisite to updating ROM data on other boards.
[3] Ready up the copier to start an ISW

transfer
1. Transfer modes
The copier supports three transfer modes as de-
scribed below.
- Power-on mode
If the copier does not have the graphics control
program installed, its writing to the copier is ena-
bled when the copier is turned on. Because the
graphics control board controls the power supply
to the operation control board, nothing will ap-
pear on the operation LCD even though the op-
eration control program has been installed on the
copier.
- HELP + CHECK mode

Turning ON the copier with HELP and CHECK
puts it into the HELP + CHECK mode. If the copier
has the graphics control program installed, but
not the operation control program, the 25 mode
would not launch. This mode is specifically main-
tained to enable ISW in this situation.
2-2
ISW
2. Instances of ISW transfer
- Writing ROM data newly (as after replacing boards)
Normal start-up display Writing method Condition

Graphics control Flashing timer LED Writing is enabled with The copier does not have the
No display on the operation LCD power turned ON. graphics control program installed.
Operation control Error code display Writing is enabled by launching The copier has the graphics
the HELP + CHECK mode. control program installed.
2 ISW
Others Error code display 25 mode or HELP + CHECK The copier has both the graphics control
mode and operation control programs installed.
- Upgrading
Normal start-up display Writing method Condition

Graphics control Normal 25 mode or HELP + CHECK The copier has all the programs
mode installed.
Operation control Normal
Others Normal
2-3
ISW
[4] HELP + CHECK mode operation flow
Power ON (HELP + CHECK) From the 25 mode menu
Some parts of this mode is used to update

2 ISW
the operation control program from 25 mode.
1. PC Choose “PC.”
Choose from among graphics control, printer

ISW
Choose a board. control, operation control, ADF.
Choose from among C1 to C5 (batch or individual),

ISW
O1 to 05 (batch or individual), I1, F1, and V1.
Choose an item.
PC
Start ISW
Confirmation window
2-4
ISW
Start ISW
Main Body
2 ISW
Exit ISW
Exit window
Normal end
*** NORMAL END ***
0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT
Abnormal end
*** ABNORMAL END ***

DATA ERROR
0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT
2-5
ISW
[5] Operating procedure (2) ISW device select menu

1. HELP + CHECK + power supply mode Function: This window lets you select the con-
(prerequisite) trol board on which to update ROM
Turn the main SW ON while pressing “HELP” and data. You can choose from among
“CHECK” button. graphics control, printer control, opera-
(1) ISW write mode select menu tion control, ADF.
Function: This window lets you select a mode in
which to update ISW. ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU [MODE:PC]
2 ISW
ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU 1. GRAPHIC CONTROL

2. PRINTER CONTROL
1. PC 3. OPERATION CONTROL
4. ADF
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 9. EXIT Operating instructions

1) Select the control board on which to update
Operating instructions ROM data. Choose from among 1 to 5.
1) Choose ISW WRITE MODE When you select a number, the associated
Choose “PC” for both using personal com- item select menu appears.
puter.
2) To return to the previous window
2) To exit writing Press 0 (PREVIOUS) to return to the ISW
Press 9 (EXIT) to open the power-off win- write mode select menu.
dow.
3) To exit writing
Press 9 (EXIT) to open the power-off win-
dow.
2-6
ISW
(3) Item select menu (4) Start confirmation window

Function: This window lets you select write Function: This window prompts you to confirm
items. whether to start running ISW or not.
OPERATION CONTROL - ITEM SELECT MENU [MODE:PC] OPERATION CONTROL - 01 [MODE:PC]
1. 01
2. 02
3. 03 ISW START OK?
2 ISW
4. 04
5. 05
6. ALL
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 1. YES 2. NO
Operating instructions Operating instructions

1) Individual write 1) Choose YES to start running ISW.
Choose from among 1 to 5. When you se-
lect a number, the start confirmation window 2) Choose NO to cancel.
opens. When you cancel, the item select menu ap-
pears again.
2) Batch write
To write all items in a batch, select “ALL.”
When you select “ALL,” the start confirma-
tion window opens.
3) To return to the previous window

Press 0 (PREVIOUS) to return to the ISW
device select menu.
4) To exit writing
dow.
2-7
ISW
(5) Executing window (6) Ending result window

Function: This window displays the status of Function: This window displays the status of ISW
execution in progress. ending.
Normal end
EXECUTING
*** NORMAL END ***
2 ISW
Operating instructions PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT

1) The executing indicator flashes. When the
execution ends, the ending result window
opens. Abnormal end
*** ABNORMAL END ***

INPUT DEVICE ERROR
(ERROR CODE : xx)
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT
Operating instructions
1) Choose 0 (CONTINUE) to return to the item
select menu.
2) To exit writing
dow.
2-8
ISW
Error Code Description Action No.

01 There is an error in the command to ISW processing unit. (1)
1F A program error is detected. (1)
41 Input data format error. (during ISW to operation control board) (2)
42 Invalid machine name input data. (during ISW to operation control board) (2)
43 Invalid board name input data. (during ISW to operation control board) (2)
81 Input device error such as input timeout. (during ISW to operation control board) (3)
2 ISW
C1 Failed to erase flash ROM. (during ISW to graphics control board) (5)
C2 Write to flash ROM has failed. (during ISW to graphics control board) (5)
C3 ROM checksum error. (during ISW to graphics control board) (8)
C4 Output device error such as output timeout. (6)
E9 Communication parameter error at image control unit to operation unit I/F. (4)
(during ISW to operation control board)
EA Command sequence error at image control unit to operation unit I/F. (4)
EB Communication timeout error at image control unit to operation unit I/F. (4)
F0 Flash ROM error (during ISW to operation control board) (7)
F1 Flash verify error (during ISW to operation control board) (7)
F2 Flash write error (during ISW to operation control board) (7)
F3 Flash erase error (during ISW to operation control board) (7)
F8 Receive checksum error at image control unit to operation unit I/F (4)
F9 Receive header code error at image control unit to operation unit I/F (4)
FA Receive parity error at image control unit to operation unit I/F (4)
FB Receive framing error at image control unit to operation unit I/F (4)
FC Receive overflow error at image control unit to operation unit I/F (4)
<Error code table action classification>

(1) Program is not executing normally.
Restart from power up and re-execute the program.
(2) Check the ISW transfer data file.
(3) Check that the communication cable between input devices (PC) is properly connected.
(4) Check the image control unit to operation unit I/F.
(5) There is an error in the flash ROM on the image control board.
Restart from ISW. If the error persists, the life of the image control board flash ROM may have expired.
Replace the image control board.
(6) An error was detected in the ISW target board. Check the ISW target board.
2-9
ISW
(7) There is an error in the flash ROM on the operation unit board.
Restart from ISW. If the error persists, the life of the operation unit board flash ROM may have expired.
Replace the operation unit board.
* The system may fail to restart.
In that case, restart while pressing the HELP key and CHECK key and repeat ISW.
(8) The checksum result after program write does not match the ROM checksum data of the ISW transfer data
file.
Restart from ISW. If the error persists, the ISW transfer data file may not be created correctly.
2 ISW
(7) Power-off window

Function: This is a power-off window.
*** PLEASE TURN OFF A POWER SUPPLY ***
Operating instructions
1) Turn OFF the main switch.
[6] Preparing the copier to transfer

Start the copier with 25 mode enabled to put the
copier into ISW transfer wait state.
Step Procedure
1 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
2 Turn ON the copier main switch while
holding down the copy count setup
buttons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode.
3 [25 mode menu window]
Press 11 (ISW update).
4 [ISW update menu window]
Select the control board on which to
update ROM date.
5 [ISW update start window]
The START key appears, indicating the
copiers readiness to launch an ISW
transfer.
6 Follow operating instructions in ISW (in-
System Writer) Service Manual.
2 - 10
ISW
[7] Relationships between processing states and operational LEDs

Note : This is only when installing the program to graphics control for the first time.
Timer
2 ISW
Power save
ON/OFF
No. Timer Power Save

1 Initializing CPU now OFF OFF
2 Checking memory OFF OFF
3 Memory check error (waiting for data from PC) Flashing OFF
4 ISW processing (receiving data) OFF Flashing
5 ISW processing (writing to flash memory) OFF Flashing
6 Transfer data error Flashing Flashing
7 Flash write error Flashing Steady lit
8 Memory check successful and reboot OFF OFF
[8] Rewriting procedure after an error interruption

If errors occur while writing ROM data, it is written the same way as explained in “Writing ROM data newly”
in [3]-2, “Instances of ISW transfer.”
- Graphics control program

The timer LED (orange) flashes. (Nothing will appear on the operation LCD because communication with the
operating unit is disabled.)
Retry ISW after turning the main switch OFF, then ON.
- Operation control program

Since the 25 mode is disabled, launch the HELP + CHECK mode to run ISW.
- Other control programs

Relaunch the 25 mode to retry ISW. (It is assumed that the copier has both the graphics control and
operation control programs successfully installed.)
2 - 11
ISW
[9] Making the ISW connector and the [10] Kinds and quantities of update
power connector available ROMs
The ISW connector and the power connector are The update EPROMs supported by this unit are listed
hidden under the drum frame cover. Detach this cover below.
to run ISW. However, the number of update EPROMs supported may
a. Procedure change in the future.
(1) Open the left and right front doors.
(2) Open the toner supply unit. Control board ROM quantity
2 ISW
(3) Loosen three clamping screws to detach the General control board 1
drum frame cover. Operating unit 7
Imaging control board 2
ADF control board 1
Drum cover screws (3)
(4) Connect the PC parallel port and the copier ISW

connector with parallel interface cable as in-
structed in ISW (In-System Writer) Service
Manual.
PC ISW connector
(36-pin)
Parallel (printer)
interface port
Centronics cable
2 - 12
3
SERVICE
3 SERVICE
3 SERVICE
SERVICE
CE TOOL LIST
Material No. Material Name Appearance Quantity Remarks
4014-5001-01 Temp. sensor PS jig/A 1

(for upper fixing roller)
4014-5002-01 Temp. sensor PS jig/B 1

(for heating roller)
4014-5003-01 Thermostat PS jig/A (for 1

upper fixing roller)
4014-5004-01 Thermostat PS jig/B (for 1
3 SERVICE
heating roller)
4014-5005-01 Optics position 2

adjusting jig
4014-5006-01 Door switch jig 1
4014-5007-01 Setting powder 1
25 g
Note: The Part Number supported may change in the future.
3-1
SERVICE
Material No. Material Name Appearance Quantity Remarks
4014-5008-01 PS jig 2pc/set For EDH-2
9005-9005-19 Test Chart 1
4014-5011-01 White chart 1 For EDH-2
4014-5009-01 Stapler PS jig 1 For FN-104/

3 SERVICE
FN-4
Note: The Part Number supported may change in the future.
3-2
4
ELECTRIC PARTS LIST

PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
Di750 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING

[1] Read Section/Operational Section
ICB
Image
control OP IFB
FM7 board Optional I/F PS7
Scanner cooling fan board ADF brake PS
MS1 ADB PS5
Interlock 1 A/D Scanner HP PS
PS24 converter
Front door open/close OB INVB board M13
detection PS1 OB Inverter Scanner drive motor
board MB
MS2 Memory board
Interlock 2 ICB IFB PS6
PS25 ICB I/F board Original HP PS
Front door open/close
detection PS2 Scanner
reverse PS
SW1
Main switch L1
Exposure lamp
SW2
Reset switch L1 INVB
LCD L1 Inverter
C(T) PS68
Total counter Indicator
board PS66 APS sensor 7
PS63 APS sensor 5
APS sensor 2 PS64
APS sensor 3
PS62 PS67
APS sensor 1 OB1 APS sensor 6

Operation board 1 PS65
FRONT APS sensor 4
OB2
Operation board 2
[2] Charging Corona Wire Unit

PS41
Charging wire cleaning pad HP PS
PS42
Charging wire cleaning pad limit PS
PCL
Pre-charging exposure lamp
M23
FRONT Charger cleaning motor
4-1
[3] Drum Unit
DPSB
Drum potential sensor board
DPS
HTR1 Drum potential sensor
Drum heater DTSB
Drum temperature sensor board
SD4 TH5
Separation claw SD Drum temperature sensor
TCSB
Toner control sensor board
[4] Cleaning Unit
PS30
Blade PS1
M14
Blade motor
PS31
Blade PS2
4-2
[5] Tray 1,2,3

MC3/5/7 PS48/50/52
Feed clutch 1/2/3 MC4/6/8
Pre-registration clutch 1/2/3 Paper pre-registration PS 1/2/3
PS26/27/28
No paper PS 1/2/3
HTR2/3/4
Tray heater 1/2/3 PS20/21/22
Tray upper limit PS 1/2/3
PS47/49/51
PS33/36/39 Paper feed PS 1/2/3
Paper size detection SD8/9/10
PS2-1/2/3 Pick up SD 1/2/3
PS32/35/38
Paper size detection
PS1-1/2/3
M19/20/21
VR1/2/3 Up drive motor 1/2/3
Paper size detection VR 1/2/3
PS14/15/16
Handle release PS
FRONT
1/2/3
SD5/6/7

Lock Solenoid 1/2/3 PS34/37/40
Remaining paper detection PS 1/2/3
[6] Vertical Conveyance Section
PS54
Loop PS
MC9
PS18 Vertical conveyance
Vertical conveyance PS1 clutch1
MC10
Vertical conveyance
clutch 2
PS53
Vertical conveyance PS2
PS19
FRONT Vertical conveyance PS3
PS17
Open/close detection PS
4-3
[7] By-pass Feed Section
FM8
Write section SD11
cooling fan 2 Pick up SD (by-pass)
FM5
Write section
PS23 cooling fan 1
Tray upper limit PS (by-pass) M22
Up/down motor (by-pass)
PS43
Tray lower limit PS
(by-pass)
PS29
No paper PS (by-pass)
PS56
Paper size PS2 (by-pass)
PS55
Paper size PS1 (by-pass)
VR4
Paper size detection VR (by-pass)
[8] Second Paper Feed Section
PS44
Registration PS
MC1
Registration MC
PS45
Leading edge detection PS
PS1
Paper mis-centering PS
FRONT
4-4
[9] ADU Unit

HV2
High voltage unit 2
TSL PS59
Transfer ADU deceleration PS
synchronization lamp
PS12 PS60
Transfer/separation wire ADU Pre-registration PS
cleaning pad limit PS PS46
PS13
ADU No paper detection PS ADU exit PS
PS11
PS58 Transfer/Separation wire cleaning
ADU paper reverse PS pad HP PS
M7 M9
FM1 ADU reverse motor Transfer motor
Paper exit
fan M12
Registration motor
MC2
ADU Pre-registration
MC
M18
Transfer/Separation cleaning
motor
SD1
PS57
ADU lock SD
paper reverse/
PS JAMIB
Jam indicator PS10
PS8 board ADU handle release PS

Paper reverse/ M5 SD3
conveyance PS Fixing guide SD
Paper reverse/ M8
SD2 exit motor ADU conveyance motor
Paper reverse
gate SD ADUSDB
PS9 FRONT
ADU stand drive
ADU paper conveyance PS
board
PS58 PS13
PS61 ADU paper
Paper exit PS ADU No paper PS45
reverse PS detection PS Copy paper leading
edge detection PS PS44
Registration PS
PS57
Paper
reverse PS
PS46
PS9 ADU exit PS
ADU paper
conveyance PS PS60
PS8 PS59 ADU pre-registration PS
Paper reverse/conveyance PS ADU deceleration PS
4-5
[10] Fixing Unit
TH2
Fixing temperature sensor 2
TH1
Fixing temperature sensor 1
TS1
TH4 Thermostat (upper)
Fixing temperature
sensor 4
M16
Web drive motor
L2
Fixing heater lamp 1
L3
PS3
L4
Fixing jam PS
TH3
Fixing temperature
sensor 3
TS2
Thermostat 2 (lower)
PS2
Fixing exit PS
[11] Paper Exit Section
FM6
Main body cooling fan 3
PS61
Paper exit PS
M10
Paper exit motor
FRONT
4-6
[12] Toner Supply Unit
M11
Toner supply motor 1
M15 TLD
Toner supply motor 2 Toner level detection sensor
[13] Write Section

INDXSB
Index sensor board
M17
Polygon motor
PMDB
Polygon motor drive board
M24
Laser correction motor
LDB2
Laser driver board 2
LDB1
Laser driver board 1
4-7
[14] Control/Drive Unit in Rear Section
M1
Main motor
SCDB FM2
Scanner drive board Developing section fan
M13
Scanner drive motor
M2
Drum motor
M3
Developing motor LAN IFB
LAN I/F board
FM4
Main unit cooling
fan 2
HV1
High voltage unit 1
FM3
Main unit cooling
fan 1
M10
Paper exit motor
M6
CBR2
Loop roller
Circuit breaker 2
motor
PSMB TRC1
Power Triac 1
supply
management TRC2
board Triac 2
DCDB
DC drive board ACDB
AC drive board
DCPS1
DC power
supply unit 1 Transformer
NF
M4 Noise filter
Paper feed PRCB
motor Printer control RL1
board RL2
Main relay CBR1 AC input relay for DCPS2
DCPS2
DC power RL3 Circuit
supply unit 2 AC input relay for IP breaker 1
4-8
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
Di750 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

[1] Read Section
651 (W: 3pin)

640 (BK:4pin)
650 (W: 3pin)
652 (W: 3pin)
653 (W: 3pin)
660 (W: 3pin)

661 (W: 3pin)
662 (W: 3pin)
665 (W: 3pin) 663 (W: 3pin)

666 (W: 3pin) 664 (W: 3pin)
FRONT 631 (BK:4pin)

[2] Charging Corona Wire Unit
356 (W: 2pin)
353 (W: 11pin)
357 (W: 3pin)
358 (W: 3pin)
359 (W: 3pin)
FRONT
4-9
[3] Drum Unit
353 (W: 7pin)

350 (W: 4pin)
340 (B: 12pin)
351 (W: 4pin)
342 (W: 2pin)
341 (BK: 26pin)
341 (BK: 10pin)
[4] Cleaning Unit

360 (W: 3pin)
361 (W: 3pin)
355 (BK: 9pin)
4 - 10
[5] Tray 1,2,3
261, 278 (W: 2pin)

262, 279 (W: 6pin)
260, 277 (W: 2pin) 275 (W: 3pin)
250, 252 (BK: 24pin) 276 (W: 3pin)

269, 307 (W: 2pin) 274 (W: 3pin)
273 (W: 3pin)
271, 288 (W: 3pin) 263, 280 (W:6pin)
264 (W: 2pin)

277, 289
(W:2pin)
270, 287 (W: 3pin)
268, 252 (W: 3pin)

265, 282 (W: 3pin)
FRONT
255, 283 (W: 3pin) 267, 285 (BK: 2pin)

[6] Vertical Conveyance Section
254 (W: 12pin)
292 (W: 3pin)
253 (W: 10pin)
293 (W: 3pin)
294 (W: 3pin)
750 (W: 10pin)

295 (W: 3pin)
296 (W: 3pin)

FRONT
4 - 11
[7] By-pass Feed Section
471 (BK:9pin)
77 (BK:4pin)
247 (W:2pin)
470 (W:13pin)
254 (W:12pin)
248 (W:2pin)
76 (BK:4pin) 254 (W:7pin)
244 (W:3pin)
243 (W:3pin)
246 (W:3pin) 242 (W:3pin)

241 (W:3pin)
473 (W:13pin)
[8] Second Paper Feed Section

599 (W: 3pin)

598 (W: 3pin) 569 (W: 7pin)
568 (W: 8pin)
591 (W: 10pin) 565 (W: 2pin)
570 (W: 3pin)
FRONT
4 - 12
[9] ADU Unit
557 (W: 6pin)
565 (W: 3pin)
569 (W: 7pin)
568 (W: 8pin)
678 (W: 6pin)

583 (W: 3pin)
593 (W: 2pin)
588 (W: 3pin)
586 (W: 3pin)
584 (W: 3pin)
585 (W: 3pin)

581 (W: 3pin)
580 (W: 3pin) 557 (W: 6pin)
592 (W: 3pin) 577 (W: 3pin)

564 (W: 2pin)
580 (W: 5pin)
561 (W: 2pin)
578 (W: 3pin) 531 (W: 7pin)
587 (W: 3pin)
562 (W: 2pin)

525 (W: 2pin)
569 (W: 6pin)

FRONT
4 - 13
[10] Fixing Unit
488 (W: 4pin)
489 (W: 5pin) 487 (W: 3pin)
486 (W: 2pin)

462 (W: 2pin)
451 (BK: 20pin)
450 (B: 8pin)
465 (W: 3pin)
464 (W: 3pin)
FRONT
[11] Paper Exit Section
177 (W: 3pin)
480 (W: 3pin)
FRONT
4 - 14
[12] Toner Supply Unit
482 (W: 6pin)
184 (W: 4pin) 484 (W: 3pin)
483 (W: 3pin)

473 (W: 13pin)

[13] Write Section
193 (W: 6pin) 192 (W: 13pin)

190 (W: 12pin)
191 (W: 14pin)
583 (W: 5pin)
4 - 15
[14] Printer Control Board
224 (W: 7pin) 225 (GY: 20pin) 229 (W: 5pin)

230 (W: 3pin) 292 (N.C.) 37 (N.C.) 216 (W: 15pin) 223 (GY: 20pin)
291 (N.C.)
222 (W: 15pin) 215 (GY: 18pin)
228 (W: 8pin)

210 (GY: 30pin)
227 (W: 9pin)
213 (GY: 60pin)

211 (GY: 60pin)
271 (GY:16pin)
220 (GY: 50pin) 295 (N.C.) 200 (W: 5pin)
299 (N.C.)
290 (N.C.) 298 (N.C.) 218 (W: 12pin)
[15] Power Supply Management Board [16] Image Control Board

117 (BK: 168pin)

112 (BK: 120pin)
904 (W: 5pin) 902 (W: 3pin) 116 (BK: 168pin)
128 (BN: 20pin)
115 (BK: 168pin)
129 (BN: 40pin)
114 (BK: 168pin)
901
(W: 18pin)
113 (BK: 120pin) 110 (GY: 34pin) 119 (W: 3pin)
903 (W: 4pin)

900 (W: 8pin) 111 (GY: 8pin) 118 (W: 20pin) 120 (BK: 60pin)
4 - 16
[17] ICB I/F Board
127 (BK: 120pin)
100 (W: 10pin)
101 (W: 3pin)
134 (BK: 20pin) 145 (N.C.)
133 (W: 8pin) 135 (GY: 22pin)
132 (W: 13pin) 137 (GY: 20pin)
131 (W: 14pin) 140 (W: 9pin) 138 (W: 13pin)

139 (W: 8pin)
130 (W: 12pin)
[18] ADU Stand Drive Board

524 (W: 6pin) 528 (W: 8pin) 527 (W: 7pin) 523 (W: 6pin)
500 (W: 8pin)
501 (W: 2pin) 520 (GY: 28pin)
510 (W: 11pin)
525 (W: 12pin)

526 (W: 10pin) 521 (GY: 16pin)
593 (N.C.) 594 (N.C.) 522 (W: 12pin)
591 (N.C.)
4 - 17
[19] DC Drive Board [21] DC Power Supply Unit 1
301 (W: 2pin) 324 (W: 6pin) 323 (W: 7pin)

60 (W: 6pin) 59 (W: 4pin) 51 (W: 4pin)
57 (W: 8pin) 54 (W: 5pin)
325 322
(W: 6pin) (W: 12pin)
310 58 (W: 8pin)

(GY: 60pin) 52 (W: 5pin)
F2 56 (W: 10pin)
55 (W: 10pin)
53 (W: 7pin)
F1
2 (W: 2pin)
300 (W: 6pin) 321 (W: 7pin) 320 (W: 14pin)
1 (W: 2pin)
Caution: Must use fuses specified by Minolta
when replacing F1 and F2. If fuses
are not specified by Minolta, the
safety feature may not work,
resulting in burn damage to the [22] DC Power Supply Unit 2
board or personal injury.
71 (W: 7pin) 74 (W: 10pin) FT1 (W: 1pin)

[20] AC Drive Board
76 (W: 9pin)
72 (W: 8pin)
420 (GY: 18pin) 422 (W: 6pin)
35 (W: 5pin) 424 (W: 2pin)
73 (W: 8pin) 75 (W: 4pin)

401 (W: 2pin)
36 (N.C.)
FT1 (W: 1pin) FT2 (W: 1pin)
FT3 (W: 1pin)
FT2 (W: 1pin)
FT3 (W: 1pin)
FT4 (W: 1pin)
FT4 (W: 1pin)
430 (W: 4pin)
410 (GY: 60pin)
440 (W: 5pin)

400 (W: 8pin) 442 (W: 5pin)
4 - 18
[23] Scanner Drive Board [26] Jam Indicator Board
620 (W: 3pin)
623 (W: 7pin)

622 (W: 4pin)
621 (W: 4pin)
531 (W:7pin)
610 (W: 15pin) 600 (W: 6pin)
[24] High Voltage Unit 1 [27] L1 Inverter

632 (W: 3pin) 2 (W: 2pin)
251 (W:9pin) 250 (W:3pin)
[25] High Voltage Unit 2 [28] Drum Potential Sensor Board
457 (W: 5pin) 458 (W: 4pin)
551 (W:11pin) 550 (W:4pin)
4 - 19
[29] Drum Temperature Sensor Board [32] Optional I/F Board
123 (W: 120pin)
122 (BK: 60pin)
455 (W: 4pin) 456 (BK: 2pin)
124 (W: 120pin)
[30] Operation Board 1 [33] OB Inverter
165 (W: 3pin)
161 (BK: 14pin)
162 (W: 4pin)

150 (W: 10pin) 160 (BK: 24pin)

152 166 (W: 4pin)
153 (W: 3pin)
[31] Operation Board 2 [34] Toner Control Sensor Board
164 (BK: 24pin) 151 (W: 7pin) 454 (W: 9pin)

163 (W: 3pin)
4 - 20
[35] Index Sensor Board [38] Polygon Motor Drive Board
130 (W: 5pin)

442 (W: 11pin)
422 (W: 12pin)
[39] Memory Board

[36] A/D Converter Board
141 (W: 20pin)
410 (W: 5pin)

411 (W: 34pin)
142 (W: 20pin)
[40] LAN I/F Board

[37] Laser Driver Board 1/2
144
(W: 8pin)
440 (W: 12pin)
145 (W: 8pin)
4 - 21
JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST

Jam Countermeasure
Classification code Cause Machine response
By-pass tray J10-1 PS44 (registration) is not turned If there is paper in the Remove the original
ON within the specified time after copy process when from the by-pass
SD11 (pick up (by-pass)) is in the this jam occurs, the tray and remove the
standby state. machine stops after jammed paper.
J10-2 PS44 (registration) is not turned completion of paper
OFF within the specified time after ejection.
Operating
SD11 (pick up (by-pass)) is turned

ON.
Tray 1 J11-1 PS48 (paper pre-registration 1) is If there is paper in the Remove the tray
not turned ON within the specified copy process when and remove the
time after MC4 (pre-registration this jam occurs, the jammed paper.
MC 1) is turned ON. machine stops after
J11-2 PS47 (paper feed 1) is not turned completion of paper
ON within the specified time after ejection.
MC3 (feed MC1) is turned ON.
J11-3 PS18 (vertical conveyance 1) is Open the vertical
ON during idling. conveyance door of
the main body and
remove the jammed
Main body and LCT
paper.
Stationary
J11-4 PS47 (paper feed 1) is ON during Open the vertical

idling. conveyance door of
the main body and
remove the jammed

J11-5 PS48 (paper pre-registration 1) is paper.
ON during idling. Remove the tray
and remove the
jammed paper.
Tray 2 J12-1 PS50 (paper pre-registration 2) is If there is paper in the Open the vertical
not turned ON within the specified copying process conveyance door of
time after MC6 (pre-registration when this jam occurs, the main body and
Operating
MC2) is turned ON. the machine stops remove the jammed

J12-2 PS49 (paper feed 2) is not turned after completion of paper. Remove the
ON within the specified time after paper ejection. tray and remove the
MC5 (feed MC2) is turned ON. jammed paper.
Open the vertical
J12-3 PS19 (vertical conveyance 3) is conveyance door of
Stationary
ON during idling. the main body and

J12-5 PS49 (feed 2) is ON during idling. remove the jammed
J12-5 PS50 (paper pre-registration 2) is paper.
ON during idling.
4 - 22
JAM CODE LIST
Jam Countermeasure
Tray 3 J13-1 PS52 (paper pre-registration 3) is If there is a paper in Open the vertical
not turned ON within the specified copying process conveyance door of
time after MC8 (pre-registration when this jam occurs, the main body and
Operating
MC3) is turned ON. the machine stops remove the jammed
after completion of paper.
J13-2 PS51 (paper feed 3) is not turned paper ejection. Remove the tray
ON within the specified time after and remove the
MC7 (feed MC3) is turned ON. jammed paper.
J13-3 PS19 (vertical conveyance 3) is Open the vertical
ON during idling. conveyance door of
the main body and
remove the jammed
paper.
Stationary
J13-4 PS51 (paper feed 3) is ON during Open the vertical

idling. conveyance jam
door of the main
body and remove
J13-5 PS52 (paper pre-registration 3) is the jammed paper.
ON during idling. Remove the tray
Main body and LCT
and remove the

jammed paper.
C-305 J14-1 PS107 (LT first paper feed If there is a paper in Open the LCT
detection) is not turned ON within copying process cover and remove
the specified time after MC102 when this jam occurs, the jammed paper.

Operating
(LT first paper feed MC) is turned the machine stops Open the LCT door
ON. after completion of and remove the
J14-2 PS106 (LT feed detection) is not paper ejection. jammed paper.
turned ON within the specified
time after MC101 (LT feed drive
MC) is turned ON.
J14-3 PS106 (LT feed detection) is ON
Stationary
during idling.
J14-4 PS107 (LT first paper feed
detection) is ON during idling.
Paper feed J17-1 PS44 (registration) is not turned If there is a paper in Open the right door,
and ON within the specified time after copying process draw out the ADU,
conveyance PS54 (loop) or PS46 (ADU exit) when this jam occurs, open the paper
(common is turned ON. the machine stops registration and
Operating
to all trays) after completion of loop roller unit jam

copied paper ejection. removal mecha-
nism and jam
access guide B,
and remove the
jammed paper.
4 - 23
JAM CODE LIST
Jam Countermeasure
Paper feed J17-2 PS54 (loop) is not turned ON If there is a paper in Open the vertical
and within the specified time after copying process paper conveyance
conveyance PS47 (paper feed 1) is turned ON. when this jam occurs, jam access door of
(tray 1) the machine stops the main body and
Paper feed J17-3 PS54 (loop) is not turned ON within after completion of remove the jammed
and the specified time after PS53 copied paper ejection. paper.
conveyance (vertical conveyance 2) is turned
(tray 2/3) ON.
Paper feed J17-4 PS53(vertical conveyance 2) is
and not turned ON within the specified
conveyance time after PS49 (paper feed 2) is
(tray 2) turned ON.
Operating
Paper feed J17-5 PS53 (vertical conveyance 2) is If there is a paper in Open the vertical
and not turned ON within the specified copying process paper conveyance
conveyance time after PS51 (paper feed 3) is when this jam occurs, jam access door of
(tray 3) turned ON the machine stops the main body and
after completion of remove the jammed
paper ejection. paper.
C-305 J17-6 PS54 (loop) is not turned ON Open the LCT jam
within the specified time after access door and
PS106 (LT feed detection) is remove the jammed
Main body and LCT
turned ON. paper.

Paper feed J17-7 PS45 (leading edge detection) is Open the front door,
and ON during idling. draw out the ADU,

conveyance and remove the
J17-8 PS44 (registration) is ON during jammed paper.
Stationary
idling.
J17-9 PS46 (ADU exit) is ON during
idling.
J17-10 PS54 (loop) is ON during idling.
Vertical J19-1 The vertical conveyance door or If there is a paper in Open the vertical
paper top cover is opened during copying process conveyance door of
conveyance copying. when this jam occurs, the main body and
access the machine stops remove the jammed
door after completion of paper.
paper ejection.
Operating
C-305 J19-2 The jam access door is opened Open the LCT jam
during copying. access door and
remove the jammed
paper.
Drum J21-1 The drum wrapping paper If there is a paper in Open the front right
detection sensor detected paper copying process door, draw out the
at the specified timing in the print when this jam occurs, ADU, and remove
sequence. the machine stops the jammed paper.
J21-2 The drum wrapping paper after completion of
Stationary
detection sensor is detecting paper ejection.

paper during idling.
4 - 24
JAM CODE LIST
Jam Countermeasure
Second J31-1 PS45 (leading edge detection) is If there is a paper in Open the front right
paper feed not turned ON within the specified copying process door, draw out the
and time after MC1 (Registration) is when this jam occurs, ADU, and remove
conveyance turned ON. the machine stops the jammed paper.
J31-2 PS2 (fixing exit) is not turned ON after completion of
within the specified time after paper ejection.
PS45 (leading edge detection) is
turned ON.
Fixing unit: J32-1 PS61 (paper exit) is not turned
paper ON within the specified time after
ejection PS2 (fixing exit) is turned ON.
(straight
paper
Operating
ejection)
Fixing unit: J32-2 PS57 (paper reverse) is not
paper exit turned ON within the specified
(paper time after PS2 (fixing exit) is
reverse turned ON.
and exit)
Main body
(ADU)
Fixing unit: J32-3 PS57 (paper reverse) is not If there is a paper in Open the front right
paper tur ned ON again within the copying process door, draw out the
ejection specified time after PS57 (paper when this jam occurs, ADU, and remove
(paper reverse) is turned ON. the machine stops the jammed paper.

reverse J32-4 PS61 (paper exit) is not turned after completion of
and eject) ON within the specified time after paper ejection.
PS57 (paper reverse) is turned
ON again.
Fixing unit: J32-5 PS61 (paper exit) is not turned
Exit ON within the specified time after
conveyance PS61 (paper exit) is turned ON.
J32-6 PS61 (paper exit) is ON during
idling.
J32-8 PS57 (paper reverse) is ON
during idling.
Stationary
J32-9 PS2 (fixing exit) is ON during

idling.
J32-10 PS8 (paper reverse/conveyance)
is ON during idling.
J32-11 PS3 (fixing jam) is ON during
idling.
4 - 25
JAM CODE LIST
Jam Countermeasure
Front door J51-1 The front right or left door is The machine stops
opened during copying. immediately.
ADU inlet J92-1 PS58 (ADU paper reverse ) is not If there is a paper in
paper turned ON within the specified copying process
conveyance Operating time after PS57 (paper reverse) when this jam occurs,
is turned ON. the machine stops
J92-2 PS58 (ADU paper reverse) is not after completion of
tur ned ON again within the paper ejection.
specified time after PS58 (ADU
paper reverse) is turned ON.
J92-3 PS58 (ADU paper reverse) is ON The machine stops
Stationary
during idling. immediately.

Main body and LCT
ADU paper J93-1 PS59 (ADU deceleration) is not If there is paper in

Operating
reverse turned ON within the specified copying process

and time after PS58 (ADU paper when this jam occurs,
conveyance reverse) is turned ON. the machine stops
J93-2 PS59 (ADU deceleration) is ON after completion of
during idling. paper ejection.
Stationary
J93-3 PS9 (ADU paper conveyance) is

ON during idling.
J93-4 PS8 (paper reverse/
conveyance) is ON during idling.

LCT to J94-1 PS60 (ADU pre-registration ) is If there is a paper in Open the front right
ADU paper not turned ON within the copying process door, draw out the
feed specified time after PS59 (ADU when this jam occurs, ADU, and remove
Operating
deceleration) is turned ON. the machine stops the jammed paper.

J94-2 PS46 (ADU exit) is not turned ON after completion of
within the specified time after paper ejection.
PS60 (ADU pre-registration) is
turned ON.
J94-3 PS60 (ADU pre-registration) is
Stationary
ON during idling.
4 - 26
JAM CODE LIST
Jam Countermeasure
EDH-2 J61-1 PS301 (RADF open/close RADF stops immedi- Open the jam
detection) is turned OFF during ately. access cover and
RADF operation. If there is a paper in remove jammed
J61-2 MS301 (cover open/close) is or after the copying paper.
tur ned OFF during RADF process, the machine
operation. stops after completion
J62-1 PS306 (original registration of copied paper
detection) remains OFF within the ejection.
specified time after start of
prefeed.
J62-2 PS308 (original conveyance
detection) is not turned ON within
the specified time after start of
prefeed at the front surface of the
two-sided original (including one-
sided original).
the specified time after start of
prefeed at the back surface of the
two-sided original.
Operating
RADF
detection) is not turned OFF

within the specified time when

M301 (original conveyance roller
drive) is rotating in the forward
direction.
within the specified time when
M301 (original conveyance roller
drive) is rotating in the backward
direction.
J62-6 When a large-size two-sided
original is fed into the reversal
section, PS309 (original reversal
the specified time after turning
ON of PS308 (original convey-
ance detection).
J62-7 When a large-size one-sided
original is ejected, PS307
(original exit 1) is not turned ON
within the specified time after
turning ON of PS308 (original
conveyance detection).
4 - 27
JAM CODE LIST
Jam Countermeasure
EDH-2 J62-8 When a large-size two-sided RADF stops immedi- Open the jam
original is ejected, PS307 ately. access cover and
(original exit 1) is not turned ON If there is a paper in remove jammed
within the specified time after or after the copying paper.
turning ON of PS309 (original process, the machine
reversal detection). stops after completion
J62-9 When a large-size one-sided of copied paper
original is ejected, PS307 ejection.
(original exit 1) is not turned OFF
within the specified time.
(original exit 1) is not turned OFF
original is fed out of the reversal
detection) is not turned ON.
Operating
RADF


J63-4 When a small-size one-sided
turning ON of PS309 (original
reversal detection).
J63-5 When a small-size two-sided
turning ON of PS313 (original exit
reverse detection).
4 - 28
JAM CODE LIST
Jam Countermeasure
EDH-2 J63-6 When a small-size one-sided RADF stops immedi- Open the jam
original is ejected, PS314 (original ately. access cover and
exit 2) is not turned OFF within If there is a paper in remove jammed
the specified time. or after the copying paper.
J63-7 When a small-size two-sided process, the machine
original is ejected, PS314 (original stops after completion
exit 2) is not turned OFF within of copied paper
the specified time. ejection.
the specified time after turning ON
Operating
of PS308 (original conveyance

detection).
detection) is not turned ON.
RADF

detection) is not turned OFF.

detection) is not turned OFF.
J65-1 PS306 (original registration

Stationary
J65-4 PS309 (original reversal detec-

tion) is ON during idling.
J65-8 PS307 (original exit 1) is ON
during idling.
J65-10 PS313 (original exit reverse
4 - 29
JAM CODE LIST
Jam Countermeasure
EDH-2 J65-20 PS314(original exit 2) is ON RADF stops immedi- Open the movable
during idling. ately. cover and remove
If there is a paper in jammed paper.
Stationary
RADF
J65-40 PS304(reverse jam detection) is or after the copying

ON during idling. process, the machine
stops after completion
of paper ejection.
FN-104/ J72-16 PS4(FIN entrance passage) is not FNS/main body stops Remove jammed
FN-4 turned ON within the specific time immediately. paper from FNS/
after the main body paper exit PS main body if present.
is turned ON.
J72-17 PS10(paper exit 2) is not turned
ON within the specific time after
PS4(FIN entrance passage) is
turned ON.
J72-18 PS5(stacker conveyance passage)
is not turned ON within the specific
time after PS4(FIN entrance
passage) is turned ON (in staple
mode).
is not turned OFF within the specific
time after it turns ON.
J72-20 PS6(paper exit 1) is not turned ON

within the specific time after the
paper exit operation is started (in
Operating
staple mode).
FNS

OFF within the specific time after it
turns ON after the paper exit
operation is started (in staple
mode).
J72-22 PS1(subtray paper exit) is not
turned ON within the specific time
after PS4(FIN entrance passage)
is turned ON (in subtray paper
exit).
J72-23 PS1(subtray paper exit) is not
turned OFF within the specific time
after it turns ON (in subtray paper
exit).
J72-24 PS28(folding passage/1) is not
after the staple is completed.
J72-25 PS25(folding paper exit) is not
after folding is completed.
4 - 30
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Classification code Cause Machine response Countermeasure
FN-104/ J72-26 PS25(folding paper exit) is not FNS/main body stops Remove jammed
FN-4 turned OFF within the specific immediately. paper from FNS/
time after it turns ON. main body if present.
J72-27 PS20(stacker no paper detection)
is OFF when the staple is started.
is not turned OFF within the specific
time after it turns ON.
OFF within the specific time after
it turns ON.
OFF within the specific time after
it turns ON.
Cover J72-35 PS201(sheet passage) is not
Inserter A turned ON within the specific time
after MC201(paper feed) is turned
ON.
is not turned ON within the specific
time after PS201(sheet passage)
is turned ON.
Operating

FNS
ON within the specific time after

PS201(sheet passage) is turned
ON.
FN-104/ J72-81 PS30(clincher HP/R) and PS31
FN-4 (stapler HP/R) are not turned ON
within the specific time after M21
(clincher R) and M22(stapler R)
go ON.
J72-82 PS33(clincher HP/F) and PS34
(stapler HP/F) are not turned ON
within the specific time after M23
(clincher F) and M24(stapler F) go
ON.
J72-83 PS30(clincher HP/R), PS33
(clincher HP/F), PS31(stapler HP/
R) and PS34(stapler HP/F) are
not turned ON within the specific
time after M21(clincher R),
M23(clincher/ F), M22(stapler R)
and M24(stapler/ F) go ON.
J72-90 FNS does not operate within the
specific time after it receives start-
operation signal from the main
body.
4 - 31
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Classification code Cause Machine response Countermeasure
FN-104/ J73-1 PS6(paper exit 1) is ON during FNS/main body stops Remove jammed
FN-4 idling. immediately. paper from FNS/
J73-2 PS5(stacker conveyance passage) main body if present.
J73-3 PS26(folding passage/2) is ON
during idling.
J73-4 PS13(entrance paper detection)
J73-5 PS4(FIN entrance passage) is
Stationary
ON during idling.
FNS
J73-6 PS10(paper exit 2) is ON during

idling.
J73-7 PS1(subtray paper exit) is ON
during idling.
J73-9 PS28(folding passage/1) is ON
during idling.
J73-10 PS25(folding paper exit) is ON
during idling.
Cover J73-14 PS201(sheet passage) is ON
Inserter A during idling.
4 - 32
ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST

Warning Operation in case of Estimated abnormal
Classification code Causes warning occurrence parts
Drive F13-01 A trouble detection signal is detected The machine stops M4 (paper feed)
two consecutive times (the first signal immediately and RL1 PRCB (printer
is ignored) in 4 seconds after turning (main) is turned OFF. control board)
ON of M4 (paper feed).
F13-02 A trouble detection signal is detected M101 (LT paper
two consecutive times (the first signal feed)
is ignored) in 2 seconds after turning LTDB (LT drive
ON of M101 (LT paper feed). board)
F13-03 An M6 trouble detection signal (blown If there is a paper in M6 (loop roller )

fuse) is detected when M6 (loop copying process DCDB (DC drive
roller) is ON. when this trouble oc- board)
curs, the machine
stops after comple-
tion of copied paper
ejection. RL1 (main)
is turned OFF.
Main body
Tray 1 F18-10 An M19 trouble detection signal is The machine stops M19 (up drive 1)
detected when M19 (up drive 1) is immediately and RL1 DCDB (DC drive
ON. (main) is turned OFF. board)
F18-11 PS20 (tray upper limit 1) which has Error code is not dis- PRCB (printer
been OFF is not turned ON within 10 played on operation control board)
seconds of upward movement panel. It is displayed PS20 (tray upper
started by turning ON of M19 (up only on data collec- limit 1)

drive 1). At this time, a trouble tion, list output. Mes-
detection signal (24V off) is detected. sage "Please load
F18-12 PS20 (tray upper limit 1) which has paper in tray 1." is
been OFF is not turned ON within 10 displayed on opera-
seconds of upward movement started tion panel because
by turning ON of M19 (up drive 1). At tray has not com-
this time, a trouble detection signal pleted ascending.
(blown fuse) is detected.
F18-13 PS20 (tray upper limit 1) which has
been OFF is not turned ON within 10
seconds of upward movement
started by turning ON of M19 (up
drive 1). At this time, no trouble
detection signal is detected.
4 - 33
ERROR CODE LIST

Tray 2 F18-20 When M20 (up drive 2) is ON, an The machine stops M20 (up drive 2)
M20 error detection signal is immediately and RL1 DCDB (DC drive
detected. (main) is turned OFF. board)
PRCB (printer
F18-21 PS21 (tray upper limit 2) which has Error code is not dis- control board)
been OFF is not turned ON within played on operation PS21 (tray upper
10 seconds of upward movement panel. It is displayed limit 2)
started by turning ON of M20 (up only on data collec-
F18-22 PS21 (tray upper limit 2) which has paper in tray 2." is dis-
been OFF is not turned ON within played on operation
10 seconds of upward movement panel because tray
started by turning ON of M20 (up has not completed
drive 2). At this time, a trouble ascending.
detection signal (blown fuse) is
detected.
F18-23 PS21 (tray upper limit 2) which has
Main body
been OFF is not turned ON within

10 seconds of upward movement
started by turning ON of M20 (up
drive 2). At this time, no trouble
Tray 3 F18-30 When M21 (up drive 3) is ON, an The machine stops M21 (up drive 3)
M21 trouble detection signal is immediately and RL1 DCDB (DC drive
detected. (main) is turned OFF. board)
F18-31 PS22 (tray upper limit 3) which has Error code is not dis- PRCB (printer
been OFF is not turned ON within played on operation control board)
10 seconds of upward movement panel. It is displayed PS22 (tray upper
started by turning ON of M21 (up only on data collec- limit 3)
F18-32 PS22 (tray upper limit 3) which has paper in tray 3" is dis-
been OFF is not turned ON within 10 played on operation
seconds of upward movement started panel because tray
by turning ON of M21 (up drive 3). At has not completed
this time, a trouble detection signal ascending.
4 - 34
ERROR CODE LIST

Tray 3 F18-33 PS22 (tray upper limit 3) which has Error code is not dis- M21 (up drive 3)
been OFF is not turned ON within 10 played on operation DCDB (DC drive
seconds of upward movement started panel. It is displayed board)
by turning ON of M21 (up drive 3). only on data collec- PRCB (printer
At this time, no trouble detection tion, list output. Mes- control board)
Main body
signal is detected. sage "Please load PS22 (tray upper

paper in tray 3" is dis- limit detection)
played on operation
panel because tray
has not completed
ascending.
C-305 F18-40 When M100 (LT up/down drive) is The machine stops M100 (LT up/down
ON, an M100 trouble detection signal immediately and RL1 drive)
has been continuously detected for (main) is turned OFF. LTDB (LT drive
one second. board)
F18-41 PS109 (LT tray upper limit detection) Error code is not dis- PS109 (LT tray
or PS101 (LT tray lower limit played on operation upper limit
detection) which has been OFF is not panel. It is displayed detection)
turned ON within 35 seconds of only on data collec-
upward or downward movement tion, list output. Mes-
started by turning ON of M100 (LT sage "Please load
up/down drive). At this time, a trouble paper in tray 4" is dis-
detection signal (24V off) is detected. played on operation

F18-42 PS109 (LT tray upper limit detection) panel because tray
or PS101 (LT tray lower limit has not completed
LCT
detection) which has been OFF is not ascending.

turned ON within 35 seconds of
upward or downward movement
started by turning ON of M100 (LT
up/down drive). At this time, a trouble
detected.
F18-43 PS109 (LT tray upper limit detection)
or PS101 (LT tray lower limit
detection) which has been OFF is not
turned ON within 35 seconds of
upward or downward movement
started by turning ON of M100 (LT
up/down drive). At this time, no
trouble detection signal is detected.
4 - 35
ERROR CODE LIST

By-pass tray F18-51 PS23 (tray upper limit (by-pass)) or Operation panel dis- M22 (up/down (by-
PS43 (tray lower limit (by-pass)) plays jam error (J10- pass))
which has been OFF is not turned 01). It is reset by pa- DCDB (DC drive
ON within 10 seconds of upward or per re-load. Error board)
downward movement started by code is displayed on PRCB (printer
turning ON of M22 (up/down (by- data collection, list control board)
pass)). At this time, a trouble output. PS43 (tray lower
detection signal (24V off) is detected. limit (by-pass))
F18-52 PS23 (tray upper limit (by-pass)) or
PS43 (tray lower limit (by-pass))
which has been OFF is not turned
Main body
ON within 10 seconds of upward or

downward movement started by
turning ON of M22 (up/down (by-
pass)). At this time, a trouble
detected.
F18-53 PS23 (tray upper limit (by-pass)) or
PS43 (tray lower limit (by-pass))
which has been OFF is not turned
ON within 10 seconds of upward or
downward movement started by
turning ON of M22 (up/down (by-
pass)). At this time, no trouble
4 - 36
ERROR CODE LIST

Classificationcode Causes warning occurrence parts
Wire F21-01 • When SW1 (main switch) has been The machine stops M23 (charger
cleaning ON and PS41 (charging wire immediately and RL1 cleaning)
abnormality cleaning pad HP) has been OFF, (main) is turned OFF. DCDB (DC drive
PS41 is not turned ON within 35 board)
seconds of home position search PRCB (printer
operation (forward) started by turning control board)
ON of M23 (charger cleaning). At this PS41 (charging
time, a trouble detection signal wire cleaning pad
(blown fuse) is not detected. HP)
• PS41 is not turned OFF within 15
seconds after start of reversal
operation (return). At this time, a
trouble detection signal (blown fuse)
is not detected.
• PS42 (charging wire cleaning pad
limit) is not turned ON within 35
seconds after detection of turning
OFF of PS41 (charging wire cleaning
Main body
pad HP) at the star t of reversal

operation (return), or PS41 is not
turned ON within 35 seconds after
turning ON of PS42. At this time, a
is not detected.

F21-02 • When SW1 (main switch) has been
ON and PS41 (charging wire
cleaning pad HP) has been OFF,
PS41 is not turned ON within 35
seconds of home position search
operation (forward) started by turning
ON of M23 (charger cleaning). At this
time, a trouble detection signal
is detected.
4 - 37
ERROR CODE LIST

Wire F21-02 • PS42 (charging wire cleaning pad The machine stops M23 (charger
cleaning limit) is not turned ON within 35 immediately and RL1 cleaning)
abnormality seconds after detection of turning (main) is turned OFF. DCDB (DC drive
OFF of PS41 (charging wire cleaning board)
pad HP) at the start of reversal PRCB (printer
operation (return), or PS41 is not conrol board)
turned ON within 35 seconds after PS41 (charging
turning ON of PS42. At this time, a wire cleaning pad
trouble detection signal (blown fuse) HP)
is detected.
F21-03 A motor lock signal is detected during M23 (charger
the cleaning pad moving from the cleaning)
PS42 (charging wire cleaning pad DCDB (DC drive
limit) side to the PS41 (charging wire board)
cleaning pad HP) side. After retry, PRCB (printer
the fifth motor lock signal is detected. control board)
PS41 (charging
wire cleaning pad
HP)
PS42 (charging
wire cleaning pad
limit)
F21-04 • When SW1 (main switch) has been M18 (transfer/sepa-
Main body
ON and PS11 (transfer/separation ration cleaning)

wire cleaning pad HP) has been OFF, ADUSDB (ADU

PS11 is not turned ON within 40 stand drive board)
seconds of home position search PS11 (transfer/
operation (return) started by turning separation wire
ON of M18 (transfer/separation cleaning pad HP)
cleaning). At this time, a trouble
detection signal (blown fuse) is not
detected.
seconds after star t of reversal
is not detected.
• PS12 (transfer/separation wire
cleaning pad limit) is not turned ON
within 40 seconds after detection of
turning OFF of PS11 (transfer/
separation wire cleaning pad HP) at
the star t of reversal operation
(return), or PS11 is not turned ON
within 40 seconds after turning ON
of PS12. At this time, a trouble
detection signal (blown fuse) is not
detected.
4 - 38
ERROR CODE LIST

Wire F21-05 • When SW1 (main switch) has been The machine stops M18 (transfer/sepa-
cleaning ON and PS11 (transfer/separation immediately and ration cleaning)
abnormality wire cleaning pad HP) has been OFF, RL1 (main) is turned ADUSDB (ADU
PS11 is not turned ON within 40 OFF. stand drive board)
seconds of home position search PS11 (transfer/
operation (return) started by turning separation wire
ON of M18 (transfer/separation cleaning pad HP)
cleaning). At this time, a trouble
detected.
is detected.
• PS12 (transfer/separation wire
cleaning pad limit) is not turned ON
within 40 seconds after detection of
turning OFF of PS11 (transfer/
separation wire cleaning pad HP) at
the star t of reversal operation
(return), or PS11 is not turned ON
Main body
within 40 seconds after turning ON

of PS12. At this time, a trouble

detected. M18 (transfer/sepa-
F21-06 A motor lock signal is detected during ration cleaning)
movement from the PS12 (transfer/ ADUSDB (ADU
separation wire cleaning pad limit) stand drive board)
side to the PS11 (transfer/separation PS11 (transfer/
wire cleaning pad HP) side. After separation wire
retry, the fifth motor lock signal is cleaning pad HP)
detected. PS12 (transfer/
separation wire
cleaning pad limit)
Motor F23-01 A trouble detection signal is detected M15 (toner supply 2)

abnormality two consecutive times (the first signal PRCB (printer
is ignored) in 7 seconds after turning control board)
ON of M15 (toner supply 2).
F23-02 Because a trouble detection signal M3 (developing)
had been detected one second after PRCB (printer
turning ON of M3 (developing), M3 control board)
was turned OFF for 0.5 second and
ON again. One second later, a
trouble detection signal was detected
again.
4 - 39
ERROR CODE LIST

Motor F23-03 An M14 (cleaning blade) trouble The machine stops M14 (cleaning
abnormality detection signal (excessive current) immediately and RL1 blade)
is detected. (main) is turned OFF. DCDB (DC drive
F23-04 The drum READY1 signal (ready) is board)
not detected within 4 seconds after PRCB (printer
turning ON of M2 (drum drive motor), control board)
or the drum READY1 signal (not PS30 (blade 1)
ready) is not detected within 4 PS31 (blade 2)
seconds after turning OFF of M2. At
this time, a trouble detection signal
(24V off) is detected.
F23-05 The drum READY1 signal (ready) is
not detected within 4 seconds after
turning ON of M2 (drum), or the drum
READY1 signal (not ready) is not
detected within 4 seconds after
turning OFF of M2. At this time, an
M14 (cleaning blade) trouble
detected.
F23-06 The drum READY1 signal (ready) is
Main body
turning ON of M2 (drum), or the drum

READY1 signal (not ready) is not
detected within 4 seconds after

turning OFF of M2. At this time, no
trouble detection signal is detected.
F23-07 The blade READY signal (ready) is
turning ON of the blade replacement
signal, or the blade READY signal
(not ready) is not detected within
5 seconds after turning OFF of
the blade replacement signal. At
this time, a trouble detection signal
(24V off) is detected.
F23-08 The blade READY signal (ready) is
turning ON of the blade replacement
signal, or the blade READY signal
(not ready) is not detected within 5
seconds after turning OFF of the
blade replacement signal. At this
time, an M14 (cleaning blade) trouble
detected.
4 - 40
ERROR CODE LIST

Motor F23-09 The blade READY signal (ready) is The machine stops M14 (cleaning
abnormality not detected within 5 seconds after immediately and RL1 blade)
turning ON of the blade replacement (main) is turned OFF. DCDB (DC drive
signal, or the blade READY signal (not board)
ready) is not detected within 5 PRCB (printer
seconds after turning OFF of the control board)
cleaning blade replacement signal. At PS30 (blade 1)
this time, no trouble detection signal PS31 (blade 2)
is detected.
F23-10 The drum READY2 signal (ready) is M2 (drum)
not detected within 5 seconds after PRCB (printer
turning ON of M2 (drum). control board)
F23-11 A trouble detection signal (blown fuse) M11 (toner supply 1)
is detected when M11 (toner supply DCDB (DC drive
1) is turned ON. board)
F24-01 One minute after starting control over TH5 (drum temper-
the HTR1 (drum heater) at depression ature)
of SW1 (main switch), the change in DTSB (drum temper-
TH5 (drum temperature) temperature ature sensor
is 2°C or less and the drum board)
temperature is 10°C or lower. PRCB (printer
Main body
F24-02 One minute after starting control over control board)

the HTR1 (drum heater) at depression HTR1 (drum heater)
of SW1 (main switch), the change in
TH5 (drum temperature) temperature
is 2°C or less and the drum
temperature is 10°C or higher. One
minute after this, the drum
temperature is 60°C or higher.
F24-04 Drum heater short-circuit HTR1 (drum heater)

High voltage F28-01 The charging ON/OFF operation has If there is a paper in HV1 (high voltage
power supply been performed five consecutive copying process unit1)
abnormality times since the charging trouble when this jam occurs,
detection signal was detected at start the machine stops
of charging. after completion of
F28-02 The toner transfer ON/OFF operation copied paper HV2 (high voltage
has been performed five consecutive ejection. RL1 (main) unit 2)
times since the transfer trouble is turned OFF.
detection signal was detected at start
of toner transfer.
F28-03 The toner separation ON/OFF
operation has been performed five
consecutive times since the
separation trouble detection signal
was detected at star t of toner
separation.
4 - 41
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
code Causes warning occurrence parts
High voltage F28-04 An HV2 (high voltage unit 2) trouble The machine stops HV2 (high voltage
power detection signal (blown 24V fuse) is immediately and RL1 unit 2)
supply detected. (main) is turned OFF.
abnormality
Process F29-01 The Dmax sensor is dirty during The main body stops TCSB (toner
abnormality Dmax correction. If this trouble is immediately and RL1 control sensor
detected ten successive times, the (main) is turned OFF. board)
corresponding ser vice code is PRCB (printer
displayed. control board)
F29-02 The rotation speed of the developing Error code is not dis-
sleeve reached the maximum value played on operation
during Dmax correction. panel. It is displayed
only on data collec-
F29-03 The control patch is not output during tion, list output. Main
Dmax correction. body control is per-
(No output from the Dmax sensor) formed using previ-
ous data.
F29-04 The γ sensor is dir ty during γ The main body stops
correction. If E29-4 or E29-7 is immediately and RL1
detected ten successive times, the (main) is turned OFF.
corresponding error code is displayed.
F29-05 The control patch is not output Error code is not dis-
during γ correction. played on operation
Main body
(No output from the sensor) panel. It is displayed


F29-06 A regression error occurred when tion, list output. Main
the γ curve was obtained for γ body control is per-
correction. formed using previ-
ous data.
F29-07 The γ sensor is dirty during dot dia- The main body stops
meter correction. If E29-4 or E29-7 immediately and RL1
is detected ten successive times, (main) is turned OFF.
the corresponding error code is dis-
played.
F29-08 Dot diameter correction ended with Error code is not dis-
an abnormal value. played on operation
panel. It is displayed
tion, list output. Main
body control is per-
formed using previ-
ous data.
F29-09 A drum surface potential of over The main body stops DPSB (drum
100V was detected 5 or more times immediately and RL1 potential sensor
when a 0V check was performed (main) is turn OFF. board)
by drum potential sensor. If this PRCB (printer
trouble is detected five successive control board)
times, the corresponding error code
is displayed.
4 - 42
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
Process F29-10 The control patch is not output be- The main body stops DPSB (drum
abnormality cause Vl exceeds 350V during drum immediately and RL1 potential sensor
potential correction. (main) is turned OFF. board)
Drum potential correction is not PRCB (printer
completed if it is made 5 or more control board)
times. If this trouble is detected 5
successive times, the
corresponding error code
is displayed.
F29-11 Drum potential correction is not
completed if it is made 10 or more
times. If this trouble is detected 5
successive times, the
corresponding error code is
displayed.
F29-12 Automatic adjustment of the transfer Error code is not dis- HV1 (high voltage
current is not completed. played on operation unit 1)
F29-13 Automatic adjustment of the separa- panel. It is displayed HV2 (high voltage
tion (AC) current is not completed. only on data collec- unit 2)
tion, list output. Main PRCB (printer
F29-14 Automatic adjustment of the separa- body control is per- control board)
tion (DC) current is not completed. formed using previ- ADUSDB (ADU
ous data. stand drive board)
Main body
F29-15 Automatic adjustment of the develop-

ing bias (DC) current is not
completed.
Fan F32-01 The FM2 EM signal was abnormal 2 The machine stops ACDB (AC drive
abnormality seconds after tur ning FM2 immediately and RL1 board)
(developing suction) ON. (main) is turned OFF. FM2 (developing
Two seconds after turning FM2 OFF suction)
and ON again, the FM2 EM signal is
still abnormal and a trouble detection
signal (24V off) is detected.
F32-02 The FM2 EM signal was abnormal 2
seconds after tur ning FM2
(developing suction) ON.
Two seconds after turning FM2 OFF
signal (blown fuse) is detected.
seconds after tur ning FM2
(developing suction) ON.
Two seconds after turning FM2 OFF
signal (24V off/blown fuse) is not
detected.
4 - 43
ERROR CODE LIST

Fan F32-04 The FM1 EM signal was abnormal 2 The machine stops ADUSDB (ADU
abnormality seconds after turning ON of FM1 immediately and RL1 stand drive board)
(paper exit). Two seconds after (main) is turned OFF. FM1 (paper exit)
turning FM1 OFF and ON again, the
FM1 EM signal is still abnormal and
a trouble detection signal (24V off)
is detected.
seconds after turning ON of FM1
(paper exit). Two seconds after
a trouble detection signal (blown
fuse) is detected.
(paper exit). Two seconds after
a trouble detection signal (24V off/
blown fuse) is not detected.
F32-07 FM1 (paper exit) EM signal becomes Error code is not dis-
Main body
faulty after completion of printing. played on operation


tion, list output.
ADU stand F33-01 A trouble detection signal is detected The machine stops M12 (registration)
motor 2 consecutive times (the first signal immediately and RL1
abnormality is ignored) 4 seconds after turning (main) is turned OFF.
ON of M12 (registration motor).
F33-02 When M5 (paper reverse/exit) which If there is a paper in M5 (paper reverse/
has been OFF is turned ON, a trouble copying process exit)
detection signal (blown fuse) is when this jam occurs, ADUSDB (ADU
detected. the machine stops stand drive board)
F33-03 When M9 (transfer) which has been after completion of M9 (transfer)
OFF is turned ON, a trouble detection copied paper ADUSDB (ADU
signal (blown fuse) is detected. ejection. RL1 (main) stand drive board)
is turned OFF.
F33-04 When M10 (paper exit) which has M10 (paper exit)
been OFF is turned ON, a trouble ACDB (AC drive
detection signal (blown fuse) is board)
detected.
F33-05 When M16 (Web drive) which has M16 (Web drive)
been OFF is turned ON, a trouble ACDB (AC drive
detection signal (blown fuse/24 V off) board)
is detected.
4 - 44
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
ADU stand F33-06 When M16 (Web drive) which has If there is a paper in M16 (Web drive)
motor been OFF is tur ned ON, error copying process
abnormality detection signal (24V off) detected when this jam occurs,
blown fuse in normal condition. the machine stops
after completion of
copied paper ejec-
tion. RL1 (main) is
turned OFF.
Too high F34-01 TH1 (fixing temperature 1) has The machine stops PRCB (printer
fixing detected 210°C or more five immediately. RL1 control board)
temperature consecutive times at intervals of 1 (main) is turned OFF. ACDB (AC drive
abnormality second. board)
F34-02 TH3 (fixing temperature 3) has L2 (fixing heater
detected 230°C or more five lamp 1)
consecutive times at intervals of 1 L3 (fixing heater
second. lamp 2)
F34-03 Overheating (228°C or higher) was L4 (fixing heater
detected for TH1 (fixing temperature lamp 3)
1) and TH2 (fixing temperature 2) TH1 (fixing temper-
output voltage by the comparator ature 1)
circuit. TH2 (fixing temper-
Main body
F34-04 Overheating (228°C or higher) was ature 2)

detected for TH3 (fixing temperature TH3 (fixing temper-
3) and TH4 (fixing temperature 4) ature 3)

output voltage by the comparator TH4 (fixing temper-
circuit. ature 4)
Too low F35-01 TH1 (fixing temperature 1) does not
fixing detect 50°C or higher when 180
temperature seconds have passed since fixing ON
abnormality control started at depression of SW1
(main switch).
F35-02 TH3 (fixing temperature 3) does not
detect 50°C or higher when 180
seconds have passed since fixing ON
control started at depression of SW1
(main switch).
Fixing F36-01 TH1 (fixing temperature 1) has
sensor detected 200°C or higher 30 or more
abnormality consecutive times at intervals of 1
second.
F36-02 TH3 (fixing temperature 3) has
detected 220°C or higher 30 or more
consecutive times at intervals of 1
second.
4 - 45
ERROR CODE LIST

Fixing F36-03 Underheating (-6°C or less) was de- The machine stops PRCB (printer
sensor tected for TH1 (fixing temperature 1) immediately. RL1 control board)
abnormality output voltage by the comparator cir- (main) is turned OFF. ACDB (AC drive
cuit. board)
F36-04 Underheating (-6°C or less) was de- L2 (fixing heater
tected for TH3 (fixing temperature 3) lamp 1)
output voltage by the comparator cir- L3 (fixing heater
cuit. lamp 2)
F36-05 Underheating (-6°C or less) or over- L4 (fixing heater
heating (240.5°C or more) was de- lamp 3)
tected for TH2 (fixing temperature 2) TH1 (fixing temper-
output voltage by the comparator ature 1)
circuit. TH2 (fixing temper-
F36-06 Underheating (-6°C or less) or over- ature 2)
heating (240.5°C or more) was de- TH3 (fixing temper-
tected for TH4 (fixing temperature 4) ature 3)
output voltage by the comparator TH4 (fixing temper-
circuit. ature 4)
Main body
Scanner F41-01 PS5 (scanner HP) or PS7 (ADF SCDB (scanner

abnormality brake) is not turned ON within 0.5 drive board)
seconds after start of HP search M13 (scanner drive)
operation, or an M13 (scanner drive) PS7 (ADF brake)
trouble detection signal (24V off) is PS5 (scanner HP)
detected. PS6 (original HP)
F41-02 PS5 (scanner HP) or PS7 (ADF PS4 (scanner
brake) is not turned ON within 0.5 return)
seconds after start of HP search
operation, or an M13 (scanner drive)
is detected.
F41-03 PS5 (scanner HP) or PS7 (ADF
brake) is not turned ON within 0.5
seconds after start of HP search
operation, or an M13 (scanner drive)
trouble detection signal (24 V off/
4 - 46
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
Scanner F41-04 During HP search operation, PS5 The machine stops SCDB (scanner
abnormality (scanner HP) is not turned ON within immediately. RL1 drive board)
1 second after turning ON of PS7 (main) is turned OFF. M13 (scanner drive)
(ADF brake). An M13 (scanner drive) PS7 (ADF brake)
trouble detection signal (24V off) is PS5 (scanner HP)
detected. PS6 (original HP)
F41-05 During HP search operation, PS5 PS4 (scanner
(scanner HP) is not turned ON within return)
1 second after turning ON of PS7
(ADF brake). An M13 (scanner drive)
is detected.
F41-06 During HP search operation, PS5
(scanner HP) is not turned ON within
1 second after turning ON of PS7
(ADF brake). An M13 (scanner drive)
trouble detection signal (24V off/
F41-07 During scan-forward operation, PS4 PS6 (original HP)
Main body
(scanner return) is turned ON before PS4 (scanner

PS6 (original HP) is turned ON. return)
F41-08 During scan-forward operation, PS4

(scanner return) is not turned ON

within 0.13 second after turning OFF
of PS6 (original HP).
F41-09 After original scanning, PS7 (ADF PS7 (ADF brake)
brake) is turned ON before PS5 PS5 (scanner HP)
(scanner HP) is turned ON.
Write F41-10 The M17 lock signal is not detected PMDB (polygon
abnormality within 25 seconds after an attempt mirror drive board)
is made to change the M17 (polygon) PRCB (printer
speed. The trouble detection signal control board)
(24V off) is detected. M17 (polygon)
F41-11 The M17 (polygon) lock signal is not
detected within 25 seconds after an
attempt is made to change the M17
(polygon) speed. The trouble
detection signal (24V off) is not
detected.
4 - 47
ERROR CODE LIST

Fan F42-01 The FM7 EM signal was abnormal 2 The machine stops SCDB (scanner
abnormality seconds after turning ON of FM7 immediately. RL1 drive board)
(scanner cooling). Two seconds after (main) is turned OFF. FM7 (scanner
turning FM7 OFF and ON again, the cooling)
a trouble detection signal (24V off) is
detected.
(scanner cooling). Two seconds after
a trouble detection signal (blown
fuse) is detected.
(scanner cooling). Two seconds after
Main body
a trouble detection signal (24 V off/

F42-04 The FM5 EM signal was abnormal 2 DCDB (DC drive
seconds after turning ON of FM5/8 board)
(write section cooling 1/2). Two FM5 (write section
seconds after turning FM5 OFF and cooling 1)

ON again, the FM5 EM signal is still FM8 (write section
abnormal and a trouble detection cooling 2)
signal (24 V off) is detected.
seconds after turning ON of FM5/8
(write section cooling 1/2). Two
seconds after turning FM5 OFF and
ON again, the FM5 EM signal is still
abnormal and a trouble detection
signal (blown fuse) is detected.
seconds after turning ON of FM5/8
(write section cooling 1/2). Two
seconds after turning FM5 OFF and
ON again, the FM5 EM signal is still
signal (24 V off/blown fuse) is not
detected.
F42-07 At the start of copying, an FM5 (write
section cooling 1/2) trouble detection
signal is detected.
4 - 48
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
Image E46-01 During image write, APC cannot be If copy operation is Write section
control performed for sub-scanning beam being performed, the ICB (image control
abnormality correction. main body stops after board) power
The 12 VDC power for driving the paper ejection. connector
laser is not supplied. The laser does The RL1 (main) is
not turn ON due to defective MPC or turned OFF.
laser. ICB (image control
The index sensor cannot detect the board)
laser because the polygon mirror
does not rotate, the index sensor is
displaced, or the index sensor is
defective.
E46-02 Illegal address of FIFO for scanner. ICB (image control
During image read, image data board)
compression is not completed
normally.
E46-03 Illegal address of FIFO for printer. ICB (image control
During image write, image data board)
expansion is not completed normally.
The FIFO of the compression/
Main body
expansion chip caused an error

interrupt.
E46-05 During image write, the compressed ICB (image control
image data remains after completion board)

of the expansion process.
E46-06 Decompression error. ICB (image control
board)
E46-08 When APC is performed, the index Write section
sensor output does not change. Power connector of
ICB (image control
board)
E46-12 Compression of the read image and ICB (image control
expansion in the page memory are board)
not completed within the specified
time after negation of SVV.
E46-13 During image read, image data PRCB (printer
compression from the scanner to the control board)
memory is not completed within the ICB (image control
specified time. board)
Image data expansion from the DF-313
scanner to the page memory is not
completed within the specified time.
SVV is not detected within the
specified time.
4 - 49
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
Image E46-14 During image write, image data If copy operation is PRCB (printer
control expansion from the memory to the being performed, the control board)
abnormality printer is not completed within the main body stops after ICB (image control
specified time. paper ejection. board)
Image data output from the page The RL1 (main) is
memor y to the printer is not turned OFF.
completed within the specified time.
PVV is not detected within the
specified time.
E46-15 During image write, improper ICB (image control
processing was performed. For board)
example, the expansion device was ICB program
accessed although there was no
resource.
E46-16 During image read, improper ICB (image control
processing was performed. For board)
example, the expansion device was ICB program
accessed although there was no
resource.
E46-17 During image processing, a filter ICB (image control
coefficient could not be generated board)
properly. ICB program
E46-19 During access to the memory device, ICB (image control
Main body
a software error was detected. board)

ICB program
E46-21 Expansion from the memory to the PRCB (printer
page memory is not completed within control board)
the specified time. ICB program
Compression from the page memory
to the memory is not completed
Compressed data transfer between
memories is not completed within the
specified time.
E46-23 During image read, SVV is not turned ICB (Image Control
OFF within the specified time and Board)
therefore preparation for next page
scanning cannot be started.
E46-24 Shading correction error (GA error) ICB (Image
Control Board)
ICB program
E46-25 AOC/AGC error ADB (A/D
- The light blocking cover and lens cover conversion board)
are removed from the read section. L1 (exposure
- The A/D conversion board connector lamp)
is disconnected.
- The exposure lamp intensity is excessive.
- The exposure lamp does not light.
4 - 50
ERROR CODE LIST

Image E46-26 Correction data saved on a resolution Error code is not dis- ICB (image control
control basis is not found. played on operation board)
abnormality panel. It is displayed
E46-27 The density correction γ curve can- only on data collec- ICB (image control
not be generated properly. tion, list output. board)
E46-29 Calibration start error If copy operation is ICB (image control
being performed, the board)
main body stops after ICB program
E46-30 Calibration end error paper ejection. ICB (image control
The RL1 (main) is board)
turned OFF. ICB program
E46-31 An attempt was made to carry out ICB (image control
APC initial sampling before board)
completion of MPC. ICB program
E46-32 An attempt was made to perform ICB (image control
MPC during APC. board)
ICB program
E46-33 An attempt was made to make sub- ICB (image control
scan beam correction before board)
completion of APC or MPC. ICB program
E46-34 An attempt was made to make sub- ICB (image control
scan beam interval correction although board)
Main body
the image write clock was abnormal. ICB program

E46-40 Ribbon cable for hard drive is Error code is dis- Re-connect ribbon

disconnected even though the hard played on operation cable
drive is enabled. panel
E46-60 Adjustment of the sub-scan beam Error code is not dis- Write section
interval failed for the following reason: played on operation
- Defective index sensor panel. It is displayed
- M24 (laser correction) driving failure only on data collec-
- Abnormal 12 VDC power supply tion, list output.
- M17 (polygon) driving failure
E46-61 Scanning started before completion DFCB (RADF control
of original skew correction. (Skew board)
correction was not in time.) PS311(original mis-
centering detection 1)
PS312(original mis-
centering detection 2)
E46-62 Printing started before correction of PS1(papermis-centering)

paper mis-centering. (Mis-centering
correction was not in time.)
E46-63 AGC was retried because of reduction L1(exposure lamp)
in exposure lamp intensity, but no
error occurred.
E46-64 The PWM γ curve could not be TCSB(toner control
generated properly. sensor board)
4 - 51
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
Image E46-80 The message queue was insufficient If copy operation is ICB (image control
control or destroyed. being performed, the board)
abnormality E46-81 The parameter value is too large. main body stops after
paper ejection.
E46-82 The ID of the message queue source The RL1 (main) is
task is undefined. turned OFF.
E46-83 The message reception event is
undefined.
E46-90 The access to the memory is illegal. ICB (image control board)
DIMM contact failure
E46-91 The header read address is illegal. ICB (image control
board)
Communi- E50-01 Main unit drive serial input error 1. The machine stops PRCB (printer
cation Serial data is not received from the immediately. RL1 control board)
abnormality main unit drive section within 0.5 (main) is turned OFF.
seconds after reception of power-on
ACK.
E50-02 Main unit drive serial input error 2.
Serial data is not received from the
main unit drive section within 0.5
ACK.
Main body


ACK.
ACK.
E50-05 Drive board communication reception PRCB (printer
error detection fault. control board)
A reception error occurred during Drive boards
reception of drive board serial data,
or a data checksum error or ID
information error occurred four
consecutive times although a resent
request had been issued three times.
E50-10 Image processing board PRCB (printer
communication break error. control board)
Initial data is not received from ICB ICB (image control
(image control board) within 10 board)
seconds after power-on.
E50-11 Image control board communication ICB (image control
serial reception error detection fault. board)
4 - 52
ERROR CODE LIST

Fan F52-01 The FM3 EM signal and FM4 EM The machine stops ACDB (AC drive
abnormality signal were abnormal 2 seconds after immediately. RL1 board)
tur ning ON of FM3 (main body (main) is turned OFF. FM3 (main body
cooling 1) and FM4 (main body cooling 1)
cooling 2). Two seconds after turning FM4 (main body
FM3 and FM4 OFF and ON again, cooling 2)
the FM3 EM signal and FM4 EM
signal are still abnormal and a trouble
detection signal (24 V off) is detected.
F52-02 The FM3 EM signal and FM4 EM
signal were abnormal 2 seconds after
tur ning ON of FM3 (main body
cooling 1) and FM4 (main body
cooling 2). Two seconds after turning
FM3 and FM4 OFF and ON again,
the FM3 EM signal and FM4 EM
signal are still abnormal and a trouble
detection signal (24 V off) is not
detected.
F52-03 The FM3 EM signal was abnormal 2 ACDB (AC drive
seconds after turning ON of FM3 board)
(main body cooling 1). Two seconds FM3 (main body
Main body
after turning FM3 OFF and ON again, cooling 1)

the FM3 EM signal is still abnormal

and a trouble detection signal (blown
fuse) is detected.
(main body cooling 1). Two seconds
after turning FM3 OFF and ON again,
fuse) is not detected.
F52-05 The FM4 EM signal was abnormal 2 ACDB (AC drive
seconds after turning ON of FM4 board)
(main body cooling 2). Two seconds FM4 (main body
after turning FM4 OFF and ON again, cooling 2)
fuse) is detected.
after turning FM4 OFF and ON again,
fuse) is not detected.
4 - 53
ERROR CODE LIST

Fan F52-07 The FM6 EM signal was abnormal 2 The machine stops ACDB (AC drive
abnormality seconds after turning ON of FM6 immediately. RL1 board)
(main body cooling 3). Two seconds (main) is turned OFF. FM6 (main body
after turning FM6 OFF and ON cooling 3)
again, the FM6 EM signal is still
after turning FM6 OFF and ON
signal (blown fuse) is not detected.
after turning FM6 OFF and ON
signal (24V off/blown fuse) is not detected.
F52-10 At the start of copying, an FM3 (main ACDB (AC drive
body cooling 1) or FM4 (main body board)
Main body
cooling 2) trouble detection signal is FM3 (main body

detected. cooling 1)
FM4 (main body
cooling 2)
F52-11 At the start of copying, an FM6 (main ACDB (AC drive
body cooling 3) trouble detection board)
signal is detected. FM6 (main body
cooling 3)
Motor F53-01 A trouble detection signal has been M1 (main)
abnormality detected twice (one signal is ignored) 3
seconds after turning ON of M1 (main).
Counter F53-02 When C (T) (total counter) which has Error code is not dis- ACDB (AC drive
abnormality been OFF is turned ON, a trouble played on operation board)
detection signal (blown fuse/24 V off) panel. It is displayed C (T) (total counter)
is detected. only on data collec-
F53-03 When C (T) (total counter) which has tion, list output. How-
been OFF is turned ON, a trouble ever, the counter
detection signal (blown fuse) is does not function.
detected. A trouble detection signal
(24 V off) is not detected.
F53-04 When C (K) (key counter) which has ACDB (AC drive
been OFF is turned ON, a trouble board)
detection signal (blown fuse/24 V off) C (K) (key counter)
is detected.
4 - 54
ERROR CODE LIST

Counter F53-05 When C (K) (key counter) which has Error code is not dis- ACDB (AC drive
abnormality been OFF is turned ON, a trouble played on operation board)
detection signal (blown fuse) is panel. It is displayed C (K) (key counter)
detected. A trouble detection signal only on data collection,
(24V off) is not detected. list output. However,
the counter does not
function.
Power F53-06 During serial initial communication, a 12 The machine stops PRCB (printer
supply V blow fuse signal (AC drive) is detected. immediately. RL1 control board)
abnormality F53-07 During serial initial communication, a 5 (main) is turned OFF.
V blow fuse signal (AC drive) is detected.
F53-08 A 12V trouble detection signal is
detected on PRCB (printer control
board).
F53-09 An excessive AC voltage error Error code is not dis- Abnormal voltage
signal is detected. played on operation input
only on data collection,
list output.
F53-10 During serial initial communication, a 5 The machine stops PRCB (printer
V blow fuse signal (DC drive) is detected. immediately. RL1 control board)
F53-11 A trouble detection signal (solenoid/ (main) is turned OFF. Solenoids
Main body
blown motor fuse) is detected at the Motors

time of start. A trouble detection

F53-12 A trouble detection signal (solenoid/
blown motor fuse) is detected at the
signal (24V off) is not detected.
Operation E56-2 Communication between the ICB Operation panel does ICB (image control
panel (image control board) and OB1 not display normally. board)
abnormality (operation board 1) does not start OB1 (operation
within 30 seconds after SW1 (main) board 1)
is turned ON.
F56-11 When SW1 (main switch) was turned O1 program
ON, area which had not been written
by ISW was detected in the operation
section control program (O1).
4 - 55
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
EDH-2 E60-01 A resend request was received after If copy operation is ICB (image control
abnormality the main unit had sent data in being performed, the board)
response to the data resend request main body stops after DFCB (RADF
from EDH-2. paper ejection. control board)
The RL1 (main) is C o m m u n i c a t i o n
turned OFF. cable
E60-02 A checksum error or SRGA reception
error was detected when data was
received in response to the data
resend request which had been sent
at detection of a checksum error or
SRGA reception error (during
reception in the serial communication
mode).
E60-03 No response to initial communication
request from main body to RADF for
5 seconds after SW1 (main switch)
is turned ON.
F60-11 When SW1 (main switch) was turned DFCB (RADF
ON, an area which had not been control board)
RADF
written by ISW was detected in the RADF program

RADF control program.
F67-01 PS306 (original registration If there is a paper in PS306 (original
detection) fault. copying process registration
when this jam occurs, detection)

F67-02 PS308 (original conveyance the machine stops PS308 (original
detection) fault. after completion of conveyance
copied paper ejec- detection)
F67-03 PS309 (original reversal detection) tion. RL1 (main) is PS309 (original
fault. turned OFF. reversal detection)
F67-04 Non-volatile memory fault. DFCB (RADF
control board)
F67-05 FM301 (ADF fan) fault. FM301 (ADF fan)
F67-06 PS304 (reverse jam detection) fault. PS304 (reverse

jam detection)
F67-07 PS313 (original exit reverse PS313 (original
detection) fault. exit reverse
detection)
F67-08 M303 (tray up/dpwn drive) fault. M303 (tray up/down
drive)
4 - 56
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
FN-104/FN-4 E70-1 Communication error. The main body and FNS CB (FNS control
abnormality FNS are stopped board)
immediately. RL1 Connector
E70-2 Start response error. (main) is tur ned FNS CB (FNS control
OFF. board)
Connector
F77-1 The shift unit does not reach the shift FNS CB (FNS control
position or home position within the board)
specified time. M2 (roller shift)
PS18 (roller shift HP)
F77-2 PS2(tray upper limit) or PS7 FNS CB (FNS control
(staple paper exit upper limit) does board)
not go ON within the specified time M3 (tray up-down)
after the start of M3(tray up-down) PS2 (tray upper limit)
operation. PS7 (staple paper
exit upper limit)
F77-3 PS8 (alignment plate/upper HP) FNS CB (FNS control
does not go OFF within the specified board)
time after the start of M5 (alignment RB (relay board)
plate/upper) operation, or does not M5 (alignment plate/
turn ON after OFF. upper)
PS8 (alignment plate/
upper HP)
F77-4 M7(paper exit roller) does not reach the FNS CB (FNS control
FNS

prescribed speed within the specified board)
time after the start of its operation.
F77-5 Opening/closing operation is not FNS CB (FNS control
completed within the spe-cified time board)
after the star t of M8(paper exit M8 (paper exit
opening) operation. (PS12(paper exit opening)
opening) does not go ON or OFF.) PS12 (paper exit
opening)
F77-6 PS11(stapler movement HP) does FNS CB (FNS control
not go OFF after the star t of board)
M11(stapler movement) operation. RB (relay board)
Or it does not go ON after OFF. M11 (stapler
movement)
PS11 (stapler
movement HP)
F77-7 M4 (stapler rotation) abnormality. FNS CB (FNS control
board)
RB (relay board)
M4 (stapler rotation)
F77-8 Stapler/R rotation abnormality. FNS CB (FNS control
board)
RB (relay board)
PS14 (stapler
rotation HP)
4 - 57
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
FN-104/FN-4 F77-11 PS33(clincher HP/F) and PS34(stapler The main body and FNS CB (FNS control
abnormality HP/F) do not go ON within the specified FNS are stopped board)
time after the start of M23(clincher/F) immediately. RL1 RB (relay board)
and M24(stapler/F) operation. (main) is turned M23 (clincher/F)
OFF. M24 (stapler/F)
PS33 (clincher HP/F)
PS34 (stapler HP/F)
F77-12 PS30(clincher HP/F) and PS31(stapler FNS CB (FNS control
HP/F) do not go ON within the specified board)
time after the start of M21(clincher R) RB(relay board)
and M22(stapler R) operation. M21(clincher/R)
M22(stapler/R)
PS30(clincher HP/R)
PS31(stapler HP/R)
F77-15 M1(FNS conveyance) does not reach FNS CB (FNS control
the prescribed speed within the board)
specified time after the start of its M1(FNS conveyance)
operation.
F77-21 PS23(stapling and folding stopper HP) FNS CB (FNS control
does not go ON within the specified board)
time after M14(stapling and folding RB (relay board)
stopper) star ts operation of HP M14 (stapling and
detection. folding stopper)
FNS
PS23 (stapling and

folding stopper HP)

F77-22 PS24(alignment plate/lower HP) does FNS CB (FNS control
not go ON within the specified time board)
after M15(alignment plate/lower) RB (relay board)
starts operation of HP detection. M15 (alignment
plate/lower)
PS24 (alignment
plate/lower HP)
F77-23 PS21(stapling and folding stopper FNS CB (FNS control
release HP) does not go ON within board)
the specified time after M17(stapling RB (relay board)
and folding stopper release) starts M17 (stapling and
operation of HP detection. folding stopper
release)
PS21 (stapling and
folding stopper
release HP)
F77-24 PS27(folding stopper HP) does not go FNS CB (FNS control
ON within the specified time after board)
M18(folding stopper) starts operation M18 (folding stopper)
of HP detection. PS27 (folding
stopper HP)
4 - 58
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
FN-104/FN-4 F77-25 PS22(folding knife HP) does not go The main body and FNS CB (FNS control
abnormality ON within the specified time after FNS are stopped board)
M19(folding knife) starts operation of immediately. RL1 M19 (folding knife)
HP detection. (main) is turned OFF. PS22 (folding knife
HP)
F77-26 M20(folding conveyance) does not FNS CB (FNS control
reach the prescribed speed within board)
the specified time after the start of M20 (folding
its operation. conveyance)
Cover F77-41 PS203 (sheet tray lower limit) or FNS CB (FNS control
Inserter A PS204 (sheet tray upper limit) does board)
FNS
abnormality not go ON within the specified time DB(PI drive board)

after the start of M201(sheet tray) M201(sheet tray)
operation. PS203(sheet tray
lower limit)
PS204(sheet tray
upper limit)
FN-104/FN-4 F77-91 Communication abnormality in FNS FNS CB (FNS control
abnormality CB(FNS control board) when sub- board)
CPU receives data.
F77-92 Communication abnormality in FNS FNS CB (FNS control
CB(FNS control board) when main board)
CPU receives data.
ISW F80-01 No response from PRCB (printer RL1 (main) is turned PRCB (printer con-

abnormality control board) for 5 seconds after OFF. trol board)
SW1 (main switch) is turned ON.
F80-10 When SW1 (main switch) was turned C1 program
F80-11 ON, an area which had not been C2 program
F80-12 written by ISW was detected in the C3 program
F80-13 printer control program. C4 program
F80-30 When data is transferred by ISW, Printer cable
normal header information cannot be
Main body
received within the specified time.

F80-31 When data is transferred by ISW, a Defective printer
checksum error or header error was cable
detected in the downloaded data. Program file error
F80-32 When data is transferred by ISW, Printer cable
data cannot be written to the flash Program transfer
ROM properly. destination board.
4 - 59
ERROR CODE LIST

Classification
ADU stand E90-01 ADU drive serial input error 1. Serial RL1 (main) is turned ADUSDB (ADU
abnormality data cannot be received from OFF. stand drive board)
ADUSDB (ADU stand drive board) 0
(ID) within 0.5 second when SW1
(main switch) was turned ON.
E90-02 ADU drive serial input error 1. Serial ADUSDB (ADU
data cannot be received from stand drive board)
ADUSDB (ADU stand drive board) 7
(ID) within 0.5 second when SW1
(main) was turned ON.
F93-01 A -5 V or 12 V blown fuse signal is The FNS/main body ADUSDB (ADU
detected dur ing serial initial stops immediately stand drive board)
communication. and RL1 is turned
OFF.
F93-02 A -5 V or 12 V blown fuse signal is M8 (ADU conveyance)
Main body
not detected during serial initial

communication.
F93-03 When M8 (ADU conveyance ) If there is a paper in M7 (ADU reverse)
which has been OFF is turned ON, copying process when
a trouble detection signal (blown this trouble occurs, the
fuse) is detected. machine stops after
F93-04 When M7 (ADU reverse) which has completion of paper
been OFF is turned ON, a trouble ejection. RL1 (main) is
detection signal (blown fuse) is turned OFF.
detected.
F93-05 A trouble detection signal (solenoid/ The machine stops Solenoids
blown motor fuse) is detected at the immediately and RL1 Motors
time of start. A trouble detection (main) is turned off.
signal (24 V off) is detected.
F93-06 A trouble detection signal (solenoid/
blown motor fuse) is detected at the
signal (24 V off) is not detected.
4 - 60
(sec)
Symbol Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Item
M1 Main motor
M4 Paper feed motor
min380ms timer
MC3 Feed clutch 1
300ms
MC4 Pre-registration clutch 1
Loop roller motor High
M6 70ms
Low
timer timer timer timer
MC1 Registration clutch
M2 Drum motor
M3 Developing motor
Charging Output 1
Output 2
Developing bias
Transfer
Separation
Guide plate
SD4 Separation claw drive solenoid
PCL Pre-charge exposure lamp
Paper reverse/exit motor High
Low
M5
F
R
Paper exit motor High
4 - 61
M10
Low
ADU reverse motor High
Low
M7
F
R
ADU conveyance motor High
M8
Low timer timer timer timer
MC2 ADU pre-registration clutch timer timer
SD2 Paper reverse gate solenoid
PS48 Paper pre-registration sensor
PS18 Vertical conveyance sensor 1
PS54 Loop sensor
PS44 Registration sensor
ORIGINALS, TWO SHEETS SET, TRAY 1)
PS45 Leading edge detection sensor

PS2 Fixing exit sensor
Di750 TIMING CHART (A4, LIFE SIZE, TWO
PS57 Paper reverse sensor

PS61 Paper exit sensor
PS58 ADU paper reverse sensor
PS59 ADU deceleration sensor
PS60 ADU Pre-registration sensor
PS46 ADU exit sensor
Copying starts
TIMING CHART

(sec)
Symbol Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Item
M1 Main motor
M4 Paper feed motor
min380ms timer
MC3 Feed clutch 1
300ms
MC4 Pre-registration clutch 1
TIMING CHART
Loop roller motor High

M6 70ms
Low
MC1 Registration clutch
M2 Drum motor
M3 Developing motor
Charging Output 1
Output 2
Developing bias
Transfer
Separation
Guide plate
SD4 Separation claw drive solenoid
PCL Pre-charge exposure lamp
Paper reverse/exit motor High
Low
M5
F
R
Paper exit motor High
4 - 62
M10
Low
ADU reverse motor High
Low
M7
F
R
ADU conveyance motor High
M8
Low timer timer timer timer
MC2 ADU pre-registration clutch timer timer
SD2 Paper reverse gate solenoid
PS48 Paper pre-registration sensor
PS18 Vertical conveyance sensor 1
PS54 Loop sensor
ORIGINALS, TWO SHEETS SET, TRAY 1)
PS44 Registration sensor

PS45 Leading edge detection sensor
PS2 Fixing exit sensor
PS57 Paper reverse sensor
PS61 Paper exit sensor
PS58 ADU paper reverse sensor
PS59 ADU deceleration sensor
Di750 TIMING CHART (8.5 x 11, LIFE SIZE, TWO
PS60 ADU Pre-registration sensor

PS46 ADU exit sensor
Copying starts
C-305/C-305L
OPTION SERVICE MANUAL

TMG-1
OPTION
EDH-2 TMG-1 C-305 C-305L FN-104 FN-4 Cover Inserter A

SERVICE MANUAL
Copyright
2000 MINOLTA Co., Ltd.
Use of this manual should

be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of
confidential information.
Issued for Di750 and Other Models.
MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 7663-4673-11 00080200

13430
INDEX (OPTION)
C-305/C-305L
TMG-1
Untitled-2 1 05/10/01, 7:48 AM

Untitled-2 1 05/10/01, 7:51 AM
Dual references may be used on the following:
EDH–2 : RADF
FN–104 : FNS
FN–4 : FNS
Cover Inserter A : PI
In-System Writer : ISW
C–305/C-305L : LT and LCT
TMG-1 : TU
HDD : HDD
(Hard Disk Drive)
Untitled-2 1 05/10/01, 7:51 AM
C-305/C-305L
SERVICE MANUAL
13430
Untitled-2 1 05/10/01, 7:51 AM
CONTENTS
1 OUTLINE
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS .................. 1. OUTLINE
Refer to the Di750 Service Manual [GENERAL] on page C-1 C-305/C-305L PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ........ 1-1
[1] Type ............................................................ 1-1
[2] Functions .................................................... 1-1
[3] Machine Data .............................................. 1-1
[4] Maintenance ............................................... 1-1
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[5] Operating Environment ............................... 1-1
CENTER CROSS-SECTIONAL DRAWING ............ 1-2
DRIVE SYSTEM DRAWING ................................... 1-3
[1] Paper feed drive section ............................. 1-3
[2] Stacked paper up/down wire drive section . 1-4
2. UNIT EXPLANATION
PAPER FEED SECTION ......................................... 2-1
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-1
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-1
[3] First paper feed control ............................... 2-2
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] Up/down plate drive control ........................ 2-5
[5] Remaining paper detection/No paper
detection control ......................................... 2-6
3. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED SECTION ......................................... 3-1
[1] Cleaning the Paper Dust
Removing Brush ......................................... 3-1
[2] Cleaning the PS106 (LT feed PS)/PS107
(LT pre-registration PS) .............................. 3-1

[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
Feed Roller Unit .......................................... 3-1
[4] Replacing the Paper feed Roller Rubber/
Feed Roller Rubber .................................... 3-2
[5] Replacing the Double Feed
Prevention Roller Rubber ........................... 3-3
[6] Replacing the MC101 (LT feed MC)/MC102
(LT first paper feed MC) .............................. 3-4
[7] Replacing the C-305 Up/Down Wires ......... 3-5
[8] Replacing the C-305L Up/Down Wires ....... 3-9
4. ELECTRIC PARTS LIST

C-305/-305L ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT
DRAWING ............................................................... 4-1
C-305/-305L CONNECTOR LAYOUT
DRAWING ............................................................... 4-2
C-305 TIMING CHART
A4 or 8.5 x 11, TWO SHEETS)................................ 4-3
C-305 TIMING CHART
(A3 or 11 x 17, TWO SHEETS) ............................... 4-4
C305_C305Lcont.p65 1 00/10/09, 10:40

4 OTHER 3 DIS./ASSEMBLY 2 UNIT EXPLANATION 1 OUTLINE
CONTENTS
C305_C305Lcont.p65
2
00/10/09, 10:40
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before
doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual
was printed. Accordingly, Minolta Corporation, makes no representations or warranties, either ex-
pressed or implied, that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete or accurate. It is
understood that the user of this Service Manual must assume all risks or personal injury and/or
damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be read carefully before doing service work both in the course of
the technical training and even after that, for keeping the correct maintenance and control of the
copier. Keep this Service Manual also for the future service. When it is impossible to read the de-
scription about safety and warning (due to contamination or tear), the relevant page should be re-
placed.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

In this Service Handbook, each of three expressions, “ DANGER”, “ WARNING” and “ CAU-
TION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing, the relevant works (disassembling, assembling, adjustment, repair and mainte-
nance) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Actions having a high possibility of suffering death or seri-

ous wound
WARNING: Actions having a possibility of suffering death or serious
wound
CAUTION: Actions having a possibility of suffering a slight wound,
medium trouble and material damage
C-1
Di750mainst1.p65 1 00/10/06, 17:04

Untitled-2 1 05/10/01, 7:51 AM
1 OUTLINE
1
OUTLINE
C305010e.p65 1 00/10/09, 10:41

1 OUTLINE
C305010e.p65 2 00/10/09, 10:41

C-305/C-305L
1 OUTLINE
C-305/C-305L PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
[1] Type
Type: Side mount type large volume paper feed tray
[2] Functions
Standard size paper :
C-305 A4/B5/8.5 x 11/8.5 x 5.5
Wide paper(Max. 314mm x 223mm)
C-305L A3/B4/A4/A4R
12 x 18/11 x 17/8.5 x 14/8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R
Wide paper(Max. 314mm x 459mm)
Maximum quantity:
4000 sheets (80 g/m2 or 22lb.)
[3] Machine Data

Power source 24V DC/5V (supplied from the main unit), AC27.3V
Max. power consumption
C-305 Max. 82W
C-305L Max. 100 W
Weight
C-305 Approx. 30 kg (66 lb.)
C-305L Approx. 42 kg (88 lb.)
Machine dimensions
C-305 430(W) x 639(D) x 690(H) mm
C-305L 670(W) x 639(D) x 695(H) mm
[4] Maintenance
Maintenance: Same as the main unit
Machine life: Same as the main unit
[5] Operating Environment

Temperature: 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
Humidity: 10% to 80%RH
Note: The information herein may subject to change for improvement without notice.
1-1
C305011e.p65 1 00/10/09, 10:42

C-305/C-305L
1 OUTLINE
CENTER CROSS-SECTIONAL DRAWING
Feed roller
Conveyance roller
Paper feed roller
Top cover
Up/down wire
(the other side
wire as well)
Double feed
prevention roller
Up/down plate
y
;
1-2
C305011e.p65 2 00/10/09, 10:42

C-305/C-305L
1 OUTLINE
DRIVE SYSTEM DRAWING
[1] Paper feed drive section
Feed roller
LT First paper feed SD

(SD100)
Paper feed roller
FRONT
LT paper feed motor

(M101)
LT First paper feed MC

(MC 102)
Conveyance roller
LT feed drive MC
(MC101)
Double feed
Paper feed roller
prevention roller
FRONT
Feed roller
1-3
C305011e.p65 3 00/10/09, 10:42

C-305/C-305L
1 OUTLINE
[2] Stacked paper up/down wire drive section

a. C-305
Up/down plate
LT up/down motor
(M100)
Up/down shaft
FRONT
1-4
C305011e.p65 4 00/10/09, 10:42

C-305/C-305L
1 OUTLINE
b. C-305L
Up/down plate
LT up/down motor
(M100)
Up/down shaft
FRONT
1-5
C305011e.p65 5 00/10/09, 10:42

C-305/C-305L
1 OUTLINE
1-6
C305011e.p65 6 00/10/09, 10:42

2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2
UNIT EXPLANATION
C305020e.p65 1 00/10/09, 10:42

2 UNIT EXPLANATION
C305020e.p65 2 00/10/09, 10:42

C-305/C-305L
PAPER FEED SECTION

[1] Composition
SD100
(LT first paper feed SD)
MC101(LT feed MC)
Paper dust PS106 (LT feed PS)
MC102(LT first paper feed MC) removing brush
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
M101
(LT paper
feed motor) Conveyance
roller PS107 (LT pre-
registration PS)
Up/down wire
(the other side wire Up/down plate
as well)
SW 100 (LT tray down drive switch)
M100 Remaining paper
(LT up/down detection gear
motor)
[2] Mechanisms b. Up/down plate down drive operation

The up/down plate automatically lowers by 120
Mechanism Method mm when the top cover is opened.
*1 Paper lifting Wire drive Subsequently, it is lowered by 120 mm each time
Paper feed Paper feed roller SW100 (LT tray down drive switch) is pressed.
No paper detection Photo sensor (PS108)
+actuator *2: Remaining paper detection
Paper size detection None The LCT is equipped with a remaining paper
*2 Remaining paper Remaining paper de- detection gear which rotates together with M100
detection tection gear+photo (LT up/down) driving the up/down plate.
sensors The remaining paper detection gear has an
(PS102, PS103, PS104, actuator to turn ON/OFF PS102 (LT remaining
PS105) paper detection PS1), PS103 (LT remaining paper
Paper conveyance Roller transport detection PS2), PS104 (LT remaining paper
detection PS3), and PS105 (LT remaining paper
*1: Paper lifting detection PS4).
a. Up/down plate lifting drive operation
The up/down plate is lifted with the up/down wires.
When the top cover closes, M100 (LT up/down)
rotates and the up/down plate connected to the
up/down wires rises.
2-1
C305021e.p65 1 00/10/09, 10:43

C-305/C-305L
Each sensor is turned ON/OFF according to the [3] First paper feed control
rotating position of the remaining paper detec-
tion gear and since this is linked with the up/down 5VDC
LT DB PS100 PS100
position of the up/down plate, the remaining paper SGND
quantity in the LCT can be deter mined by

2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5VDC
monitoring the ON/OFF of each sensor. The PS106
SGND
PS106
remaining paper quantity detected with the four

sensors is displayed on the main body display. PS107 PS107
5VDC
HTR101 PS110 PS110
a. C-305 SGND
24VDC
M100 (LT up/down motor) MC101 DRIVE MC101
MAIN BODY
Actuator PS102 (LT HTR101 CONT 24VDC
MC102
remaining paper AC(H) MC102 DRIVE
detection PS1) 24VDC

PGND 24VDC
5VDC SD100 DRIVE SD100
PS103 (LT SGND
remaining LT TXD MS101 MS102
paper LT RXD CLK 24VDC
LT TXD LATCH
detection LT TXD CLK
PS2) LT ERR (LT-411 only)M101 H/L
LT RXD M101 CONT M101
LT ACK M101 EM
PS104 (LT LT REQ PGND
remaining
paper
detection
PS3) The first paper is fed by the paper feed roller and the
Gear for M100 PS105 (LT feed roller driver by M101(LT paper feed) via MC101(LT
Remaining remaining paper feed MC). The feed roller ass'y is lowered by SD100
paper detection detection PS4)
(first paper-feed) to touch the paper when MC101 (LT
gear
feed) turns ON and drive SD100 (LT first paper feed).
After touching and feeding the paper, the feed roller
b. C-305L
ass'y is raised by SD100 (LT first paper feed) to release
PS103 (LT the feed roller ass'y from the paper. Then, the paper is
remaining PS104 (LT
fed into the paper conveyance section by the paper feed
paper remaining paper
PS102 (LT detection detection PS3) roller which is driven by M101 via MC102 (LT first paper
remaining paper PS2) feed).
detection PS1) The related signals are: PS100 (LT top cover open/close
detection), PS106 (LT feed), PS107 (LT pre-
registration), and PS110 (LT jam access door open/
close detection).
1. Operation
a. First paper feed timing
Normally, this machine feeds paper at a speed of
600 mm/s. When the longitudinal length of paper
is 300 mm or more, this machine cannot complete
Gear for M100 paper ejection even if paper has reached the
Actuator PS105 (LT image transfer section. The paper feed speed of
Remaining paper remaining paper the image transfer section is 370 mm/s at this
detection gear detection PS4) time. Therefore, the C-305L in which paper with
a longitudinal length of 300 mm or more is set
changes the paper feed speed from 600 mm/s to
2-2
C305021e.p65 2 00/10/09, 10:43

C-305/C-305L
370 mm/s for the image transfer section. heater) to protect the paper from humidity.
Paper with a longitudinal length of less than 300 HTR101 is directly controlled by the main body
mm/s is ejected before it reaches the image trans- ACDB (AC drive board) rather than by the LTDB
fer section, so the paper feed speed is fixed at (LT drive board).
600 mm/s.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
The description given under “Paper with a longi- 2. Signals
tudinal length of less than 300 mm is fed in the a. Input signals
following case:” also covers the operation of the (1) PS100 (PS100 to LTDB)
C-305 that can handle only the paper with a length Top cover open/close detection signal
of less than 300 mm. [L]: Cover opened
(1) Start of first paper feed [H]: Cover closed
• Paper with a longitudinal length of less than (2) PS106 (PS106 to LTDB)
300 mm is fed in the following case: Transport roller exit paper detection signal
At predefined interval after the START button [L]: Paper detected
is pressed(Paper feed speed does not change.) [H]: Paper not detected
• Paper with a longitudinal length of 300 mm or (3) PS107 (PS107 to LTDB)
more is fed in the following case: Transpor t roller entrance (pre-registration
High-speed paper feed starts when the speci- position) paper detection signal
fied time lapses after the START button is [L]: Paper detected
pressed. The high speed paper feed feed is [H]: Paper not detected
switched to the low speed paper feed after (4) PS110 (PS110 to LTDB)
PS44 (second paper feed) is turned ON and Jam access door open/close detection signal
loop is formed. [L]: Door opened
(2) Start of second and subsequent papers [H]: Door closed
• When PS106 (LT feed) is turned OFF by the (5) M101 EM (M101 to LTDB)
preceding paper, the paper feed speed is low M101 rotation error detection signal
for the paper with a longitudinal length of 300 [L]: M101 rotating
mm or more.This low speed paper feed is [H]: M101 not rotating
switched to the high speed paper feed for the
(6) LT TXD (MAIN BODY to LTDB)
next paper as soon as PS107(LT pre-
Serial data to transmit main body PRCB operat-
registration) is turned OFF.
ing status to LTDB
(3) OFF timing
(7) LT TXD LATCH (MAIN BODY to LTDB)
When the specified time lapses after PS106 is
LT TXD signal latch signal
turned OFF by the last paper
(8) LT TXD CLK (MAIN BODY to LTDB)
b. Interlock
LT TXD signal clock signal
The power supply line of M101 (LT paper feed) is
equipped with MS101 (LT interlock MS1) and (9) LT ERR (MAIN BODY to LTDB)
MS102 (LT interlock MS2). When the top cover Signal to notify LTDB when there is error in the
is opened, MS101 turns OFF, and when the jam main body
access door is opened MS102 turns OFF, thereby (10) LT ACK (MAIN BODY to LTDB)
cutting off the power supply to M101. Serial data transmission enable signal from LCT
Furthermore, the top cover is equipped with to main body PRCB
PS100 (LT top cover open/close detection) and b. Output signal
the jam access door is equipped with PS110 (LT (1) MC101 DRIVE (LTDB to MC101)
jam access door open/close detection) and when
either of these doors is opened during paper feed,
the M101 drive signal is turned OFF to stop the
paper feed operation.
c. Internal heater
The LCT is equipped with HTR101 (LT internal
2-3
C305021e.p65 3 00/10/09, 10:43

C-305/C-305L
MC101 ON/OFF drive signal

[L]: MC101 ON
[H]: MC101 OFF
(2) MC102 DRIVE (LTDB to MC102)
MC102 ON/OFF drive signal
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[L]: MC102 ON
[H]: MC102 OFF
(3) SD100 DRIVE (LTDB to SD100)
SD100 ON/OFF drive signal
[L]: SD100 ON
[H]: SD100 OFF
(4) M101 CONT (LTDB to M101)
M101 ON/OFF control signal
[L]: M101 ON
[H]: M101 OFF
(5) LT RXD (LTDB to MAIN BODY)
Serial data to transmit the LTDB operating status
to main body PRCB
(6) LT RXD CLK (LTDB to MAIN BODY)
LT RXD signal clock signal
(7) LT REQ (LTDB to MAIN BODY)
Serial data send request signal from LCT to main
body PRCB
(8) M101 H/L (LTDB to M101)
M101 speed control signal. (C-305L only)
[L]: Low speed rotation
[H]: High speed rotation
2-4
C305021e.p65 4 00/10/09, 10:43

C-305/C-305L
[4] Up/down plate drive control (1) ON timing

When the top cover opens or closes, M100 (LT up/down When the top cover is closed and PS100 is turned
ON, M100 rotates forward to raise the up/down
LT DB
5VDC plate.
PS100 PS100
SGND
(2) OFF timing
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5VDC When the up/down plate rises and PS109 (LT
PS101 PS101
SGND upper limit detection) turns ON to indicate the
SW100 detection of the topmost paper, M100 turns OFF
MAIN BODY 24VDC
SW100
and stops the up/down plate.
PGND
5VDC The up/down plate also stops when the top cover
SGND
5VDC is opened and PS100 turns OFF.
LT TXD PS109 PS109
LT RXD CLK SGND
LT TXD LATCH
LT TXD CLK
LT ERR
2. Signals
LT RXD M100 DRIVE
LT ACK M100 a. Input signals
LT REQ M100 DRIVE
(1) PS101 (PS101 to LTDB)
Up/down plate lower limit detection signal
[L]: Up/down plate not at lower limit
[H]: Up/down plate at lower limit
motor) rotates forward or backward to move the up/ (2) PS109 (PS109 to LTDB)
down plate up or down. The up/down plate descends Up/down plate upper limit detection signal
by 120 mm each time SW100 (LT tray down drive switch) [L]: Up/down plate not at upper limit
is pressed while the top cover is opened. The related [H]: Up/down plate at upper limit
signals are PS100 (LT top cover open/close detection), (3) SW100 (SW100 to LTDB)
PS101 (LT lower limit detection), and PS109 (LT upper SW100 ON/OFF detection signal
limit detection). [L]: SW100 ON
[H]: SW100 OFF
1. Operation b. Output signals
a. Up/down plate descend timing (1) M100 DRIVE1, 2 (LTDB to M100)
(1) ON timing M100 drive signal
When the top cover is opened and PS100 is These signals switches the direction of the drive
turned OFF, M100 rotates backward to lower the current to control the rotation direction of M100.
up/down plate.
When SW100 (LT tray down drive switch) turns
ON by pressing, M100 rotates backward to move
the up/down plate down.
(2) OFF timing
M100 turns OFF at predefined interval after
PS100 turns OFF or SW100 turns ON. This in
turn lowers the up/down plate by 120 mm.
(3) Others
The up/down plate descends by 120 mm each
time SW100 is pressed until PS101 turns ON to
indicate the bottom limit of the up/down plate.
b. Up/down plate ascend timing
2-5
C305021e.p65 5 00/10/09, 10:43

C-305/C-305L
[5] Remaining paper detection/No paper <Remaining paper quantity and display>
detection control Stacked Remaining
paper PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 paper quantity
quantity display
LT DB
0 to 700 OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 flashing
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5VDC
PS102 PS102
SGND
701 to 1200 ON OFF OFF OFF 1 on
5VDC 1201 to 1700 ON ON OFF OFF 2 on
PS103 PS103
SGND 1701 to 2200 ON ON ON OFF 2 on
5VDC
2201 to 2700 ON ON ON ON 3 on
PS104 PS104 2701 to 3200 OFF ON ON ON 3 on
SGND
3201 to 3700 OFF OFF ON ON 4 on

5VDC
MAIN BODY 24VDC PS105 PS105 3701 or OFF OFF OFF ON 4 on
PGND SGND
5VDC
SGND
more
5VDC
LT TXD PS108 PS108 Caution: The remaining paper quantity is indicated
LT RXD CLK SGND
LT TXD LATCH
LT TXD CLK on the control panel with four horizontal bars.
LT ERR
LT RXD M100 DRIVE Stacked paper quantity differs depending on
LT ACK M100
LT REQ M100 DRIVE the thickness of the paper.
b. No paper detection control
When there is no more paper inside the LCT,
The remaining paper quantity is detected by PS102 (LT PS108 turns ON and a message is displayed on
remaining paper detection 1), PS103 (LT remaining the main body display.
paper detection 2), PS104 (LT remaining paper
detection 3), and PS105 (LT remaining paper detection 2. Signals
4) and no paper detection is made by PS108 (LT no a. Input signals
paper detection). (1) PS102 (PS102 to LTDB)
The signals detected by these sensors are controlled Remaining paper detection gear rotational
by LTDB (LT drive board) and displayed on the main position detection signal
body display. [L]: PS102 OFF
[H]: PS102 ON
1. Operation (2) PS103 (PS103 to LTDB)
a. Remaining paper detection control Remaining paper detection gear rotational
The remaining paper quantity is determined from position detection signal
the ON/OFF combination of sensors PS102, [L]: PS103 OFF
PS103, PS104, and PS105 which detect the [H]: PS103 ON
rotational position of M100 that is driving the up/ (3) PS104 (PS104 to LTDB)
down plate. Each sensor turns ON or OFF ac- Remaining paper detection gear rotational
cording to the position of the remaining paper de- position detection signal
tection gear which is linked with the rotation of [L]: PS104 OFF
M100. [H]: PS104 ON
The remaining paper quantity is detectable at (4) PS105 (PS105 to LTDB)
eight levels, but it is displayed on the main body
Remaining paper detection gear rotational
display as five levels. position detection signal
[L]: PS105 OFF
[H]: PS105 ON
(5) PS108 (PS108 to LTDB)
LCT no paper detection signal
[L]: No paper
[H]: Paper present
2-6
C305021e.p65 6 00/10/09, 10:43

3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
C305030e.p65 1 00/10/09, 10:43

This section explains how to disassemble and reassemble the machine.
When disassembling and reassembling the machine, follow the
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
precautions given below.

1. Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
2. The disassembled par ts must be reassembled following the
disassembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified.
3. Care should be taken not to lose small parts. Care should also be
taken not to install small parts in wrong places.
4. Do not operate the machine before installing all the disassembled
parts completely.
5. Removal of some screws is prohibited in this section. Never loosen
them.
C305030e.p65 2 00/10/09, 10:43

C-305/C-305L
PAPER FEED SECTION

[1] Cleaning the Paper Dust Removing [2] Cleaning the PS106 (LT feed PS)/
Brush PS107 (LT pre-registration PS)
Caution: If LT is connected to the main Caution: If LT is connected to the main
unit, make sure that main unit unit, make sure that main unit
power plug is disconnected power plug is disconnected
from the power outlet. from the power outlet.
a. Procedure a. Procedure
(1) Open the top cover. (1) Looking into the paper ejection side of the LCT
(2) Remove the two screws to detach the paper feed from below, and clean sensors through the cavity
cover B. for PS106 and the cavity for PS107 using a blower
brush or the like.
Cavity for PS106

Top
Cavity for PS107
cover
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
Paper
exit
side
Paper feed cover B
(3) Insert a flat bladed screwdriver in the slots (in two [3] Removing and Reinstalling
locations) for paper dust removing brush to re- the Paper Feed Roller Unit
lease the locking lugs, then remove the paper Caution: If LT is connected to the main
dust removing brush. unit, make sure that main unit
power plug is disconnected
Paper dust removing from the power outlet.
brush
a. Procedure
(1) Open the top cover.
(2) Remove the spring from the paper feed roller unit.
Top cover
Spring
Cavity
Remove
this.
Locking lugs
(4) Clean the paper dust removing brush using a Paper feed roller
unit
blower brush or the like.
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal Paper feed roller unit
steps in reverse.
3-1
C305031e.p65 1 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
(3) After removing the two retaining rings, remove the (3) Remove the two retaining rings.
two bearings outward to remove the paper feed (4) Remove the bearing outward to detach the roller
roller unit. section from the roller fitting.
Paper feed roller unit Bearing

Roller fitting
Retaining
ring
Bearing
Bearing
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Bearing
Retaining ring Retaining ring
(5) Remove the bearing from the opposite side of the

(4) Reinstall the above parts following the removal coupling, then remove the paper feed roller from
steps in reverse. the shaft.
(6) Remove the retaining ring to pull the feed roller
[4] Replacing the Paper feed Roller from the shaft.
Rubber/Feed Roller Rubber (7) Remove the rubber from each roller.
Caution: If LT is connected to the main
unit, make sure that main unit Coupling
Paper feed roller rubber
from the power outlet. Shaft
a. Procedure Paper feed
roller
(1) Remove the paper feed roller unit.
(2) Remove the bearing and paper feed reference
actuator.
Shaft Feed roller

Paper feed reference actuator
Paint
Retaining mark
Bearing ring
Feed roller
rubber
Bearing
3-2
C305031e.p65 2 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
(8) Reinstall the above parts following the removal (3) Remove the two screws to detach the double feed
steps in reverse. prevention roller unit.
Caution 1: Make sure rollers and rubber por- Caution: When reinstalling the double feed
tions are oriented properly when prevention roller unit, tighten the
reinstalling them. screws on the rear side first.
Caution 2: Make sure the one-way clutch
direction is correct. Double feed prevention roller unit
Caution 3: Check whether grease or the like
is present on each roller.
[5] Replacing the Double Feed

Prevention Roller Rubber
Caution: If LT is connected to the main
unit, make sure that main unit
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
from the power outlet.
a. Procedure
Caution: With the power held on, press the
SW100 (LT tray down switch) to move
Screws
the up/down plate down to the bottom
in advance.
(1) Remove the paper feed roller unit. (4) Remove the two retaining rings, fit the shaft into
(2) Remove the two screws to detach the double feed the D-cut in the fitting, and remove the double
prevention roller unit cover. feed prevention roller together with the shaft.
Double feed
Double feed prevention roller Double feed
prevention roller unit cover prevention roller
D-cut
Screws Retaining ring
3-3
C305031e.p65 3 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
(5) Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber [6] Replacing the MC101 (LT feed MC)/
from the double feed prevention roller. MC102 (LT first paper feed MC)
a. Procedure
Paint mark
(2) Remove the spring from the paper feed roller unit.
Double feed (3) Remove the two screws to detach the top cover.
prevention roller
Top cover
Screws
Shaft
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Double feed
prevention roller
rubber
(6) Reinstall the double feed prevention roller in the

reverse order of the removal procedure.
Caution 1: Make sure the double feed preven-
tion roller r ubber is oriented
properly when reinstalling it. (4) Remove the two screws to detach the clutch
Caution 2: Check whether scratch or like is
replacement cover.
visible on the pet cock for the
drive gear.
Caution 3: Check whether grease or the like
Clutch replacement
is present on double feed roller. cover
Screws
3-4
C305031e.p65 4 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
(5) Disconnect two relay connectors (CN765, CN766) (3) Remove the four screws to detach the right side
of the clutches. cover.
(6) Remove the Retaining ring to detach each clutch.
MC102 (LT first Screws

MC101 (LT Paper feed MC) paper feed MC)
Retaining
ring Retaining
ring
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Relay Right side
connector Relay connector cover Screws
(CN766) (CN765)
(4) After opening the jam access door, remove the

(7) Reinstall the above parts following the removal four screws to detach the front cover.
steps in reverse. Caution: Remove the four screws and then
Caution: When installing each MC, make remove the front cover with the
sure that the stopper of each clutch jam access door closed.
is on the predefined position.
Jam access door

[7] Replacing the C-305 Up/Down Wires
a. Procedure
Caution: With the power held on, press the
SW100 (LT tray down switch) to move
in advance.
(2) Remove the clutch replacement cover.
Screws Screws
Right side cover
3-5
C305031e.p65 5 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
(5) Remove the five screws to detach the rear cover. tions in “Removing Up/Down Wires” and “Install-
ing Up/Down Wires.”
Caution: Four up/down wires with different
Screw length, two at the front and two at the
back, are used. Wires with the same
length can be used either at the front
or back if they are used in the same
location.
(12) After installing the up/down wires, make sure the
1323.6mm
Wire A
Rear cover
1250.3mm
Wire B
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws Screws
769.3mm
(6) Remove the five relay connectors (CN749, CN780, Wire C

CN781, CN782, CN783) to disconnect the wiring
661mm
harness from the up/down motor mounting plate.
(7) Remove the E-ring to detach the up/down gear. Wire D
(8) Pull the pin from the shaft.
(9) Remove the E-ring to detach the bearing.
(10)Remove the three screws to detach the up/down
motor assembly.
(11) Replace the up/down wire following the instruc-
Up/down Relay
motor
Relay connector connector
assembly (CN780)
(CN749)
Relay
Screw connector
(CN781)
Relay
connector
(CN782)
Relay
connector
(CN783)
Screw
Bearing
E-ring
Up/down
Shaft
Screw gear
E-ring
Pin
3-6
C305031e.p65 6 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
<Removing the Up/Down Wires>
Up/down plate
2. Release the metal
Wire B ball to remove wire
C.
Wire A
18.Release the metal
Wire A ball to remove wire
A.
Wire B
ball to remove wire
D.
14. Release the metal 16. Release the metal

ball to remove wire ball to remove wire
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
A. B.
7. Release the metal Wire D

ball to remove wire
C. Wire C

1. Remove the E-ring.
ball to remove wire
D. 3. Remove the pulley.

ball to remove wire 5. Remove the pulley.
B.
Wire C FRONT 15.Remove the E-

Up/down ring, then remove
Wire D shaft the pulley to
release wire B.
8. Remove the pulley.
10. Remove the pulley.
11. Remove the E-ring,

then remove the 13. Remove the pulley to 17. Remove the pulley
pulley to release release wire A. to release wire A.
wire B.
3-7
C305031e.p65 7 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
<Installing the Up/Down Wires>
Up/down plate 20. Insert wire B in the pulleys,

then attach a metal ball.
Wire B
Wire A 2. Insert wire A in the pulleys,

Wire A
Wire B 17. Insert wire D in the pulleys,

7. Insert wire A in the

pulleys, then attach a 5. Insert wire B in the pulleys,
metal ball. then attach a metal ball.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
15. Insert wire C in the

pulleys, then attach a
Wire D
metal ball.
Wire C
12. Insert wire D in the
metal ball.
10. Insert wire B in the

metal ball. 18. Insert wire C in the up/
Up/down down shaft, attach a
Wire C pulley, and secure the
FRONT shaft
Wire D pulley with an E-ring.
13. Insert wire C in the up/
1. Insert wire A in 19. Wind wire C around
down shaft, attach a
pulley, and secure the 6. the up/down the pulley by 6 turns
shaft, attach in such a manner that
pulley with an E-ring.
pulleys, then the wire can be pulled
14. Wind wire C around pull the wire from over the pulley.
the pulley by 6 turns in from under the
such a manner that the pulleys.
wire can be pulled
from over the pulley.
6 turns
6 turns
11. Insert wire D in the up/ 3. Insert wire B in the up/ 16. Insert wire D in the up/
down shaft, attach a 8. down shaft, attach a down shaft, attach a
pulley, and wind wire pulley, and secure the pulley, and wind wire
D around the pulley by pulley with E-rings. D around the pulley by
six turns in such a six turns in such a
4. Pull wire B from under the manner that the wire
manner that the wire
can be pulled from 9. pulleys. can be pulled from
over the pulley. over the pulley.
6 turns 6 turns
3-8
C305031e.p65 8 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
up/down wires are passed in the grooves in the [8] Replacing the C-305L Up/Down Wires
pulleys properly and wires do not run on the sides a. Procedure
of the pulleys. Also make sure the up/down plate Caution: With the power held on, press the
can be moved up and down smoothly by hand. SW100 (LT tray down switch) to move
Caution: If the up/down plate does not move up
in advance.
and down smoothly, reinstall the up/
down wires. (1) Remove the clutch replacement cover, side cover
(13) Install the up/down wire drive motor assembly, (right), front cover, and rear cover following the
up/down gear, and relay connectors, following steps (1) to (5) in [7] Replacing the C-305 Up/
the removal steps in reverse. Down Wires.
(14) Remove the E-ring to detach the idle gear. (2) Remove the E-ring.
(15) Rotate the remaining paper detection gear until (3) Remove the five screws to detach the gear cover.
the round hole in this gear is aligned with the (4) Remove the two bearings.
oblong hole in the up/down motor mounting plate.
Screw
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Caution: Align when the up/down plate is in
lowest position.
(16) Install the idle gear.
Up/down motor
mounting plate Remaining paper
detection gear
Screw
Gear cover
E-ring Bearing
Screws
Bearing
(5) Remove the gear A.

(6) Remove the E-ring to remove gear B.
Round
(7) Remove the detent pin for gear B from the up/
Oblong hole down pulley shaft.
hole (8) Remove the E-ring and bearing to remove gear C.
Idle gear E-ring
Bearing
Gear C
(17) Attach the covers following the removal steps in
reverse.
Caution: After replacing the up/down wires,
correct horizontal and centering of the
up/down plate. (Refer to “ADJUST-
MENT SECTION.”)
Gear A E-ring
Pin
E-ring
Gear B Up/down pulley shaft
3-9
C305031e.p65 9 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
(9) Remove the bearing behind gear C. (17) Replace the up/down wire following the instruc-
(10) Remove the E-ring to remove the up/down gear. tions in “Removing the Up/Down Wires” and “In-
(11) Remove the detent pin for up/down gear from the stalling Up/Down Wires.”
up/down pulley shaft. Caution: Four up/down wires with different
(12) Remove the E-ring to remove gear D. length, two at the front and two at the
(13) Remove the E-ring to remove the remaining pa- back, are used. Wires with the same
length can be used either at the front
per detection gear.
or back if they are used in the same
(14) Remove the four relay connectors (CN780,
location.
CN781, CN782, and CN783) to disconnect the
wiring harness from the up/down motor mounting
plate. 1057.3mm
Wire A
Relay connector Relay
connector Relay connector
(CN780) (CN782)
(CN781) 692.1mm
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Up/down motor Wire B

Remaining paper
detection gear mounting plate
Gear D 1321.7mm
Wire C
1303.1mm
Wire D
E-ring
Pin
Relay
Up/down connector
gear (CN783)
E-ring Bearing E-ring
Up/down pulley shaft
(15) Remove the E-ring to remove the bearing.

(16) Remove the six screws to remove the up/down
motor mounting plate.
Up/down motor mounting plate
Screws
Bearing
E-ring Screws
3 - 10
C305031e.p65 10 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
<Removing the Up/Down Wires>
Up/down plate 2. Release the metal

ball to remove wire
A.
Wire C
Wire D
Wire C
ball to remove wire
D.
Wire D
14. Release the metal ball to remove wire
ball to remove wire B.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
D.
7. Release the metal ball to remove wire
ball to remove wire C.
A.
Wire B
9. Release the metal Wire A
ball to remove wire
B.

ball to remove wire 3. Remove the pulley.
C.
Wire A 5. Remove the pulley.

Wire B Front Up/down shaft
15. Remove the E-ring,
6. Remove the E-ring. then remove the
pulley to release
8. Remove the pulley. wire C.
10. Remove the pulley. 11. Remove the E-ring,

then remove the 13. Remove the pulley to 17. Remove the pulley
pulley to release release wire D. to release wire D.
wire C.
3 - 11
C305031e.p65 11 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
<Installing the Up/Down Wires>
Up/down plate 20. Insert wire A in the

metal ball.
Wire C
Wire D
Wire C pulleys, then attach a
metal ball.
Wire D
17. Insert wire B in the
7. Insert wire D in the pulleys, then attach a
pulleys, then attach a metal ball.
metal ball.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
15. Insert wire A in the pulleys, then attach a

pulleys, then attach a metal ball.
metal ball.
Wire B
12. Insert wire B in the Wire A
metal ball.
18. Insert wire A in the up/
pulley, and secure the
metal ball.
pulley with an E-ring.
Wire A 19. Wind wire A around the
Wire B Front Up/down pulley by 6 turns in such
shaft a manner that the wire
13. Insert wire A in the up/down
shaft, attach a pulley, and can be pulled from over
secure the pulley with an E-ring. the pulley.
14. Wind wire A around the pulley 6. up/down shaft, attach 6 turns
by 6 turns in such a manner pulleys, then pull wire
that the wire can be pulled D from under the
from over the pulley. pulleys.
16. Insert wire B in the up/
6 turns pulley, and wind wire B
3. Insert wire C in the up/down around the pulley by six
8. shaft, attach a pulley, and turns in such a manner
11. Insert wire B in the up/down shaft,
secure the pulley with E-rings. that the wire can be
attach a pulley, and wind wire B
pulled from over the
around the pulley by six turns in 4. Pull wire C from under the pulley.
such a manner that the wire can 9. pulleys.
be pulled from over the pulley.
6 turns
6 turns
3 - 12
C305031e.p65 12 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
(18) After installing the up/down wires, check whether

they are engaged with the pulleys properly and
whether they do not ride over the pulleys. Next,
move the up/down plate manually to check
whether it moves up and down smoothly.
Caution: If the up/down plate does not move
smoothly, remove the up/down wires
and install them again.
(19) Install the up/down motor mounting plate, relay
connectors, remaining paper detection gear, gear
D, and up/down gear following the removal steps
in reverse.
(20) Rotate the remaining paper detection gear until
the round hole in this gear is aligned with the
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
oblong hole in the up/down motor mounting plate.
Remaining Up/down motor mounting plate

paper detection
gear
Oblong hole
Round hole
Caution: Align them when the up/down plate is

at the bottom.
(21) Install gear C.
(22) Attach the other gears, gear cover, and external
covers following the removal steps in reverse.
Caution: After replacing the up/down wires,
correct horizontal and centering of the
up/down plate. (Refer to “ADJUST-
MENT SECTION.”)
3 - 13
C305031e.p65 13 00/10/09, 10:44

C-305/C-305L
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
3 - 14
C305031e.p65 14 00/10/09, 10:44

4
ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
C305040e.p65 1 00/10/09, 10:45

C305040e.p65 2 00/10/09, 10:45

C-305/C-305L ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
SW100
LT tray down drive switch
PS108 MS101
LT No paper detection PS LT interlock MS1
PS107 PS110
LT pre-registration LT jam access door
PS open/close detection PS
MS102
LT interlock MS2 SD100
LT 1st paper feed SD
PS100
LT top cover open/ PS109
close detection PS LT upper limit detection PS
MC101 PS106
LT feed drive MC LT feed PS
M100 MC102
LT up/down motor LT 1st paper feed MC
PS102 M101
LT remaining LT paper feed motor
paper detection PS1
PS103 LTDB
LT remaining LT drive board

paper detection PS2
HTR101
PS104 LT internal heater
LT remaining
paper detection PS3 PS101
PS105 LT lower limit detection PS
LT remaining paper detection PS4
4-1
C305041e.p65 1 00/10/09, 10:45

C-305 / C-305L CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
744 (W: 3pin)

742 (W: 3pin)
741 (W: 3pin) 784 (W: 2pin)
747 (W: 3pin)

766 (W: 2pin)
746 (W: 3pin)

767 (W: 2pin)
765 (W: 2pin) 773 (W: 3pin)
774 (W: 2pin) 740 (W: 3pin)

773 (W: 2pin)
762 (W: 3pin)
771 (W: 2pin)
749 (W: 3pin)
751 (W: 6pin)
780 (B: 3pin)
750 (W: 10pin)
781 (W: 3pin)
745 (W: 3pin)
783 (W: 3pin)

761 (W: 2pin)
720 (W: 5pin) 723 (W: 8pin)
782 (B: 3pin)
Caution: Must use fuses specified by

Minolta when replacing F1. If
fuse is not specified by Minolta, 721
the safety feature may not work, (W: 8pin)
resulting in burn damage to the
board or personal injury.
F1 722
(GY: 20pin)
700 (W: 4pin) 710 (GY: 18pin)
LTDB
4-2
C305042e.p65 2 00/10/09, 10:46

C30504ce.p65
Symbol Time (sec) 0 1 2 (sec) TIMING CHART
Item
M101 LT paper feed motor
300ms min380ms 200ms
MC101 LT feed drive clutch
4
Loop amount Loop amount
LT first paper feed

SD100
solenoid
LT first paper feed

MC102
clutch
4-3
LT pre-registration
PS107
sensor
LT feed sensor
PS106
C-305 TIMING CHART (A4 or 8.5 x 11,TWO SHEETS)
00/10/09, 10:47
Start button ON
C30504ce.p65
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 (sec)
Symbol Item
H
M101 LT paper feed
motor L min380ms min380ms
5
300ms
MC101 LT feed drive clutch
Loop amount
Loop amount
SD100 LT first paper feed
solenoid
MC102 LT first paper feed

clutch
4-4
Timer Timer
(Second paper feed loop) (Second paper feed loop)
Registration clutch
MC1
Timer Timer
PS107 LT pre-registration
sensor
PS106 LT feed sensor
00/10/09, 10:47
Registration
PS44
sensor
C-305LTIMING CHART (A3 or 11 x 17,TWO SHEETS)
Start button ON
TIMING CHART

TMG-1
SERVICE MANUAL
13430
Untitled-2 1 05/10/01, 7:51 AM
CONTENTS
1 OUTLINE
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 1.OUTLINE
Refer to the Di750 Service Manual [GENERAL] on page ... C-1 TMG-1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................... 1-1
[1] Type ............................................................ 1-1
[2] Functions .................................................... 1-1
[3] Machine Specifications ............................... 1-1
[4] Maintenance ............................................... 1-1
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[5] Operating environment ............................... 1-1
CENTER CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW .................... 1-2
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM .................................... 1-3
[1] Conveyance Drive Section ......................... 1-3
[2] Stopper Drive/Stopper Release
Drive Section .............................................. 1-3
[3] Press Drive Section .................................... 1-4
[4] Pusher Plate Drive/Holder Plate Drive ....... 1-4
TRIMMING PROCESS ............................................ 1-5
[1] Booklet Conveyance ................................... 1-5
[2] Trimming Position Adjustment .................... 1-5
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3] Booklet Press .............................................. 1-6
[4] Trimming ..................................................... 1-6
[5] Press Release/ Stopper Release ............... 1-7
[6] Booklet Ejection .......................................... 1-7
2. UNIT EXPLANATION
EXTERNAL SECTION ............................................ 2-1
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-1
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-1
CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................... 2-2

[1] Composition ................................................ 2-2
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-2
[3] Conveyance Control ................................... 2-2
PRESS SECTION ................................................... 2-4
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-4
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-4
[3] Stopper/Press Control ................................ 2-5
TRIMMER SECTION ............................................... 2-8
[1] Composition ................................................ 2-8
[2] Mechanisms ................................................ 2-8
[3] Trimmer Control .......................................... 2-9
[4] Scraps Removal Control ........................... 2-10
STACKER SECTION ............................................ 2-11
[1] Composition .............................................. 2-11
[2] Mechanisms .............................................. 2-11
[3] Booklet Ejection/Stack Control ................. 2-12
3. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
TRIMMER SECTION ............................................... 3-1
[1] Replacing the Upper and Lower Knives ..... 3-1
4. ELECTRIC PARTS LIST

TMG-1 ELECTRICAL PARTS
LAYOUT DRAWING ................................................ 4-1
TMG-1 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ........... 4-2
TMG_1cont.p65 1 00/10/09, 11:50

CONTENTS
1 OUTLINE
TMG-1 TIMING CHART (TRIM MODE, A3 or 11 x 17,

16 SHEETS, 2 SETS) ............................................. 4-3
TMG-1 TIMING CHART (THROUGHMODE, A3 or 11 x
17, 16 SHEETS, 2 SETS) ....................................... 4-4
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
4 OTHER
TMG_1cont.p65 2 00/10/09, 11:50

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before
doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual
was printed. Accordingly, Minolta Corporation, makes no representations or warranties, either ex-
pressed or implied, that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete or accurate. It is
understood that the user of this Service Manual must assume all risks or personal injury and/or
damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be read carefully before doing service work both in the course of
the technical training and even after that, for keeping the correct maintenance and control of the
copier. Keep this Service Manual also for the future service. When it is impossible to read the de-
scription about safety and warning (due to contamination or tear), the relevant page should be re-
placed.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

In this Service Handbook, each of three expressions, “ DANGER”, “ WARNING” and “ CAU-
TION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing, the relevant works (disassembling, assembling, adjustment, repair and mainte-
nance) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Actions having a high possibility of suffering death or seri-

ous wound
WARNING: Actions having a possibility of suffering death or serious
wound
CAUTION: Actions having a possibility of suffering a slight wound,
medium trouble and material damage
C-1
Di750mainst1.p65 1 00/10/06, 17:04

Untitled-2 1 05/10/01, 7:51 AM
1 OUTLINE
1
OUTLINE
TMG010e.p65 1 00/10/09, 11:51

1 OUTLINE
TMG010e.p65 2 00/10/09, 11:51

TMG-1
1 OUTLINE
TMG-1 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
[1] Type Parallelism with fold:
Type: Within ±1 mm
Upper-knife-reciprocating-type booklet edge Parallelism = A - B
trimming machine with large-capacity stacker
A
[2] Functions
Booklet edge trimming function:
Receives the booklet made by the FNS and
trims its edge.
Number of sheets cut: Folding edge Trim edge
B
Max. 32 pages (16 sheets of 80 g/m2 or 22lb.
paper folded into two or 15 sheets of 80 g/m2
or 22lb. paper folded into two + one sheet of Trimming deviation:
200 g/m2 or 55lb. cover paper)
Pages of booklet Trimming deviation
Stacker capacity:
4 to 10 Max. 0.5 mm
Pages of booklet Number of stackable
12 to 32 Max. 1.5 mm
booklets
4 to 10 More than 100
Bundle of Folding edge
12 to 20 More than 50 sheets
22 to 32 More than 32
Minimum Trimming Width:
More than 2mm from the edge
Paper size
Regular sizes: Trimming deviation
Sizes of paper that can be handled in the
stapling and folding / folding mode of the [3] Machine Specifications
FNS(A3, B4, A4R, 11 x 17R, 8.5 x 14R, 8.5 x 11) Power source:
Wide paper: 5 VDC (supplied from the main body via the
Sizes of paper supported by the main body to FNS)
which the FNS is connected, but should be 24 VDC (supplied from the DCPS mounted in
whithin 314mm x 445mm. this machine. The internal DCPS is compatible
Amount of paper curl: Max. 10 mm with 100 to 240 VAC.)
Maximum power consumption:
Copied papers (5 sheets) Less than 300 VA
Amount of curl
Weight: Approx. 68 kg (150 lb.)
Machine dimensions:
1279.5(W) x 604(D) x 562(H) mm
[4] Maintenance
Maintenance method:
Same as the main body.
[5] Operating environment

Temperature: 10 to 30 oC (50 oF to 86 oF)
Humidity: 10 to 80%RH
Note: The information herein may subject to change

for improvement without notice.
1-1
TMG011e.p65 1 00/10/09, 11:51

TMG-1
1 OUTLINE
CENTER CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
Ejected booklet
Stacker Exit tray Pusher section
Vertical conveyance roller
Trimmer section
Holder section
Entrance conveyance section

Stopper section Press section Scraps box
1-2
TMG011e.p65 2 00/10/09, 11:51

TMG-1
1 OUTLINE
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
[1] Conveyance Drive Section
Vertical convey-
Trimmer section exit roller
ance roller
Cutter section entrance driven roller Timing belt Vertical conveyance
driven roller
Entrance driven Conveyance belt
rollers Trimmer section
Conveyance belt entrance roller
Booklet lead
roller
Conveyance Timing belt

belt
Conveyance Press section

belt conveyance roller(2)
Entrance conveyance
roller (1) Timing belt Conveyance belt
M101 (conveyance motor)
Press section convey-
Entrance conveyance roller (2) ance roller (1) Press section
REAR VIEW driven roller
[2] Stopper Drive/Stopper Release Drive Section
Stopper
Stopper
Timing belt
M103 (stopper motor) M104 (stopper release motor)
TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW
1-3
TMG011e.p65 3 00/10/09, 11:51

TMG-1
1 OUTLINE
[3] Press Drive Section
When pressing When press released
M105 (press motor)
Press section
REAR VIEW
[4] Pusher Plate Drive/Holder Plate Drive
Holder plate
Pusher plate
M107 (pusher motor)
Timing belt
M106 (holder motor)
FRONT VIEW
1-4
TMG011e.p65 4 00/10/09, 11:51

TMG-1
1 OUTLINE
TRIMMING PROCESS
The TMG-1 consists of a conveyance section, trimmer section, press section, and stacker section as shown below.
Stacker section Press section Trimmer section Conveyance section
Note: The trimming process differs between [2] Trimming Position Adjustment
the trim mode (booklet is cut) and the a. Trim mode
through mode (booklet is not cut). The booklet conveyed to the trimmer section is
Select either of these modes using the then conveyed to the press section thought the
operation panel of the main body. gap between the upper and lower knives (trimmer
[1] Booklet Conveyance section) because the upper knife is in the upper
The conveyance belt conveys the booklet ejected position.
from the FNS toward the trimmer with the folding The stopper provided in the press section
edge facing forward. normally stands upright. It moves to the standby
position specified for each paper size during the
Trimmer section initial process performed at the beginning of
Booklet stapling and folding copy operation. When the
Conveyance belt specified time lapsed after the PS101 (entrance)
is turned ON by the conveyed booklet, the stopper
initiates a fine adjustment movement according
to the number of booklet sheets and stops there.
The folding edge of the booklet conveyed from
the trimmer section is pressed against the
Conveyance stopper, then it stops when the specified time
belt lapses after the PS102 (conveyance) is turned
ON. Thus, the length in booklet feed
direction(from the folding edge to the trim edge)
is determined.
Folding edge
1-5
TMG011e.p65 5 00/10/09, 11:51

TMG-1
1 OUTLINE
Press section b. Through mode

Booklet press operation is not performed because
Upper blade the booklet is not trim in this mode.
[4] Trimming
a. Trim mode
After the press plate has pressed the booklet, the
upper knife moves down to trim the booklet.
Immediately after trimming the booklet, the upper
knife moves up to the standby position.
Paper scraps of the trim booklet are blown by the
PS102 (convey- M108 (scraps removal) provided in the entrance
Booklet of the conveyance section and collected in the
ance PS)
Stopper
PS101 (entrance PS) scraps box provided in the lower part of the cutter
section.
b. Through mode
The stopper provided in the press section stands
upright normally. In the through mode, the stopper M108 (scraps removal
is released at the start of the M101(conveyance), motor)
allowing the booklet to be conveyed toward the
stacker. Upper knife
[3] Booklet Press

a. Trim mode
The booklet stopped at the trimming position is
held by the press plate provided in the press
section when the specified time lapses after the Lower knife
PS102 (conveyance) is turned ON. This process
is necessary so that all pages of the booklets are
trimmed to the same size.
The press operation by the press plate continues
Booklet Scraps box
until the trimming of booklet edge completes in
the trimmer section.
b. Through mode
The booklet is not trim in this mode.
Press section
Booklet
Stopper PS102 (conveyance PS)
1-6
TMG011e.p65 6 00/10/09, 11:51

TMG-1
1 OUTLINE
[5] Press Release/Stopper Release [6] Booklet Ejection
a. Trim mode Normally, the pusher plate is positioned nearer
When trimming of the booklet is complete, the the exit tray than holder plate. The exit tray is pulled
press plate moves up and the pressurized booklet toward the pusher plate by the constant force
is released. At the same time, the stopper is spring. The booklet is stacked upright between
released, allowing the booklet to convey toward the pusher plate and the exit tray by the force of
the stacker. this spring.
Exit tray Pusher plate

Press plate Stacked booklets
Holder plate
Constant force
Stopper Booklet
spring
b. Through mode Booklet
Press release operation is not performed because
the booklet is not trim in this mode.
1-7
TMG011e.p65 7 00/10/09, 11:51

TMG-1
1 OUTLINE
a. Trim mode When the booklet ejection path is made with back-
When the stopper is released, the pusher plate ward movement of the pusher plate and release
moves backward to the turnout position to open of the press and stopper, the booklet conveyance
the booklet ejection path. is re-started again.
While the pusher plate is at the turnout position, When the booklet comes out of the vertical con-
the trimmed booklet is held stacked upright veyance roller, the holder plate moves down and
between the holder plate and the exit tray. the pusher plate moves forward.
Exit tray Pusher plate Pusher plate

Exit tray
Stacked booklets
Stacked booklets
Holder plate
Stopper Holder plate

Booklet
When M101(conveyance) turns ON, the stopper

is released.
When the pusher plate reaches the forward posi-
tion to hold the booklet between the pusher plate
and the exit tray, the holder plate starts moving
upward, stopping the upper limit position.
b. Through mode
When M101 (conveyance) Turns On, the stopper
is released.
When the booklet is detected in the entrance con-
veyance section, the pusher plate moves back to
the turnout position to open the booklet ejection
path.
The succeeding operation is the same as in the
trim mode. In the through mode, booklet convey-
ance does not stop temporarily because neither
the press operation nor trimming operation is not
performed in this mode.
1-8
TMG011e.p65 8 00/10/09, 11:51

2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2
UNIT EXPLANATION
TMG020e.p65 1 00/10/09, 11:52

2 UNIT EXPLANATION
TMG020e.p65 2 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
EXTERNAL SECTION
[1] Composition
Stacker section Stacker door
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Top cover
Front door
Conveyance door
[2] Mechanisms *2 Paper scraps collection/removal

Paper scraps of the trimmed booklet are collected
Mechanism Method
in the scraps box. To remove the collected paper
*1 Jam removal Front door
scraps, open the front door and draw out the
Conveyance door
scraps box with holding the scraps box draw
Jam clear knob lever.
Press release lever
*2 Paper scraps collec- Scraps box
tion/removal
*1 Jam removal
To remove the paper jammed at the entrance of
the conveyance section, open the front door and
conveyance door and turn the jam clear knob.
To remove the paper jammed in the press
section, open the front door and move the press
release lever upward.
Scraps box
Front door draw lever Scraps box
Press release
lever
Front door Jam clear knob
Conveyance door
2-1
TMG021e.p65 1 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
CONVEYANCE SECTION
[1] Composition
Press section driven rollers
Vertical conveyance roller Trimmer section entrance driven roller
Conveyance belt
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Entrance driven roller
Conveyance belt
Conveyance belt
Booklet lead roller
Press section rollers (2) Entrance conveyance

rollers (1)
PS108 (exit PS) Conveyance belt

Conveyance belt Trimmer section
entrance roller Entrance conveyance
PS102 (conveyance PS) Press section conveyance roller (2)
roller (1) M101 (conveyance motor)
[2] Mechanisms [3] Conveyance Control

Mechanism Method
TUDB 5V
Conveyance M101 (conveyance) for BLK
CONT
drive driving all components of CLK
PLL
F/R M101
conveyance drive section 24V
24V
Entrance Booklet lead roller P.G
P.G
conveyance Entrance conveyance rollers
(1) and (2) 5V
IN PS102
Entrance driven roller GND
M101_CONT
Conveyance belt M101_CLK
M101_BLK 5V
Trimmer section Trimmer section entrance roller M101_PLL
M101_F/R
IN
GND
PS108
PS102_SIG
conveyance Trimmer section entrance PS108_SIG
M105_CONT
driven roller 24V
M105
Press section Press section conveyance FNS
DRV
conveyance rollers (1) and (2)

Press section driven rollers Booklets are conveyed by transferring the drive force
Conveyance belt of the M101(conveyance) to rollers.
Vertical Vertical conveyance roller The M101 is driven by the TUDB (TU drive board) under
conveyance the control of the FNS. Related signals are PS102
(conveyance), and PS108 (exit).
2-2
TMG021e.p65 2 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
1. Operation 2. Signals
There are two types of conveyance operations: a. Input signals
entrance and ejected booklet conveyance. These (1) PS102_SIG (PS102 to TUDB to FNS)
conveyance operations differ between the trim This signal is used to detect a conveyed booklet
mode (booklet is cut) and the through mode in the press section.
(booklet is not cut). [L]: Booklet exists.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Booklet does not exist.
a. Entrance conveyance (2) PS108_SIG (PS108 to TUDB to FNS)
(1) Trim mode This signal is used to detect ejection of a booklet
When the M20 (folding conveyance) of the FNS at the entrance of the holder section.
is turned ON, the M101(conveyance) is turned [L]: Booklet exists.
ON to convey the booklet ejected from the FNS [H]: Booklet does not exist.
to the entrance conveyance section at a speed (3) M101_PLL (M101 to TUDB to FNS)
of 580 mm/s. M101 rotation monitoring signal
The M101 turns OFF to stop conveying the book- [L]: Stopped or locked
let when the specified time lapses after the PS102 [H]: Rotaing at the specified speed
(conveyance) provided in the press section is (4) M105_CONT (FNS to TUDB)
turned ON by detecting the leading edge ( folding M105 ON/OFF control signal.
edge) of the booklet. [L]: M105 ON
The folding edge of the booklet is pressed against [H]: M105 OFF
the stopper provided in the press section, allowing b. Output signals
the booklet to be trimming. (1) M101_CONT (FNS to TUDB to M101)
(2) Through mode M101 ON/OFF control signal.
The M101 is turned ON at the same timing as in [L]: M101 ON
the trim mode. [H]: M101 OFF
In the through mode, booklet conveyance does (2) M101_CLK (FNSto TUDB to M101)
not stop temporarily for trimming; ejected booklet This is a reference clock signal used to perform
conveyance starts without turning OFF the M101. PLL control over the M101.
b. Ejected booklet conveyance (3) M101_F/R (FNS to TUDB to M101)
(1) Trim mode M101 rotational direction change signal.
When the M105(press) stops pressing the press [L]: Reverse
plate after the completion of trimming, the M101 [H]: Forward
turns ON again to convey the trimmed booklet (4) M101_BLK (FNS to TUDB to M101)
toward the stacker section and eject it. M101 brake signal.
When the PS108 (exit) provided at the entrance [L]: Brake ON
of the holder section is turned OFF by detecting [H]: Brake OFF
the trailing edge (trim edge) of the conveyed book-
let, the M101 turns OFF to stop conveying the
booklet, allowing the next booklet to be conveyed.
(2) Through mode
The M101 is held ON from the moment the book-
let enters the entrance conveyance section to the
moment it reaches the stacker section.
The M101 is turned OFF at the same timing as in
the trim mode.
2-3
TMG021e.p65 3 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
PRESS SECTION
[1] Composition
Press section
driven rollers Trimmer section exit roller
Press section M104 (stopper release motor)
conveyance roller (2) Press section
conveyance roller (1) Timing belt
PS103 (stopper
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
HP PS)
Press section
conveyance roller (1)
M105
(press motor)
M103
PS105 (press HP PS) (stopper motor)
Conveyance
belt Conveyance belt
Press section
PS102 (conveyance PS) PS104 conveyance roller (2)
M104 (stopper release motor) (stopper release HP PS)
M103 (stopper motor) PS102 (conveyance PS)
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method Stopper Booklet
Conveyance Press section
conveyance rollers (1)
and (2) Timing belt
Press section driven
roller
Conveyance belt
*1 Stopper drive Timing belt
*1 Stopper release Movable stopper plate
*2 Booklet press Guide plate

pressurization
*1 Stopper drive/release
The length of the booklet to be trimmed in the M103 (stopper motor)
feed direction is determined by the position of
the stopper provided in the press section. The
stopper is secured to the timing belt and moved
horizontally by the M103 (stopper).
2-4
TMG021e.p65 4 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
When a booklet arrives from the press section, [3] Stopper/Press Control
the stopper is released by the M104 (stopper
release) to allow the booklet to be conveyed to 5V
TUDB IN
the next section. GND
PS101
24V
24V
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Press section conveyance roller (2) DRV A
M103
DRV A
DRV B
Stopper DRV B
Booklet
24V
M104
DRV
5V
IN PS102
GND
5V
IN PS103
GND
Conveyance belt 5V
Press section IN PS104
conveyance GND
roller (1)
24V
M103_A M105
M104 (stopper release motor) M103_A DRV
M103_B
M103_B
M104_CONT 5V
M105_CONT IN PS105
PS101_SIG GND
*2 Booklet press PS102_SIG
PS103_SIG
The press plate is pressed against the booklet PS104_SIG
PS108_SIG 5V
IN PS108
to hold it so that all pages of the booklets are FNS GND
trimmed to the same size. The press plate is

driven by the M105 (press).
To move the stopper horizontally, the M103(stopper)
Press section driven roller drives the timing belt to which the stopper is secured.
Conveyance belt To release the stopper, the drive force of the M104
Press plate (stopper release) is transferred via gears.
To press the booklet, the drive force of the M105 (press)
M105 is transferred to the press plate via gears and linkages.
(press motor)
The M103,M104 and M105 are driven by the TUDB
(TU drive board) under the control of the FNS.
Related signals are PS101 (entrance), PS102 (booklet
conveyance), PS103 (stopper HP), PS104 (stopper
release HP), PS105 (press HP), and PS108 (exit).
Rear end
stopper
Booklet
PS105
(press HP PS)
2-5
TMG021e.p65 5 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
1. Operation (2) Through mode

The press operation is performed only in the trim When M101(conveyance) turns ON, the M104
mode (booklet is cut); it is not performed in the turns ON to release the stopper, allowing the
through mode (booklet is not cut). booklet to be conveyed through.
a. Stopper movement e. Stopper setting

2 UNIT EXPLANATION
The stopper moves to the standby position speci- When the PS108 (exit) detects the trailing edge
fied for each paper size during the initial process (trim edge) of the booklet conveyed for ejection,
performed at the beginning of stapling and folding the M104 turns ON again. Then, the M104 turns
copy operation by FNS. In the trim mode, when OFF when the PS104 (stopper release HP) turns
the specified time lapsed after the PS101 (en- ON, thus the stopper stands uprght.
trance) is turned ON by detecting the leading edge f. Stopper movement to home position
(folding edge) of the conveyed booklet, the M103 When the last booklet ejection process is com-
(stopper) turns ON again and the stopper takes pleted in the stacker section, the M103 turns ON
fine adjustment movement. (to adjust it to the again to move the stopper to the home position.
number of booklet sheets in order to trim the book- When the home position is detected by the PS103
let exact regardless of the number of sheets.) (stopper HP), the M103 turns OFF.
Then, the folding edge of the conveyed booklet is
pressed against the stopper to position the book- 2. Signals
let at the trimming position. a. Input signals
For wide paper and the through mode, stopper's (1) PS101_SIG (PS101 to TUDB to FNS)
fine adjustment movement is not taken. This signal is used to detect a conveyed booklet
b. Booklet press at the entrance of the conveyance section.
When the PS102(conveyance) detects the lead- [L]: Booklet exists.
ing edge (folding edge) of the conveyed booklet, [H]: Booklet does not exists
conveyance stops after lapse of the specified time (2) PS103_SIG (PS103 to TUDB to FS-108BM)
and at the same time the M105(press) turns ON This signal is used to detect the lateral home
to pressurize the booklet. position of the stopper.
The booklet is pressurized for the specified pe- [L]: Home position
riod of time to complete trimming. The stopper [H]: Other than home position
returns to the stand by position determined for (3) PS104_SIG (PS104 to TUDB to FNS)
the size of booklet This signal is used to detect the posture of the
c. Press release stopper.
When trimming is complete, the M105 turns ON [L]: Upright
again to release the booklet press . At the same [H]: Release
time the M104 (stopper release) turns ON to re- (4) PS105_SIG (PS105 to TUDB to FNS)
lease the stopper. This signal is used to detect the home position of
Upon detection of the home position by the press plate.
PS105(press HP), the M105 turns OFF to enter [L]: Home position
the standby state. [H]: Other than home position
d. Stopper release (5) DRV (TUDB to M105)
(1) Trim mode M105 drive signal
After completion of trimming, the M104 is ON unit [L]: M105 ON
PS104(stopper release HP) is turned OFF to [H]: M105 OFF
release the stopper, allowing the booklet to be (6) M103_A, A (FNS to TUDB)
ejected. This signal is used to control the A-phase of the
M103.
(7) M103_B, B (FNS to TUDB)
This signal is used to control the B-phase of the
M103.
2-6
TMG021e.p65 6 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
(8) M104_CONT (FNS to TUDB)

M104 ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: M104 ON
[H]: M104 OFF
b. Output signals
(1) DRV A, A (TUDB to M103)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
This signal is used to drive the A-phase of the
M103.
(2) DRV B, B (TUDB to M103)
This signal is used to drive the B-phase of the
M103.
(3) DRV (TUDB to M104)
M104 drive signal
[L]: M104 ON
[H]: M104 OFF
2-7
TMG021e.p65 7 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
TRIMMER SECTION
[1] Composition
Upper knife
Trimmer section driven roller

2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Trimmer section entrance roller M108 (scraps removal motor)
LED101
(scraps box full LED)
PS109
(scraps box full PS)
Lower knife
M102 (trimmer motor) Scraps box
PS106 (trimmer HP PS)
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method Upper knife
Conveyance Trimmer section entrance roller
Trimmer section driven roller
*1 Trimming Upper-kuife-reciprocating-
type trimmer
*2 Paper scraps Blow by fan
removal Paper scraps box
*1 Trimming
The lower knife is fixed and the upper knife moves
vertically to trim a booklet. The upper knife is
driven by the M102 (trimmer). Normally, it stays Booklet
M102 (trimmer motor) Lower knife
at the home position (upper position).
*2 Paper scraps removal

Paper scraps of the cut booklet are blown by the
scraps removal fan driven by M108(scraps
removal) and collected in the scraps box provided
in the lower part of the trimmer section.
2-8
TMG021e.p65 8 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
[3] Trimmer Control b. Output signals

TUDB DRV M102 drive control signal.
M102
DRV The rotational direction of the M102 is controlled
according to the combination of the levels of two
DRVs.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
IN
GND PS106
24V
M105
DRV
M102_CONT
M102_F/R
M105_CONT
PS106_SIG
FNS
The upper knife is driven by the M102 (trimmer).

Normally, the upper knife is held at the upper position
(no trimming position). It is supervised by the PS106
(trimmer HP) at all times.
The M102 is driven by the TUDB (TU drive board) under
the control of the FNS.
1. Operation
When the M105 (press) stops pressuring the
booklet, the M102 starts turning forward to move
the upper knife down to trim the booklet and then
upward to release it.
The PS106 is used to detect the home position
of the upper knife.
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) PS106_IN (PS106 to TUDB to FNS)
This signal is used to detect the home position of
the upper knife.
[L]: Home position
[H]: Other than home position
(2) M102_CONT (FNS to TUDB)
M102 and M108 ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: M102/M108 ON
[H]: M102/M108 OFF
(3) M102_F/R (FNS to TUDB)
M102 rotational direction change signal.
[L]: Reverse
[H]: Forward
2-9
TMG021e.p65 9 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
[4] Scraps Removal Control (3) LD (M108 to TUDB)

M108 error detection signal.
TUDB 24V [H]: Error
LD M108
GND (4) SCAN OUT1, 2 (FNS to TUDB)
Serial data line used to report the operating state
5V
IN PS107 of the FNS to the TU-108.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
GND
b. Output signals
5V (1) GND (TUDB to M108)
LED101
GND M108 drive signal.
SCAN OUT 1 [L]: M108 ON
SCAN OUT 2 IN
GND
PS109 [H]: M108 OFF
M102_CONT
(2) SCAN IN1, 2 (TUDB to FNS)
SCAN IN 1
SCAN IN 2 Serial data line used to report the operating state
of this machine to the FNS.
FNS
Paper scraps are blown by the scraps removal fan

driven by M108(scraps removal) and collected in the
scraps box. The scraps box is provided with an LED101
(scraps full LED) and a PS109 (scraps full). When the
scraps box becomes full, the full state is displayed on
the operation panel of the main body.
The M108 is driven by the TUDB (TU drive board) under
the control of the FNS. The related signal is a PS107
(scraps box detect).
1. Operation
a. Scraps removal motor operation
The M108 turns ON/OFF in sync. with the M102
(trimmer).
b. Scraps box full state detection
When the sraps box is filled with scraps, the light
path between the LED101 and the PS109 which
are provided on both sides of the scraps box is
blocked to turn OFF the PS109. Thus, the mes-
sage indicating that the scraps box is full is dis-
played on the main body.
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) IN (PS107 to TUDB)
Scraps box setting detection signal.
[L]: Scraps box is set.
[H]: Scraps box is not set.
(2) IN (PS109 to TUDB)
Scraps box full state detection signal.
[L]: Not full
[F]: Full
2 - 10
TMG021e.p65 10 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
STACKER SECTION
[1] Composition
PS114 (stacker door PS) Pusher plate
PS110 PS108
M107 (pusher motor) (upper limit PS) (exit PS)
Stacker door
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
PS112 (pusher PS)
Vertical
conveyance roller
Timing belt
MS3 (stacker MS3) Holder plate

PS113 (stacker full PS) PS111
M106 (lower limit PS)
MS4 (stacker MS4) (holder motor)
[2] Mechanisms to move the holder plate downward.

Furthermore, the pusher plate moves forward
Mechanism Method
after the specified period of time to push the
Conveyance Vertical conveyance roller
newly ejected booklet out of the booklet ejection
*1 Booklet ejection Holder plate
path. Thus, the booklet is stacked upright
Pusher plate
between the pusher plate and the exit tray.
*2 Upright stack Exit tray
When the specified time lapses after the pusher
Constan force spring
plate stops, the holder plate moves to the upper
*1 Booklet ejection limit position.
Normally, the pusher plate is at the forward
position to hold the booklet upright with it pressed Exit tray Pusher plate
against the exit tray pulled by the constant force Stacked booklets M107
(pusher motor)
spring.
At this position, the pusher plate blocks the
booklet ejection path.
When the booklet ejection process starts, the
M107 (pusher) moves the pusher plate back to
the turnout position, opening the booklet ejection
path. At this time, the booklet is stacked upright
between the exit tray and the holder plate located
at the upper limit position.
The booklet conveyed from the press section is
then ejected by the vertical conveyance roller. Holder plate
When the PS108 (exit) detects the trailing edge
Constant force
of the booklet, conveyance stops. After the spring
specified period of time, the M106 (holder) rotates
M106 (holder motor)
Booklet
2 - 11
TMG021e.p65 11 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
*2 Upright stack [3] Booklet Ejection/Stack Control

The ejected booklet is stacked upright between
the exit tray and the pusher plate. The exit tray is TUDB 5V
IN PS101
pressed against the pusher plate by the force of GND
the constant force spring. 5V

IN PS114
GND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Pusher plate 5V
Exit tray IN
GND
PS113
Stacked booklets 5V
IN PS108
GND
5V
IN PS110
GND
5V
IN PS111
GND
5V
IN PS112
GND
M106_CONT
M106_F/R MS3
DRV
M107_CONT M107
DRV
PS110_SIG
PS111_SIG
PS112_SIG MS4
Constant DRV
force spring M106
DRV
FNS
Holder plate
The holder plate is driven by the M106 (holder) via the
timing belt. The pusher plate is driven by the M107
When the pusher plate is at the turnout position
(pusher) via gears. The M106 and M107 are driven by
to open the booklet ejection path, the booklet is
the TUDB (TU drive board) under the control of the
held stacked upright between the exit tray and
FNS. The related signals are PS101 (entrance), PS108
the holder plate.
(exit), PS110 (upper limit), PS111 (lower limit), PS112
(pusher), PS113 (stacker full) and PS114 (stacker
Exit tray Pusher plate door).
Stacked booklet
1. Operation
The ejection/stack operation differs between the
trim mode (booklet is cut) and through mode
(booklet is not cut).
a. Preparaton of booklet ejection to the stacker

(1) Trim mode
When the specified time lapses after trimming has
completed and stopper release operation started,
the M107 turns ON to move the pusher plate to
the turnout position to open the booklet ejection
Holder plate path.
2 - 12
TMG021e.p65 12 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
(2) Through mode 2. Signals

When the PS101 (entrance) detects the leading a. Input signals
edge (folding edge) of the conveyed booklet, the (1) PS110_SIG (PS110 to TUDB to FNS)
M107(pusher) turns ON to move the pusher plate Holder plate upper limit detection signal.
to the turnout position to open the booklet ejection [L]: Other than upper limit
path. [H]: Upper limit
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
b. Booklet ejection to stacker (2) PS111_SIG (PS111 to TUDB to FNS)
(1) Trim mode Holder plate lower limit detection signal.
When the specified time lapses after the PS108 [L]: Other than lower limit
(exit) detects the trailing edge (trim edge) of the [H]: Lower limit
booklet conveyed by the M101(conveyance), the (3) PS112_SIG (PS112 to TUDB to FNS)
M106(holder) starts reversing to lower the holder Pusher plate home position detection signal.
plate. When the PS111(lower limit) detects the [L]: Home position
lower limit of the holder plate, the M106 turns OFF. [H]: Other than home position
When the specified time lapses after the (4) IN (PS113 to TUDB)
M106(holder) turns ON, the M107 turns ON again Stacker full state detection signal.
to drive the pusher plate to push out the booklet [L]: Full
in the holder section to the exit tray. [H]: Not full
When the specified time lapses after the booklet (5) M106_CONT (FNS to TUDB)
is pushed out by the pusher plate, the M106 ro- M106 ON/OFF control signal.
tates in the forward direction to raise the holder [L]: M106 ON
plate. When the PS110(upper limit) detects the [H]: M106 OFF
upper limit position of the holder plate, the M106 (6) M106_F/R (FNS to TUDB)
stops rotating in the forward direction, thus com- M106 rotational direction change signal.
pleting booklet ejection. [L]: M106 Forward
(2) Through mode [H]: M106 Reverse
The operation in the through mode is the same (7) M107_CONT (FNS to TUDB)
as in the trim mode. M107 ON/OFF control signal.
c. Upright stack/stacker full state detection [L]: M107 ON
The booklet pushed out of the booklet ejection [H]: M107 OFF
path is stacked upright between the pusher plate b. Output signals
and the exit tray. When the total thickness of the (1) DRV (TUDB to M106)
stacked booklets becomes the specified value, M106 drive control signal.
the PS113(stacker full) turns ON to display the The rotational direction of the M106 is controlled
message indicating that the stacker is full on the according to the combination of the levels of two
operation panel of the main body. DRVs.
d. Safety mechanism
State DRV DRV
If the stacker door is opened while this machine
Holder moves down H L
is operating, the MS3 and MS4 turn OFF to block
Holder moves up L H
the drive signal paths of the M106 and M107,
Stop L L
causing this machine the to stop operating.
At this time, PS114(stacker door) also turns OFF
to display an error message on the operation
M107 drive control signal.
panel of the main body.
2 - 13
TMG021e.p65 13 00/10/09, 11:52

TMG-1
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2 - 14
TMG021e.p65 14 00/10/09, 11:52

3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
TMG030e.p65 1 00/10/09, 11:53

This section explains how to disassemble and reassemble the machine.
When disassembling and reassembling the machine, follow the precau-
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
tions given below.

1. Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
2. The disassembled parts must be reassembled following the disas-
sembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified.
3. Care should be taken not to lose small parts. Care should also be
taken not to install small parts in wrong places.
4. Do not operate the machine before installing all the disassembled
parts completely.
5. Removal of some screws is prohibited in this section. Never loosen
them.
TMG030e.p65 2 00/10/09, 11:53

TMG-1
TRIMMER SECTION
[1] Replacing the Upper and Lower (5) Remove the three screws to detach the roller
Knives cover.
Caution: (6) Disconnect the relay connector (CN418) and
1. Be sure to unplug the power cords of the release the wiring harness from cable clamps.
main body, and this machine from the wall (7) Remove the two springs.
out let. (8) Remove the two screws at the front and the two
2. Trimming knives (upper and lower) are screws at the back to remove the entrance con-
used in this machine. Be extremely veyance roller unit.
careful in handling these knives.
Roller cover Relay connector (CN418)
a. Procedure
(1) Open the front door and conveyance door. Cable clamps
(2) Remove the four screws to detach the top cover.
Wiring harness
Top cover Screws Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
Screws Springs
Entrance
conveyance
driven roller unit
Front door Conveyance door
(9) Remove the E-ring and bearing at the front and
the E-ring and bearing at the back to remove the
(3) Remove the securing screw of cable clamp which
trimmer section entrance driven roller.
holds the power cable, then unplug the the power
plug. Trimmer section
(4) Loosen the three lower screws, then remove the entrance driven
three upper screws to detach the rear cover. roller
Upper screws
E-rings Bearings
(front and (front and
back) back)
Front door
Lower screws (loosen)
3-1
TMG031e.p65 1 00/10/09, 11:53

TMG-1
(10) Remove the four hexagon socket head bolts to (12) Remove the four hexagon socket head bolts to
remove the upper knife. remove the lower knife.
Caution 1: Remove the upper knife holding the Caution 1: Remove the lower knife holding the
two handles. fitting at the front and the corner at
Caution 2: Take care not to drop the upper knife the back.
or chip the knife by hitting a solid Caution 2: Take care not to drop the lower knife
component. or chip the knife by hitting a solid
component.
Hexagon socket head bolts Caution 3: To install the lower knife, insert it with
its holes aligned with the four guide
pins.
Handles
Lower knife Rear side corner

3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Upper knife
(11) Loosen the stopper screw temporarily to turn

down the conveyance guide plate. Then, tighten
Fitting Hexagon socket head bolts
the stopper screw to prevent the guide plate from
returning to the original position.
Caution: Do not touch the three screws that
should not be removed.
Screws that
should not
be removed
Stopper Guide pins

screw
Conveyance guide plate
3-2
TMG031e.p65 2 00/10/09, 11:53

4
ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
TMG040e.p65 1 00/10/09, 11:54

TMG040e.p65 2 00/10/09, 11:54

TMG-1 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
TUDB
TU drive board PS110
Upper limit PS
DCPS
M101 DC power supply unit
Conveyance motor
PS111
Lower limit PS
PS107
Scraps box detection PS M106
Holder motor
Coil
RL2 RL1 CBR
Relay 2 Relay 1 Circuit breaker
PS113 P112
MS4 Stacker full PS
Stacker MS4 Pusher PS
M107
PS114 Pusher motor
Stacker door PS
M108
Scraps removal motor
LED101
Scraps full LED
PS109
Scraps full PS
MS3

Stacker MS3
PS108
Exit PS PS101
Entrance PS
MS2
Front door MS
M105 M102
Press motor Trimmer motor
PS105 PS106
Press HP PS Trimmer HP PS
PS103 M103
Stopper HP PS Stopper motor
PS102
Conveyance PS
M104
Stopper release motor
PS104
Stopper release HP PS
4-1
TMG041e.p65 1 00/10/09, 11:54

TMG-1 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
437 (W:2pin)
438 (W:3pin)
435 (W:3pin)
460 (W:3pin)
491 (W:15pin)
438 (W:3pin)
492 (W:14pin)
493 (BK:10pin) 461 (W:3pin)
411 (W:11pin) 416 (BK:2pin)

456 (W:3pin) 490 (W:2pin)
452 (W:3pin)
458 (W:3pin)
417 (BK:2pin)
459 (W:3pin) 455 (W:3pin)
459 (W:2pin)
470 (W:2pin)
451 (W:3pin)
458 (W:3pin)
415 (BK:2pin)
412 (W:2pin)
456 (W:3pin)
153 (W:3pin)
413 (W:6pin) 452 (W:3pin)
414 (W:2pin)
454 (W:3pin)
404 (GY:18pin)
405 (W:4pin)
402 (GY:28pin) 406 (GY:20pin)
403 (W:5pin)
401 (GY:40pin) 408 (W:3pin)
409 (W:4pin) 407 (W:2pin)
TUDB
4-2
TMG042e.p65 2 00/10/09, 11:54

TMG04ce.p65
Time (sec)
Symbol Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TIMING CHART
M20 Folding conveyance motor(FNS)
M101 Conveyance motor

PS101 Entrance PS
Set Release
M103 Stopper motor 200ms
PS102 Conveyance PS
51.71S 43.14S
A
M105 Press motor
Set
M102 Trimmer motor Press Release
4
stopper
press
M104 Stopper release motor
Release Lowering
50ms 200ms
stopper
M106 Holder motor
460ms 200ms
M107 Pusher motor
16 SHEETS, 2 SETS)
Raising
Release Set
pusher pusher
PS108 Exit PS
1st set starts
Paper size position movement starts
4-3
(sec) Time (sec)
77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 Item Symbol
Folding conveyance motor(FNS) M20
Conveyance motor M101

Entrance PS PS101
Release
Set
200ms Stopper motor M103
Conveyance PS PS102
476ms
A
Press motor M105
Set
Press Release Trimmer motor M102
stopper
press
Stopper release motor M104
Release Lowering
50ms 200ms
stopper
Holder motor M106
460ms 200ms
Raising Pusher motor M107
Release Set
pusher
00/10/09, 11:56
pusher
Exit PS PS108
2nd set starts

TMG-1 TIMING CHART (TRIM MODE, A3 or 11 x 17,
TMG04ce.p65
Time (sec)
Symbol Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M20 Folding conveyance motor(FNS)
M101 Conveyance motor

PS101 Entrance PS
M103 Stopper motor

SHEETS,2SETS)
PS102 Conveyance PS
51.71S 45.82S
5
A
M105 Press motor
Set
M102 Trimmer motor stopper
M104 Stopper release motor
Lowering
200ms
Release
M106 Holder motor stopper
460ms 200ms
M107 Pusher motor Raising
Release Set
pusher pusher
PS108 Exit PS
1st set starts
Paper size position movement starts
4-4
(sec)
Time (sec)
77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 Item Symbol
Folding conveyance motor(FNS) M20
Conveyance motor M101

Entrance PS PS101
Stopper motor M103
Conveyance PS PS102
45.82S 476ms
A
Press motor M105
Set
stopper Trimmer motor M102
Stopper release motor M104
Lowering
200ms
Release
stopper M106
Holder motor
00/10/09, 11:56
460ms 200ms
Raising M107
Pusher motor
Release Set
pusher pusher
Exit PS PS108
2nd set starts

TMG-1 TIMING CHART (THROUGH MODE,A3 or 11 x 17,16
TIMING CHART

ISW
(In-System Writer)
SERVICE MANUAL
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS .................. 1.OUTLINE
Refer to the Di750 service manual on page C-1 INTRODUCING ISW ............................................... 1-1
WHAT IS ISW Trns (ISW Transfer)? ........................ 1-1
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................... 1-2
[1] ISW Trns (PC Software) .............................. 1-2
2.OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns ................................... 2-1
[1] Setting Up ISW Trns ................................... 2-1
[2] Copying Transfer Data (Update Data) ....... 2-6
[3] Connecting ................................................. 2-7
[4] Updating ..................................................... 2-7
ISW Trns MESSAGES ........................................... 2-12
TROUBLESHOOTING ISW Trns ........................... 2-14
CONTENTS
1
OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
ISW
1 OUTLINE
INTRODUCING ISW
ISW (In-System Writer) is a process of updating the control programs stored in flash ROM mounted on various
control boards in a Minolta digital copier without isolating the boards or the ROM from the copier. Running ISW
enables you to upgrade control programs without replacing the boards and maintain the boards during their
replacement.
The tools available for running ISW include ISW Trns (PC software), which connects a personal computer (PC) to the
digital copier.
The parallel cable can be plugged into the ISW connector of the digital copier to update the control programs in flash
ROM assembled in the copier unit and its options.
WHAT IS ISW Trns (ISW Transfer)?

ISW Trns is a software utility that runs under Windows to rewrite the flash ROMs in the copier. Connect the copier
to a personal computer using a parallel cable and execute this utility to rewrite the flash ROMs with data transferred
Parallel
Windows PC
cable
Copier
1-1
ISW
1 OUTLINE
SPECIFICATIONS
from the personal computer.
[1] ISW Trns (PC Software)
1. ISW Trns disk organization
• Setup disk: 2 disks
• Update disk: Dependent on the copier.
2. Software environment
• OS: Windows 95/98
• CPU: Pentium 75 MHz or faster
• RAM: 16 MB or more
• Hard disk 100 MB or more
space:
• Others: PC supporting a parallel (printer)
interface port
3. Transfer time
Dependent on the copier and personal computer.
4. Prerequisites to running ISW

• Personal computer (PC): 1 unit
IBM compatible (PC/AT with a D-sub 25 pin
Parallel (printer) interface)
• ISW Trns setup disk: 2 disks
• Update ROM data: Dependent on the
copier.
• Parallel cable: 1 (Anphenol 36-pin-D-sub 25-
pin; Centronics; within 2 meters in length)
Windows 95/98 is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
1-2
2
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
ISW
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns

[1] Setting Up ISW Trns 2. Setting up ISW Trns
1. Installing the application program When the ISW Trns program has been installed
Install the ISW Trns on the PC. on the PC, run it to set up a folder in which the
transfer file (update data) is stored. When this
Step Procedure setting completes, the ISW Trns program is ready
1 Boot the PC. to run.
2 Mount setup disk 1 on the PC and
double-click the [Setup.exe] icon to start Step Procedure
the installer. 1 Boot the PC.
Caution: If an old version ISW Trns 2 Select [ISW Trns] from the start menu
program is present, uninstall to run the ISW Trns program.
it first, then start the setup 3 [ISW Trns dialog box]
operation.
3 [ISW Trns setup window]
Confir m the installation folder as
instructed by on-screen guidance and
click Next.
Note 1: By default, the program Click OK to set up a folder in which the
installs in [C:\Program transfer file (update data) is stored.
File\ISWTrns]. Note: This dialog box will not appear
Note 2: To change the installation when ISW Trns is run next time.
folder, click Browse and type 4 [Option window]
a new folder name.
4 [Program folder confirmation window]
Confir m the ISW Tr ns program
installation folder as instructed by on-
screen guidance and click Next.
Note 1: By default, the ISW Tr ns
program installs in [ISWTrns].
Note 2: To change the installation
folder, either type a new folder
name or select one from the Set up a folder in which the transfer file
list of existing folders on (update data) is stored and click Make
display. Folder.
5 [Next disk insertion request window] Note 1: By default, the folder in which
Mount setup disk 2 as instructed by on- the ISW Trns program has
screen guidance and click OK. installed (C:\Program
6 [Information dialog box] File\ISWTrns) has been set up
Click OK as instructed by on-screen as a storage folder (data
guidance. folder).
Note: This procedure will add an ISW Note 2: To change the storage folder,
Trns icon to the Start menu. click Browse and select a new
7 [Setup completion window] folder or type its full-path name
Click Complete as instructed by on- directly in the edit box.
screen guidance.
8 The ISW Trns install exits automatically.
2-1
ISW
Step Procedure
Note 3: Clicking Make Folder will cre-
ate the following hierarchy of
folders branching off from the
new storage folder:
Note: Pctrl and Vif Indications must

not be utilized.
5. [Option window]
Click OK.
Note: This procedure will save the
data folders created in Step 4
to the INI file for the ISW Trns
program.
6 [ISW Trns main window]
The ISW Trns main window opens.
2-2
ISW
3. ISW Trns Main Window Overview

The ISW Trns program comes up with the ISW Trns main window. The ISW Trns main window lets you select,
verify, and transfer a transfer file (update data) and display information in it. A detailed description of its
functions follows:
➀ Select Type frame
Select conditions for a transfer file (update data). When you select all the four combo boxes, folder ➄ is
set up on the basis of the information set in the INI file.
The settings of the combo boxes selected are saved to the ISW Trns.INI file when you click File Send.
The ISW Trns program comes up with the ISW Trns main window prefilled with these combo box settings
when runs next time.
➁ Version selection frame

This frame lets you select which version of a transfer file you want transmitted when more than one
version is stored in a single folder.
➂ Send file information frame

List the files that are transferred on the actual basis of the information specified in frames ➀ and ➁. Click
File Check to view a checksum of each file and its consistency (OK, NG or ??).
➃ File Status frame

View detailed information about the version file as it is selected in ➅.
The table below presents differences in the ways transfer files are displayed according to their data
distribution types.
2-3
ISW
Data sources appearing in the detailed file information list
Display title ORIGINAL (Batch data) DIVIDE (Divided data)

File Name File name of the version selection file File name of the version selection file
File Date Date of the version selection file Date of the version selection file
File Time Time of the version selection file Time of the version selection file
File Size File size of the version selection file File size of the version selection file
ROM Version Footer information Footer information (last file)
SP ROM Footer information Footer information (last file)
Version
Message For development use For development use
Conversion
Machine Name Header information + INI file Header information + INI file
Country Combo box display Combo box display
Board Name Header information + INI file Header information + INI file
Data Format Header information (Binary) Header information (Binary)
➄ Version Folder edit box ➆ Browse Version File button

When Select Type frame ➀ is established, the Click Browse button to open the folder
full-path folder name is displayed to reflect selection window and select a folder for ➄.
the data folder and the INI file information set
up in the option window. If the transfer file ➇ Send file information display list
exists in a folder different from the data folder, List the names of files that are actually
change the folder name to that folder by using transmitted when a version file is selected in
Browse ➆ or rewriting the folder name directly. ➅. A count of the number of files that are
actually transmitted is indicated in a
Those transfer files in the folder that meet checksum file attached to each transfer file
the INI file conditions are listed in File list box (write data). If not all the transfer files are
➅. stored in folder ➄ or if extra files are included
in it, the error message “Send files not found
➅ Version File selection list box or invalid file name in the folder” is displayed.
Lists those display files existing in the folder This check is not made.
set in ➄. Clicking the File Check button in ➈ calculates
a checksum of the display files as a whole
Display Files are marked by a wildcard name and compares it with the checksum stored in
(such as 26nac*.b01) in the ISWTrns.INI file. the checksum file (*.SUM) attached to the
If multiple versions of a file exist in the folder, transfer file (write data), displaying the result
multiple versions would appear in this list box of that comparison.
accordingly.
Example: 26nac001AAA.bol
26nac002AAA.bol
The files in this list are sorted by name. When

the list opens, the last display item in the list
is preselected. Change the choice to
establish the version of transfer files to
transmit.
2-4
ISW
➈ File Check button Step Procedure

Click this button when send files are listed in 1 Boot the PC.
the Send File Info list in ➇, and a file checksum 2 Open the System icon in the Control
of the transfer files displayed (file checksum) Panel and click the Device Manager tab.
is calculated and attached to each file. Then, search for LPT1 in Ports (COM/
Fur ther, the calculated checksum is LPT1).
compared with the checksum storage file Note 1: If LPT1 appears as “ECP
(*.SUM) attached to the transfer file (write Printer Port (LPT1),” then it is
data) to display the result of the comparison an ECP port.
in the following format: Note 2: If LPT1 appears as “Printer
Port (LPT1),” then it is a
[OK] = Matched regular parallel port.
[NG] = Unmatched 3 With an ECP printer port, change the
[??] = Checksum file (*.SUM) not found BIOS setting of the PC to disable the
ECP port.
➉ File Send Button Note: Because the BIOS setting
Perform transmission of transfer files depends on the PC, check with
your system administrator on
4. Parallel port setup how to disable ECP mode.
If a parallel data transfer is to be executed with 4 When the BIOS change is complete,
the ISW Trns program, the ECP mode setting of open the System icon in the Control
the PC parallel port should be cleared. ISW Trns panel and change the parallel port driver.
does not support parallel data transfers. If a 5 Run a send test to verify the successful
parallel data transfer is launched with the PC operation.
set in ECP mode, the transfer could be aborted Note: If a transfer succeeds on one
by an error occurring in between. It would be copier model, then transfers
necessary, therefore, to disable ECP mode would be successful on all
before running ISW Trns on a PC with the ECP models.
setting.
Instructions on how to disable ECP mode are fol-

lowing.
2-5
ISW
[2] Copying Transfer Data (Update Data) Step Procedure

Run the ISW Trns program to copy transfer data 8 Click Copy to copy the selected transfer
(update data) to the PC. files (update data) to the folder created
at ISW Trns setup.
Step Procedure Note 1: To copy all the files (update
1 Boot the PC. data) displayed in the Original

2 Select ISW Trns from the Start menu to Files field, click Copy All,
run the ISW Trns program. instead of Copy.
3 Click the Option menu. Note 2: The folder name created at
4 [Option window] ISW Trns setup is displayed
above the Copied File field.
Note 3: The transfer files that have
been copied successfully so
far are listed in full-path name
in the lower part of the Copied
File list view.
The transfer files that have not
been copied successfully are
listed in the Failed to Copy
Click Data Copy. Files list view.
5 [File Copy window] Causes of copy errors:
1. A file with the same name
existed and the O/W
(overwrite) check box was
not checked.
2. The storage destination
folder could not be found.
Mount an update disk on the PC and 3. Attempted to overwrite an
click Browse. overwrite protected file.
6 Select the folder on drive A that contains Note 4: To update existing transfer
the transfer file (update data) as a source files (update data), check the
file. O/W (overwrite) check box.
Note 1: The selected folder is 9 When the copying completes, click
displayed in the upper section Refresh.
in the Original Files field. 10 If more update disks are involved, repeat
Note 2: The transfer files (update data) Steps 5 to 9.
that are stored in the selected 11 Click Cancel to return to the option
folder are displayed in the window.
lower section in the Original 12 [Option window]
Files field. Click OK.
7 Select the transfer files (update data) you
want copied from the lower section in the
Original Files field.
Note 1: You can select multiple
transfer files (update data).
Note 2: To copy all the files (update
data) displayed, skip this step
to go to Step 8 directly.
2-6
ISW
[3] Connecting [4] Updating

Connect a parallel interface cable to the copier. 1. Update operation overview
Prerequisites to cabling are: Follow the steps below to update the ROM data
on each control board using ISW Trns.
• A PC to which transfer files (update data) have
been copied.
• A parallel interface cable (Anphenol 36-pin-
D-sub 25-pin) Step Procedure
1 Check the ROM version of the copier
Note: For instructions on how to connect a before proceeding with updating. (See 2,
parallel interface cable to the copier, refer “Checking the ROM version of the copier
to the ISW section of the service manual . (before updating).”)
2 Run the ISW Trns program. (See 4, “Run-
ning ISW Trns.”)
Step Procedure 3 Set the copier in ISW receive mode. (See
1 Turn off the copier main switch. 3, “Preparing the copier to transfer.”)
2 Turn off the PC power switch. 4 Select conditions for transfer files (up-
3 Connect the PC parallel port and the date data) with ISW Trns. (See 5, “Se-
copier ISW connector with a parallel lecting transfer file (update data) condi-
interface cable. tions.”)
5 Select a version of transfer files (update
ISW connector
PC data) with ISW Trns. (See 6, “Selecting a
(36-pin)
version of transfer files (update data).”)
6 Verify the transfer files (update data) se-
lected with ISW Trns. (See 7, “Verifying
transfer files (update data).”
7 Transmit the transfer files (update data)
with ISW Trns. (See 8, “Transmitting trans-
fer files (update data).”)
Parallel 8 To update ROM data on more control
(printer) boards, repeat Steps 3 to 7.
Centronics cable
interface port 9 Exit the ISW Trns program. (See 9, “Ex-
iting ISW Trns.”)
10 Verify the ROM version of the copier af-
ter updating. (See 10, “Verifying the ROM
version of the copier (after updating).”)
2-7
ISW
2. Checking the ROM version of the copier 3. Preparing the copier to transfer.
(before updating) Start the copier with 25 mode enabled to put the
Before updating ROM data, check the ROM ver- copier into ISW transfer wait state.
sion of the existing control program in the 25 mode.
Step Procedure
1 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
Step Procedure 2 Turn ON the copier main switch while

1 Turn OFF the copier main switch. holding down the copy count setup but-
2 Turn ON the copier main switch while tons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode.
holding down the copy count setup but- 3 [25 mode menu window]
tons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode. Put the copier into ISW transfer wait state
3 [25 mode menu window] by following the copier-specific proce-
Check the ROM version by following the dure.
copier-specific procedure. Note 1: “ISW transfer wait state” is the
Note: For operating instructions, re- state of the copier with the
fer to the Adjustment section START key being shown in the
of the service manual. display area.
Note 2: For operating instructions, re-
fer to the Adjustment section
of the service manual.
4. Running ISW Trns.

Run the ISW Trns program.
Step Procedure
1 Boot the PC.
2 Select ISW Trns from the Start menu and
run the ISW Trns program.
2-8
ISW
5. Selecting transfer file (update data) con- Step Procedure

ditions 3 In the ISW Trns main window, click
Select various options for the transfer files (up- in the [Board] field in [Select Type] and
date data) in the ISW Trns main window. Condi- select the name of the board on which
tions to select are: to update ROM from the pulldown menu.
• (Machine) The name of the model on which
ROM data is updated USA
• (Country) The destination of the transfer files
(update data)
• (Board) The name of the board on which ROM
data is updated
• (Divide) The type of the transfer files (update
data)
Step Procedure 4 In the ISW Trns main window, click

1 [ISW Trns main window] in the [Divide] field in [Select Type] and
In the ISW Trns main window, click select a method of dividing the transfer
in the [Machine] field in [Select Type] and files (update data) from the pulldown
select the name of the model on which menu.
to update ROM data from the pulldown
menu.
USA
Note 1: Normally, select ORIGINAL as

2 In the ISW Trns main window, click the method of division.
in the [Country] field in [Select Type] and Note 2: Select DIVIDED for large ROM
select the destination of the transfer files data (e.g. for Main Control
(update data) from the pulldown menu. Unit), that is divided into
several files (extension
.001.b01, etc.) to be stored to
several floppy disks for
distribution.
2-9
ISW
6. Selecting a version of transfer files (up- 7. Verifying transfer files (update data)
date data) Once a particular version of a transfer file (update
When a transfer file (update data) has been data) is selected, the transfer files (update data)
chosen to meet a given set of conditions, it may that are transmitted actually are listed in [Send
be available in multiple versions. Here, select a File Info] in the ISW Trns main window. Verify the
particular version of a transfer file (update data) validity of the transfer files (data) for transfer.
for use in the actual data transfer.
Step Procedure
Step Procedure 1 [ISW Trns main window]
1 [ISW Trns main window] In the ISW Trns main window, click File
In the ISW Trns main window, select a Check in [Send File Info].
transfer file (update data) of the version
that is used in the actual data transfer
from among the files listed in the [File]
field in [Version].
USA
2 Check to see if OK appears in the [File
Sum] field in [Send File Info] in the ISW
Trns main window.
Note 1: A file that is labelled NG is in-
appropriate as a transfer file
Note: The version of a transfer file (update data). Try to copy the
(update data) can be determined file again. If you can not
from its file name. succeed to copy it again, the
Example: original file may be corrupted.
26nac001AAAA.b01 .. Version 1 Note 2: Transfer files (update data)
26nac002AAAA.b01 .. Version 2 may be marked ?? when
2 The target file (update data) may not be enough infor mation is not
shown in the [File] field in [Version], if it available to verify their validity.
exists in a folder different from the data When a transfer file is labelled,
folders set in the Option screen. Click check if the checksum file
Browse and find the appropriate file to (*.sum) was copied correctly.
select.
Note: Clicking Browse will open the

Select File window.
2 - 10
ISW
8. Transmitting transfer files (update data) 9. Exiting ISW Trns.

When transfer files (update data) are established, When the update of the ROM data on the control
run a data transfer to the copier. boards completes, exit the ISW Trns program.
Step Procedure Step Procedure

1 Exit the ISW Trns program.
1 Press the START key on the copier while
it is in ISW transfer wait state. 2 Turn OFF the PC.
Note 1: The START key is displayed 3 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
in the display area on the 4 Disconnect the parallel interface cable
copier. from the PC and the copier.
2 [ISW Trns main window] Note: Turn OFF the PC and copier
Click File Send in [Send File Info] in the before disconnecting the parallel
ISW Trns main window. interface cable from them.
USA 10. Verifying the ROM version of the copier

(after updating)
When the update of the ROM data completes,
verify the ROM version of the control program in
the 25 mode.
3 Transfer files (update data) are transmit-
ted to the copier. Step Procedure
Note 1: While data is being transferred 1 Turn OFF the copier main switch.
to a copier, an LED or indicator 2 Turn ON the copier main switch while
flashes to indicate a data trans- holding down the copy count setup but-
fer in progress. The mode of tons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode.
3 [25 mode menu window]
such indication varies from one
copier to another. Check the ROM version by following the
Note 2: ISW Trns produces an indica- copier-specific procedure.
tion to designate a data trans- Note: For operating instructions, re-
fer to the Adjustment section
fer in progress.
Note 3: If a data transfer is aborted due of the service manual.
to any trouble occurring with
the copier or ISW Trns, turn the
copier main switch OFF, then
ON to retry the data transfer by
ISW Trns.
In this case, a condition indi-
cation and necessary operation
vary depending on each model.
Please refer to service manual.
4 To update ROM data on more control
boards, repeat the step in 5, “Selecting
transfer file (update data) conditions,” to
8, “Transmitting transfer files (update
data).”
2 - 11
ISW
ISW Trns MESSAGES

The ISW Trns program displays dialog messages when errors occur and when processing ends. Definitions of
these messages are listed below, along with the associated display status.
Message Display status

Cannot open a checksum file Opening of a checksum file failed. Possible causes include a
corrupted file and a file in use.

Cannot read a checksum file Loading of a checksum file into memory failed. Possible
causes include a shortage of memory and an OS problem.
Cannot open a file Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a
File transmission complete File transfer completed.
Cannot open the LPT port Opening of the LPT port failed.
Communications port setup acquisition error A call to GetCommSate failed.
Communications port setup error A call to GetCommSate failed.
Cannot open a send file Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a
Cannot send a Term Test file Transmission of a communications test block failed.
1. The copier is not ready to receive.
2. The cable is out of position.
3. Transmission of the wrong send file was attempted.
Unsuccessful file transmission The transmission of a send file failed. Possible causes include
a cable out of position.
Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT port Output to the LPT port failed. Possible causes include a cable
out of position.
Starting file transmission. OK? A message seeking confirmation at the start of file
transmission.
Send file not selected No files exist on the send file list.
Cancelled Transmission of a file in progress was cancelled. CANCEL is
normally hidden. Its setting can be altered with the INI file.
Default data folder created A data folder was created by clicking Create Folder.
Invalid folder name An invalid folder name was entered. Start a folder name with
a drive name, such as C:\.
Default data folder not set. A data folder is not set in ISWTrns.INI. This message is
Set a folder. displayed when ISW Trns launches for the fist time.
Unsuccessful thread creation The creation of a thread failed.
Copying the selected file. OK? File copy start message
Copying all files to the default data folder. OK? File copy start message
No send file available No file to copy file is selected or exists in the folder.
Unable to copy several files 1. The destination folder does not exist.
2. When the Overwrite check box is not checked, an attempt
is made to copy to a file having the same file name.
3. An attempt is made to overwrite a protected file
4. Any other cause (such as a file being used by another
application or OS problem)
2 - 12
ISW
Message Display status

File copying end File copying completed.
Send file not found, or invalid file name in the The number of divisions of a send file recorded in the
folder. Check. checksum file and the number of files actually existing do not
match.
1. A file having an invalid file name exists in the data folder.
Delete possibly invalid file names from the folder list.
2. There are a number of files in a divided file. Identify the
files in the folder list and recopy them.
2 - 13
ISW
TROUBLESHOOTING ISW Trns

If errors occur while running the ISW Trns program, 5. Unsuccessful file transfer
take the actions suggested below to correct them. 5.1 “Cannot open a file” error
• The file is used by any other program or by
1. Unable to run ISW Trns the system.
• Corrupted ISWTrns.EXE file → Close that other program. If the file transfer
→ Set up again. still fails, reboot Windows.

• The setup disk is corrupted.
→ Verify the setup disk and then set up again. 5.2 “Cannot send a Term Test file” error
• The cable is not in firm position.
2. Send file is not displayed when a combo → Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm
box item is selected position or if the cable is not impaired.
• The send file is not stored in the folder. • The copier is not ready to receive.
→ Check to see if the send file is stored in the → Check to see if the copier is ready to receive.
folder appearing in the [Folder] text box in
[Versions]. Use the [File Copy] function if the 5.3 “Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT
file storage location is unknown. port” error
• Check to see if the base data folder setting in • The cable is not in firm position.
the option window is not wrong. → Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm
→ Verify the base folder setting. Use the [File position or if the cable is not impaired.
Copy] function if the file storage location is • Invalid data has been transmitted.
unknown. → Check the file information window to see if the
• Invalid file name (altered) receive mode (receiving board type) of the
→ The file name of a file must be used exactly copier and the send file on the PC match.
as it is delivered. If a file is renamed, it can- → If the file is transmitted for the first time, check
not be displayed or selected. If a file name with the vendor.
has been altered, return it to its original file • The PC parallel port is set in ECP mode.
name. → Consulting the manual, free the parallel port
• Invalid folder name (altered) from ECP mode.
→ If a folder as created with [Make Folder] in the • Compatibility between the PC parallel port and
option window is renamed, it cannot be the copier port
located. Restore the original folder name and → Verify by testing on a PC with proven trans-
check. mission performance.
• Use a cable shorter than 2 meters in length.
3. NG produced by a file check
• Corrupted send file
→ Copy the file again and recheck. If NG re-
curs, check with the vendor of that file.
4. ?? produced by a file check

• With any other model, the checksum file
(*.SUM) had not been copied when the send
file was copied to the PC.
→ Copy the checksum to the same folder as the
send file is copied. It would be copied auto-
matically if the [File Copy] function is used.
2 - 14
301-1
301-2 MC201
FEED
303-1
PAPER
303-2 SD201 FEED
PAPER
302-1
302-2 M201
TRAY
SHEET
CLUTCH SOLENOID MOTOR
53-3
53-4
53-5
53-6
53-1
53-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-1
2-2
52-1
24V 51-B2 1-1 24V
52-2
5V 51-B14 1-2 5V
24V2
24V3
52-3
M201CONT 51-A20 1-3 M201CONT
M201F/R
52-4
M201F/R 51-A21 1-4 M201F/R
M201CONT
52-5
DB
SD201CONT
MC201CONT H 51-A22 1-5 MC201CONT
MC201CONT
52-6
SD201CONT H 51-A23 1-6 SD201CONT
52-7
SHEETSET 51-A24 1-7 SHEETSET
52-8
SGND 51-B1 1-8 SGND
52-9
PGND 51-B3 1-9 PGND
351-3
5V 51-B25
351-2
PS201 IN H 51-A1 PS201
PS
351-1
GND 51-B13
SHEET
PASSAGE
352-3
5V 51-B24
352-2
PS202 IN H 51-A2 PS202
PS
352-1
GND 51-B12
NO SHEET
353-3
5V 51-B23
353-2
L
PS
PS203 IN 51-A3 PS203

353-1
TRAY
SHEET
GND 51-B11
Cover Inserter A OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
354-3
5V 51-B22
354-2
PS204 IN H 51-A4 PS204
PS
354-1
TRAY
SHEET
GND 51-B10
LOWER LIMIT UPPER LIMIT
FNS CB
503-3 355-3
5V 51-B21
503-2 355-2
PS205 IN L 51-A5 PS205
PS
503-1 355-1
SIZE
GND 51-B9
SHEET
(SMALL)
503-6 356-3
5V 51-B20
503-5 356-2
PS206 IN L 51-A6 PS206
PS
503-4 356-1
SIZE
GND 51-B8
SHEET
(LARGE)
51-B19 NC
51-A7 NC
51-B7 NC
358-3
5V 51-B18
358-2
L
PS
PS208 IN 51-A8 PS208

SET
358-1
SHEET
GND 51-B6
359-3
5V 51-B17
359-2
L
PS
PS209 IN 51-A9 PS209

PRE
359-1
GND 51-B5
NO PAPER
360-3
5V 51-B16
360-2
VR1 IN 51-A10 VR1
VR
SIZE
360-1
SHEET
GND 51-B4
51-A25 NC
51-B15 NC
501-1 54-1
5V 51-A11 1-1
501-2 54-2
LED1 51-A12 1-2
501-3 54-3
LED2 51-A13 1-3
501-4 54-4
LED3 51-A14 1-4
501-5 54-5
LED4 51-A15 1-5
501-6
OB
54-6
PGC
LED5 51-A16 1-6

501-7 54-7
SW1 51-A17 1-7
501-8 54-8
V
SW2 51-A18 1-8

(1) Symbols
501-9 54-9
SGND 51-A19 1-9
R : Red
(2) Color Codes
GN : Green
Y : Yellow
BN : Brown
O : Orange
50-1
[Reading the Diagrams]
Connector
V
Wire (Violet)
Faston
LB : Light blue P : Pink

B : Blue
GY : Gray
BK : Black
V : Violet
W : White
CB
Example:
SGND
PS1
5VDC
2. Symbols used in circuit diagrams are as follows.
(4) Signal Flow
Example: Y/GN denotes a green wire with a yellow stripe.

(3) RC denotes a ribbon cable.
Direction of signal flow:

PS1
Connectors are indicated by circle ( ) or ( ).
The dark circles indicate the direction of the signal flow.
1. Signal states reflect condition in which system is in normal idling state with the main switch ON.
Cover Inserter A DRIVE BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
By-pass condensers for IC1,IC2 IC3

Cover Inserter A OPERATION BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Cover Inserter A TIMING CHART(AUTO-FEED [ONLINE],2-STAPLE,A4,2-PAGE ORIGINAL,2 COPIES)
Time (seconds)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Item
Copier Exit PS
PS4 FIN Entrance Passage PS
M1 FNS Conveyance Motor
M7 Paper Exit-Roller Motor
SD4 Paper Exit Opening Solenoid
PS6 Paper Exit-1 PS
PS7 Staple Paper Exit Upper-Limit PS
UP
M3 Tray Up-Down Motor
DOWN
CF Feed Request
CF Pre-Feed Request
Staple Request
PS201 Sheet Passage PS
PS5 Stacker Conveyance Passage PS
MC201 Paper Feed Clutch
SD201 Paper-Feed Solenoid
M5 Alignment-Plate/Upper Motor
M21,M22 Stapler/R
M23,M24 Stapler/F
M13 Stacker Entrance Motor

Cover Inserter A TIMING CHART(AUTO-FEED [ONLINE],2-STAPLE,8.5X11,2-PAGE ORIGINAL,2 COPIES)
Time (seconds)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Item
Copier Exit PS
PS6 Paper Exit-1 PS
UP
DOWN
CF Feed Request
CF Pre-Feed Request
Staple Request
PS201 Sheet Passage PS
MC201 Paper Feed Clutch
SD201 Paper-Feed Solenoid
M21,M22 Stapler/R
M23,M24 Stapler/F

Di750field043e.p65
CBR1
W
BK
NF
15
16
17
18
GY
GY
GY
GY
NF
305-1
305-3
305-5
751-5
W
BK
FORMER
TRANS
90-1 12-1
BK
10
32
W
31
90-2 12-4
30
24
W
11
23
29
1
22
5
4
4
22
27
21
506
506
507
BK
B
B
B
B
B
R
R
R
BN
509
510
BK
BK
RL1
13-1
BK
CBR2
MAIN RELAY
BK
100-4
100-3
100-2
100-1
100-9
100-8
100-7
100-5
100-10
200V SYSTEM
2
TRC2
TRC1
TRC2
TRC1
20-1
100V SYSTEM
5VDC
5VDC
5VDC
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
W
12VDC
505
504
505
504
13-3
SW1
174-1-12 163-9-1
5VDC 137-A1 R R 665-3
MAIN SWITCH
BK
174-3-10 163-7-3
1
BN 665-2
501
501
503
508
502
PS62 H 137-A3
503
503
APS
174-2-11 163-8-2
PS62
137-A2 B B 665-1
SENSOR
OUTLET
21-1
20-3
BK
INLET
R 666-3
OUTLET
W
13-2
174-4-9 163-6-4
2
PS63 H 137-A4 Y 666-2
BK
APS
PS63
B 666-1
SW2
SENSOR
11-1
RESET SWITCH
W
BK
R 662-3
RL3
W
W
174-5-8 163-5-5
3
RL3
PS64 H 137-A5 V 662-2
21-2
APS
BK
PS64
B 662-1
SENSOR
10-1
13-4
1
10-4
10-2
5
3
1
BK
R
W
W
664-3
10-3
174-6-7 163-4-6
4
PS65 H 137-A6 GY 664-2
BK
APS
PS65
B 664-1
SENSOR
SCANNER
1-2
2-2
1-1
2-1
R 661-3
174-7-6 163-3-7
5
PS66 H 137-A7 w 661-2
APS
PS66
AC(C)
AC(C)
AC(H)
AC(H)
B 661-1
SENSOR
R 53-1 5VDC
20
172-1
R R 53-2 5VDC
21
172-2
ICB R R 53-3 5VDC
22
R 663-3 172-3
174-8-5 163-2-8 B B 53-4 SGND
6
23
PS67 H 137-A8 BK 663-2 172-4
APS
B B 53-5 SGND
24
PS67
B 663-1 177-7
SENSOR
HDD B 53-6 SGND
25
172-5
BN BN 59-1 12VDC
Di750 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/5)
27
172-7
R R 59-2 5VDC
29
172-8
B B 59-3 SGND
30
R 660-3 ICB 172-9

174-9-4 B B 59-4 SGND
31
136-1-9
7
BN 660-2 172-10
APS
PS68 H 137-A9 B B 58-7 SGND
32
PS68
B 660-1
SENSOR
BN 57-2 12VDC
33
R 54-2 5VDC
34
B 54-4 SGND
35
NC 137-A10 PRCB
193-6-1 195-1 B 57-6 SGND
36
M24 PWR A P 133-1 BN O

193-5-2 195-2 GY 54-5 V DES
26
M24 PWR B P 133-2 R O

O 193-4-3 195-3
M24 DRIVE A P 133-3 BN
193-3-4 195-4 BN 57-1 12VDC
37
M24 DRIVE A' 133-4 Y Y
M24
P
LASER
195-5
MOTOR
193-2-5 R 54-1 5VDC
38
M24 DRIVE B P 133-5 B V

193-1-6 195-6 B 54-3 SGND
39
CORRECTION
M24 DRIVE B' P 133-6 GY GY
DCDB B 57-5 SGND
40
HLVL H 133-7
SMPR H 133-8 w
BN 57-3 12VDC
41
192-13-1 BN 194-1
5VDC 132-1 GY 442-1 R 55-1 5VDC
42
192-12-2 194-2
SGND 132-2 GY R 442-2
192-11-3 194-3
M INDEX 1 132-3 GY O 442-3 B
45
P ACDB 55-6 SGND

192-10-4 194-4
SGND 132-4 GY Y 442-4 B
46
57-7 SGND
192-9-5 194-5
M INDEX 2 P 132-5 GY B 442-5 258-2
192-8-6 194-6 BN 58-1 12VDC
47
SGND 132-6 GY V 442-6 258-3

192-7-7 194-7 R 56-1 5VDC
48
GY GY 442-7
RC
S INDEX 1 P 132-7 258-4
DCPS 1
192-6-8 194-8 GY 60-2 -5VDC

49
SGND 132-8 GY W 442-8 258-5

192-5-9 194-9 ADUSDB B 60-4 SGND
50
W
BK
S INDEX 2 P 132-9 GY BK 442-9 258-6

192-4-10 194-10 B 56-6 SGND
51
SGND 132-10 GY BN 442-10 258-7

192-3-11 194-11 B 58-5 SGND
52
INDEXSB
HL VL 132-11 GY R 442-11
192-2-12 194-12
1PR H 132-12 GY O 442-12 278-3
192-1-13 R
28
Y 194-13 442-13 HDD

SGND 132-13 GY 278-3
R R 56-3 5VDC
53
278-4
SCDB B 56-8 SGND
54
191-14-1
5VDC 131-1 GY 442-1
R 55-2 5VDC
55
191-13-2
SGND 131-2 GY 442-2 LCT
B 55-7 SGND
56
191-12-3
WRITING
LD1 APC CONT 1 131-3 GY 442-3

GY 191-11-4
LD1 APC CONT 2 131-4 442-4 472-4-5
BN BN 57-4 12VDC
57
GY 191-10-5
LD1 VIDEO H 131-5 442-5 472-3-6
R R 55-3 5VDC
58
GY 191-9-6 442-6 472-2-7

SGND 131-6 B B 55-8 SGND
RC
60
GY 191-8-7 OB
LD1 ALM H 131-7 442-7 472-1-8
R R 55-4 5VDC
72
GY 191-7-8 442-8 472-5-4

LD1 ICLK P 131-8
LDB1
B B 57-8 SGND
74
GY 191-6-9 442-9
LD1 DCLK 131-9
GY 191-5-10 442-10
LD1 DI 131-10
191-4-11 177-5
GY 442-11 GY 60-1 -5VDC
61
LD1 AO 131-11
191-3-12 177-4
GY 442-12 B 56-7 SGND
62
LD1 PR 131-12 177-3

ADB R 56-2 5VDC
63
NC 131-13 177-2
B
64
NC 131-14 58-5 SGND

177-1
190-12-1 BN
65
58-2 12VDC
5VDC 130-1 GY 442-1
190-11-2 755-2
GY 442-2 R 56-5 5VDC
66
SGND 130-2
190-10-3 755-3
GY 442-3 B 56-10 SGND
67
LD1 APC CONT 1 130-3 FNS

190-9-4 755-6
GY 442-4 B 60-5 SGND
77
LD1 APC CONT 2 130-4

190-8-5
LD1 VIDEO H 130-5 GY 442-5 5VDC 52-1 R
190-7-6 758-3
GY 442-6 R 56-4 5VDC
89
SGND 130-6 DF-313 SGND 52-2 B

190-6-7 758-4
RC
GY 442-7 B 56-8 SGND

70
LD1 ALM H 130-7 REM/2 52-3 V

190-5-8
LD1 ICLK P 130-8 GY 442-8 342-3 REM/1 52-4 Y
BN 58-3 12VDC
LDB2
68
190-4-9 PRCB
LD1 DCLK 130-9 GY 442-9 SW SIG 52-5 GY
190-3-10 442-10
LD1 DI 130-10 GY
190-2-11
LD1 AO 130-11 GY 442-11 SGND 51-1 B
190-1-12 442-12
LD1 PR 130-12 GY R
F GND
5VDC 51-2
SGND 51-3 B
REM/2 51-4 Y
BT1
RL2
10-6
10-5
60
72
PT-4
PT-3
B
R
00/09/26, 18:25
475-7
475-8
AC(C)
AC(H)
B
R
O 72-1 24VDC SGND 71-1

DCDB
ICB IFB - 1 / 2
BK 72-5 PGND 5VDC 71-2

SGND 71-3
154-3
153-2
153-1
O 72-2 24VDC REM/2 71-4

ACDB
REM/3 71-5
NC
BK 72-6 PGND
CUR EM 71-6
5VDC
258-1
CGND
O 73-1 24VDC NC 71-7

157-9-1 ADUSDB
W
OB1 TXD P 140-1 GY 258-8

157-8-2 BK 73-5 PGND
140-2 GY P
157-7-3
O
140-3 GY P O 72-4 24VDC

157-6-4 LCT
OB1 RXD ACK P 140-4 GY
157-5-5 BK 72-8 PGND
OB1
OB1 TXD REQ P 140-5 GY

157-4-6
LCD
140-6 GY P O 73-2 24VDC

157-3-7 PMDB
140-7 GY
157-2-8 BK 73-6 PGND
140-8 GY P
157-1-9
CARD TXD P 140-9 GY O 72-3 24VDC
M4
BK 73-6 PGND
342-1
O 73-3 24VDC
DPSB
161-14
161-1
161-4
162-1
342-2
160-24
160-1
BK 72-7 PGND
O 73-4 24VDC
HDD
BK 73-8 PGND
278-1
O 74-1 24VDC
278-5
BK 74-7 PGND
278-2
SCANNER O 74-2 24V2
278-6
BK 74-8 PGND
166-4
166-3
166-2
166-1
164-1
278-7
164-24
BK 74-10 PGND
163-1 165-1 755-1
O 75-1 24VDC
163-2 165-2 755-4
DCPS 2
FNS BK 75-3 PGND

163-3 165-3 755-5
BK 74-9 PGND
OB2
758-1
O 75-2 24VDC
DF-313 758-2
BK 75-4 PGND
78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 100 98 99 112 102 103
L
OB INVB
HV1 BK 76-1 PGND

M3 BK 76-2 PGND
M2 BK 76-3 PGND
B
V
Y
R
BN
GY
M1 BK 76-4 PGND
M15 BK 76-5 PGND
475-4
475-6
475-5
475-1
475-2
475-3
DCDB BK 76-6 PGND

B
R
BN
ACDB BK 76-8 PGND

24VDC
24VDC
F GND
ADUSDB BK 76-7 PGND

104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
FT2
FT1
BT1
57
58
BK
BK
60
81-1
HV1 O
80-2
80-1
81-2
M3 O
81-3
657
M2 O
658
81-4
M1 O
659
MS2
M15 81-5
O
113 114 115 116 117
650
82-1
DCDB O
651
82-3
ACDB O
652
82-2
O
MS1
ADUSDB
118 119 120
653
654
BK
BK
655
656
80-4
80-3
Di750field043e.p65
657
658
659
ALARM 138-1 GY 175-1-13
CPU OF 138-2 GY 175-2-12
IPRL CNT 138-3 GY 175-3-11
WT LON 138-4 GY 175-4-10
ST LON 138-5 GY 175-5-9
SET CLK P 138-6 GY 175-6-8
ST SIG 138-7 175-7-7

GY
RING 138-8 175-8-6
GY
23
SW SIG 138-9 175-9-5
GY
24R CNT 138-10 175-10-4
GY
REM/2 138-11 GY 175-11-3
REM/3 138-12 175-12-2

GY
650
CUR EM 139-13 175-13-1

GY
651
652
653
654
655
ICB IFB - 2 / 2
656
65
64
20
63
62
R
61
135-A1
600
BN
R
B
BN
GY
B 135-A2
601
R 135-A3
602
900-8
900-7
900-4
900-5
900-3
900-6
900-2
900-1
135-A4
603
O
350-1
350-2
350-3
350-4
350-5
CN 112
CN 112
135-A5
604
B
5VDC
5VDC
Y 135-A6
605
SGND
REM/3
REM/1
REM/2
CUREM
SW SIG
606
GN 135-A7 P IPB IFB RXD
197-1
197-2
197-3
197-4
197-5
B 135-A8 SGND
607
135-A9 P IPB IFB RXD REQ 472-3 Y 901-A1 WT LED
V
608
135-A10 P IPB IFB RXD ACK 472-2 V 901-A2 ST LED
GY
609
B 135-A11 SGND 472-1 GY 901-A3 ST SIG
610
410-1
410-2
410-3
410-4
410-5
W 135-B1 P IPB IFB RXD ERR BN 901-A4 ALARM
611
135-B3 P PVV R 901-A5 CPU OF
612
BN
135-B4 O 901-A6 IPRL CNT
613
R
5VDC
SGND
SGND
-5VDC
12VDC
Y 901-A7 WT LON
135-B5 P B VV
614
O
Y 135-B6 P S VV B 901-A8 ST LON
615
110-1 411-1 TCK1 V 901-A9 SET CLK
GN 135-B7 BYPAS SIZE
616
135-B8 P EE VV 110-2 411-2 SGND GY 901-B1 ST SIG
RC
617
135-B9 110-3 411-3 TCK2 W 901-B2 RING
GY
618
135-B10 110-4 411-4 SGND BK 901-B3 SW SIG
W
619
110-5 411-5 RCK1 BN 901-B4 24R CNT
110-6 411-6 SGND R 901-B5 REM/2
110-7 411-7 RCK2 O 901-B6 REM/3
134-A1 P HCLK
110-8 411-8 SGND Y 901-B7 CUR EM
134-A2 P DFD0
110-9 411-9 TG
PSMB
901-B8 N/C
ICB
134-A3 P DFD1
110-10 411-10 CLMP 901-B9 N/C
134-A4 P DFD2
110-11 411-11 S CK
134-A5 P DFD3
411-12 S IN
110-12
134-A6 P DFD4
411-13 S LD
110-13
134-A7 P DFD5 411-14 MD 0
110-14
134-A8 P DFD6 411-15 MD 1
110-15
134-A9 P DFD7 411-16 MD 2
110-16 176-4-4
140
B 904-1 SGND
134-A10 P PCLK
110-17 411-17 S LP
RC
176-3-5
141
Y 904-2 VDE REM

ADB
134-B1 P PBUSY
110-18 411-18 SGND 176-2-6
142
134-B2 P ADREQ B 904-3 SGND

110-19 411-19 AD CK 176-7-1
143
134-B3 V 904-4 IP WEK

P XFLAG 411-20 APR
110-20
134-B4 P HBUSY 904-5 N/C
110-21 411-21 OD 0
ISW INTERFACE CONNECTER

134-B5 P DAVIL
110-22 411-22 OD 1
134-B6 P INT
110-23 411-23 OD 2
134-B7 P AC1284 110-24 411-24 OD 3
134-B8 SGND
110-25 411-25 OD 4
134-B9 SGND
5VDC
5VDC
110-26 411-26 OD 5
134-B10 SGND 5VDC
110-27 411-27 OD 6
SGND
110-28 411-28 OD 7 RING
110-29 411-29 OD 8
110-30 411-30 SGND
RL2 DRIVE L 903-4
RL3 DRIVE L 903-2
903-3
903-1
101-1 5VDC
101-2 SGND 110-31 411-31 ED 0
W
411-32 ED 1
BK
BK
110-32
POWER
110-33 411-33 ED 2
CONNECTER
(FOR ISW TOOL)
110-34 411-34 ED 3
5VDC
P KRDS TXD
RL2
RL3
P KRDS RTS
P KDRS DTR
P KDRS RXD
RC
P KDRS CRS
PS315 L
DF TXD P
DF RXD REQ P
DF RXD P
DF TXD ACK P
DF TXD REQ P
DF VALID P
DF RXD ACK P
P KDRS DSD
CN 113
00/09/26, 18:25
P KDRS DSR
LAN RB
137-B8
137-B7
137-B6
137-B5
137-B4
137-B3
137-B2
137-B1
R
Y
O
W
BN
GY
CN 113
173-1-8
173-2-7
173-3-6
173-4-5
173-5-4
173-6-3
173-7-2
173-8-1
OP IFB
CN 123
CN 124
69
EDH-2
70
102
103
SGND
V IFB
140
VDB RBM
141
SGND
142
SCSI IFB
IP WEK
143
1-50
1-1
TO OUTLET
CN821-4 5VDC
2-1
2-50
28
CN822-4 5VDC
CN821-3 SGND
25
CN822-3 SGND
92
CN822-2 PGND
93
CN822-1 12VDC
HDD
CN820-5
CN820-6
CN820-2
CN820-1
PGND
PGND
24VDC
12VDC
Pi6200
HDD DCPS
823-1-3
823-2-2
FAN
HDD
FM9
823-3-1
COOLING
109
118
79
40
39
36
38
Di750field043e.p65
97
35
37
26
95
78
54
34
53
33
100
B
B
R
O
O
BK
BK
BN
96
B
B
R
BN
GY
94
264-1 250-3
O O 320-1 24VDC
601-6
601-5
601-4
601-3
601-2
601-1
UP
264-2
301-2
301-1
300-6
300-5
300-4
300-3
300-2
300-1
250-4
M19
BK BK 320-2 H M19 CONT
MOTOR 1
CN200-5
CN200-4
CN200-3
CN200-2
CN200-1
B
B
B
R
O
O
260-1-2 250-5
O O O
601-7
320-3 24VDC
5VDC
PGND
PGND
SGND
SGND
260-2-1 250-6
24VDC
12VDC
24VDC
Y Y
MC3
320-4 H MC3 CONT
FEED
5VDC
SGND
SGND
12VDC
V_DES
DRIVE CLUTCH 1
261-1-2
O
600-6
600-5
600-2
600-1
600-4
600-3
261-2-1 250-7
PRE-
MC4
V V 320-5 H MC4 CONT
CLUTCH 1
272-1-2 M13 CLK P 216-1 GY 610-1
TRAY 1
REGISTRATION
5VDC
O
PGND
PGND
SGND
24VDC
24VDC
272-2-1 250-8
SD8
BN GY 320-6 H SD8 CONT M13 F/R 216-2 GY 610-2
PICK-
M13 DRIVE U 620-1
SOLENOID 1
267-1 M13 CSEL 216-3 GY 610-3
O 12V_F H 310-A1 211-A1
267-2 250-9
SD5
24
Y Y 320-7 H SD5 CONT M13 V2 216-4 GY 610-4
211-A2 H M19 CONT
LOCK
310-A2 M13 DRIVE V 620-2
M13
DRIVE
MOTOR
M13 V1 216-5 GY 610-5
UP SOLENOID 1
211-A3
SCANNER
M19 EM 310-A3
M13 V0 216-6 GY 610-6 M13 DRIVE W 620-3
M19 FEM L 310-A4 211-A4
211-A5 L1 CONT H 216-7 GY 610-7
310-A5 H MC4 CONT
830-1 831-1 832-1
24VDC 623-1 O O BK LV
211-A6 H SD5 CONT FM7 CONT L 216-8 GY 610-8
264-1 251-3 310-A6 830-2 831-2
O O 320-8 24VDC BK 832-2
L1 CONT H 623-2
UP
264-2 251-4 216-9 GY 610-9 FM7 EM
211-A7 H MC3 CONT
L1
BK BK
M20
320-9 H M20 CONT 310-A7
830-3 831-3
INVB
LAMP
MOTOR 2
NC 623-3 BK 832-3
211-A8 H SD8 CONT 216-10 GY 610-10 L PS5
EXPOSURE
310-A8
260-1-2 251-5 831-4 HV
O O 320-10 24VDC
260-2-1 251-6 310-A9 211-A9 H M20 CONT 216-11 GY 610-11 H PS7
Y Y
MC5
320-11 H MC5 CONT
FEED
211-A10 216-12 GY 610-12 H PS6 640-1
DRIVE CLUTCH 2
M20 EM 310-A10 FM7 DRIVE L 621-1
261-1-2
O GY 610-13 H PS4
M20 FEM L 310-A11 211-A11 216-13 640-2
261-2-1 251-7 FM7 EM 621-2
PRE-
FAN
V V
MC6
320-12 H MC6 CONT
FM7
211-A12 H MC6 CONT SCAN24V FEM 216-14 GY 610-14 SCAN24V FEM 640-4
CLUTCH 2
COOLING
310-A12
SCANNER
PGND 621-3 B
TRAY 2
272-1-2
REGISTRATION
SCANNER
O 211-A13 H SD6 CONT SGND 216-15 GY 610-15 SGND

272-2-1 251-8 310-A13
SD9
BN GY 320-13 H SD9 CONT
PICK-
650-3
310-A14 211-A14 H MC5 CONT 5VDC 622-1 R R
SOLENOID 2
267-1 650-2
HP
O PS5 L 622-2
PS5
310-A15 211-A15 H SD9 CONT 650-1

267-2 251-9
SENSOR
SGND 622-3 B B
SD6
SCANNER
Y Y 320-14 H SD6 CONT
LOCK
310-A16 211-A16 H M21 CONT
651-3
R
UP SOLENOID 2
M21 EM 310-A17 211-A17 651-2
PS7 H 622-4
ADF
PS7
651-1
BRAKE
M21 FEM L 310-A18 211-A18 B
310-A19 211-A19 H MC8 CONT 454-1 652-3

5VDC 623-4 R
454-5 652-2
SCDB
HP
281-1 252-3 310-A20 211-A20 H SD7 CONT PS6 H 623-5

O
PS6
321-1 24VDC 454-7 652-1
UP
281-2 252-4 SGND 623-6 B
M21
BK 321-2 H M21 CONT 211-A21 H MC7 CONT
310-A21
MOTOR 3
653-3
277-1-2 252-5 310-A22 211-A22 H SD10 CONT 454-5 653-2
O 321-3 24VDC PS4 H 623-7
PS4
277-2-1 252-6 211-A23 M22 TR1 653-1

RETURN
310-A23
SENSOR
MC7
ORIGINAL SCANNER
321-4 H MC7 CONT
FEED
DRIVE CLUTCH 3
310-A24 211-A24 M22 TR2
278-1-2
278-2-1 252-7 310-A25 211-A25 M22 TR3
PRE-
MC8
V 321-5 H MC8 CONT 250-12
TRAY 1 SET H 220-A1 W
CLUTCH 3
310-A26 211-A26 M22 TR4 250-14 270-1
R
TRAY 3
5VDC 220-A2 R
REGISTRATION
289-1-2
250-11 270-2
211-A27 PS32 220-A3 Y BN
1-1
289-2-1 252-8 M22 FEM L 310-A27

GY 321-6 H SD10 CONT 270-3
PS32
250-23
PICK-
SD10
SENSOR
SGND 220-A4 B B
310-A28 211-A28 H SD11 CONT
SOLENOID 3
285-1
211-A29 H MC9/10 CONT 271-1
285-2 252-9 310-A29 R
SD7
Y 321-7 H SD7 CONT 250-15 271-2
LOCK
211-A30 H M23 CONT PS33 220-A6 Y Y

2-1
310-A30 271-3
PS33
UP SOLENOID 3
B
SENSOR
311-B1 211-B1 M23 F/R
M23 EM 311-B2 211-B2 262-6-1 275-1

R
250-19 262-5-2 275-2
311-B3 211-B3 M14 PL PS26 H 220-A10 Y Y
275-3
PS26
262-4-3
247-1 254-1-12 B
SENSOR 1
322-1 M22 DRIVE 1

PAPER SIZE PAPER SIZE NO PAPER
BN 311-B4 211-B4 M14 NL

247-2 254-2-11
V 322-2 M22 DRIVE 2
M22
MOTOR
311-B5 211-B5 M14 PR
UP/DOWN
262-3-4 276-3
R
248-2-1 254-3-10 311-B6 211-B6 M14 NR 250-21 262-2-5 276-2
O 322-3 24VDC PS48 H 220-A13 GY BN
PRE-
PS48
248-1-2 254-4-9 262-1-6 276-1
BY-PASS
PAPER
UP
BN 322-4 H SD11 CONT 211-B7 B
SD11
M14 CEM 311-B7
PICK-
SENSOR 1
REGISTRATION
(BY-PASS)
(BY-PASS) SOLENOID
322-5
M14 24FEM L 311-B8 211-B8
263-3-4 274-1
R
311-B9 211-B9 H SD4 CONT 250-17 263-2-5 274-2
TRAY 1
290-1-2 253-1-10 PS20 H 220-A8 GY BN

TRAY
LIMIT
O O O 322-6 24VDC 263-1-6

PS20
274-3
UPPER
290-2-1 253-2-9 311-B10 211-B10 H PCL CONT B

SENSOR 1
MC9
Y Y 322-7 H MC9 CONT
VERTICAL
CLUTCH 1
24VDC 311-B11 211-B11
CONVEYANCE
291-1-2
FEED
O 263-6-1 273-3
PAPER
24VDC 311-B12 211-B12 R
291-2-1 253-3-8
VERTICAL
V BN 322-8 H M10 CONT 250-22 263-5-2 273-2
BK Y
MC10
PS47 H 220-A14
FEED
PS47
211-B13
PAPER
5VDC 311-B13 263-4-3 273-1
VERTICAL
CLUTCH 2
B
SENSOR 1
CONVEYANCE
311-B14 211-B14 P M11 CLK
355-1 341-15 SGND 311-B15 211-B15 265-3
O O 323-1 M14 DRIVE 1 R
355-2 341-16 250-16 265-2
BK BK V V
M14
323-2 M14 DRIVE 2 211-B16 M11 VREF PS14 H 220-A7
BLADE
311-B16
MOTOR
265-1
PS14
CLEANING
HANDLE
RELEASE
SENSOR 1
359-1 353-3-9 341-17 M11 FEM L 311-B17 211-B17

R R R 323-6 M23 DRIVE 1
359-3 353-2-10 341-24
B B 341-18 211-B18 P M6 CLK
359-2 353-1-11 311-B18 266-1
M23
BK BK B 323-7 M23 DRIVE 2 R
MOTOR
266-2
CHARGER
250-18
CLEANING
311-B19 211-B19 SGND PS34 L 220-A9 BK V
266-3
PAPER
PS34
B B
SENSOR 1
REMAINING
311-B20 211-B20 M6 F/R

211-B21 M11 RES 250-10 268-3
311-B21 5VDC 220-A11 R R
DRUM
354-1 341-12 250-20 268-2
O O 323-3 24VDC 211-B22 L M6 OFF VR1 220-A12 V V
311-B22
SIZE
VR1
VR 1
354-2 341-13 B 268-1

PAPER
SD4
CLAW
V V 323-4 H SD4 CONT
DETECTION DETECTION
211-B23 M6 VREF
SOLENOID
O
311-B23
SEPARATION
356-1-2 353-11-1
O M6 24FEM L 311-B24 211-B24 251-12
356-2-1 353-10-2 341-14 TRAY 2 SET H 220-A17 W
PCL
PCL
BK BK BK 323-5 H PCL CONT 270-1
FM5 EM 311-B25 211-B25 251-14 R
5VDC 220-A18 R
251-11 270-2
352-1 340-2 Y BN
1-2
211-B26 L FM5 CONT PS35 220-A19

12
HTR1 BK 311-B26
355-9
251-23 270-3
PS35
SENSOR
352-2 340-3 SGND 220-A20 B B

W
13
311-B27 211-B27 L FM5 H/L

211-B28 271-1
FM5 FEM L 311-B28 R
482-1-6 473-8-6 470-6-8 251-15 271-2
O GY O 324-1 24VDC PS36 220-A22 Y Y
2-2
24VDC 311-B29 211-B29 271-3

PS36
482-2-5 473-9-5 470-5-9

SENSOR
O GY O 324-2 24VDC B
482-3-4 473-10-4 470-4-10 SGND 311-B30 211-B30
Y GY V 324-3 P M11 DRIVE A
482-4-3 473-11-3 470-3-11
M11
W GY Y 324-4 P M11 DRIVE A 262-6-1 275-1
TONER
SUPPLY
482-5-2 473-12-2 470-2-12 R R
MOTOR 1
V GY BN 324-5 P M11 DRIVE B 251-19 262-5-2 275-2
482-6-1 473-13-1 470-1-13 PS27 H 220-B1 Y Y Y
BN GY V 324-6 P M11 DRIVE B 262-4-3 275-3
PS27
B B
SENSOR 2
325-1 24VDC
325-2 24VDC
P 262-3-4 276-3
325-3 M6 DRIVE A R R
251-21
M6 BN
325-4 P M6 DRIVE A GY 262-2-5 BN 276-2
PRE-
PS50 H 220-B4
LOOP
PAPER
MOTOR
ROLLER
PS50
262-1-6 276-1
325-5 P M6 DRIVE B B B
SENSOR 2
REGISTRATION
325-6 P M6 DRIVE B
263-3-4 274-1
R R
251-17 263-2-5 274-2
TRAY 2
TRAY
DCDB
PS21 H 220-A24 GY BN BN
LIMIT
76-1 471-6
UPPER
O 322-9 L FM5/FM8 DRIVE 274-3

PS21
263-1-6
B B
SENSOR 2
76-3 471-8
Y 322-10 L FM5/FM8 H/L
76-2 471-7
BN 322-11 FM5 EM
FM5
FAN 1
WRITE
76-4 471-9 263-6-1 273-3

SECTION
COOLING
BK 322-12 PGND R R
251-22 273-2
BK Y 263-5-2 Y
FEED
PS49 H 220-B5
PAPER
PS49
263-4-3 273-1
B B
SENSOR 2
PRCB - 1 / 3
00/09/26, 18:25
77-1 265-3
R
77-2 251-16 265-2
PS15 H 220-A23 V V
77-3 265-1
PS15
HANDLE
B
FM8
RELEASE
FAN 2
WRITE
SENSOR 2
77-4
SECTION
COOLING
266-1
R
251-18 266-2
PS37 L 220-A25 BK V
PAPER
266-3
PS37
B
SENSOR 2
REMAINING
484-1 483-3-1 473-1-13 470-13-1

GY R GY R 228-1 L TLD CONT
484-2 483-2-2 473-2-12 470-12-2 251-10 268-3
GY V GY V 228-2 TLD 5VDC 220-B2 R R
TLD
484-3 483-1-3 473-3-11 470-11-3 251-20 268-2

LEVEL
TONER
GY B GY B 228-3 SGND VR2 220-B3 V V

SENSOR
SIZE
VR 2
VR2
268-1
PAPER
DETECTION
B
DETECTION DETECTION
184-1 473-4-10 470-10-4

O GY O
117
184-2 473-5-9 470-9-5

Y GY BN 228-4 H M15 CONT 252-12
184-3 473-6-8 470-8-6 TRAY 3 SET H 220-B11 W
M15
W GY V 228-5 M15 EM 252-14 287-1

5VDC 220-B12 R R
TONER
SUPPLY
184-4 473-7-7 470-7-7

MOTOR 2
BK GY BK 252-11 287-2
108
PS38 220-B13 Y BN
1-3
287-3
PS38
252-23
SENSOR
SGND 220-B14 B B
182-1
O
114
NC 220-B15
182-2 288-1
Y 228-6 H M3 CONT R
182-3 252-15 288-2
BN 228-7 P M3 CLK Y Y
M3
PS39 220-B16
2-3
182-4 288-3
PS39
V
MOTOR
228-8 M3 EM B
SENSOR
182-5
DEVELOPING
BK
105
181-1 279-6-1 275-1

O R
116
181-2 252-19 279-5-2 275-2

BN 229-1 H M1 CONT PS28 H 220-B20 Y Y
PS28
181-3 279-4-3 275-3

M1
V 229-2 M1 EM B
SENSOR 3
MAIN
181-4
MOTOR
BK
107
279-3-4 276-3
R
2-1 SGND 252-21 279-2-5 276-2
PS52 H 220-B23 GY BN
PRE-
PS52
2-2 24VDC
PAPER
279-1-6 276-1
B
SENSOR 3
2-3 M17 MAG A’ 583-5 474-1

REGISTRATION
BK
86
130-5 O
2-4 M17 MAG A 583-1 474-2
M17 EM 130-1 O Y 230-1
2-5 M17 MAG B’ 280-3-4 274-1
583-2 474-3 R
130-2 Y BN 230-2 P M17 CLK 280-2-5
2-6 M17 MAG B 252-17 274-2
TRAY 3
583-3 474-4 GY BN
TRAY
PS22 H 220-B18
LIMIT
M17
130-3 BN V 230-3 H M17 CONT

UPPER
PS22
2-7 M17 MAG C’ 280-1-6 274-3

MOTOR
583-4 474-5 B
SENSOR 3
POLYGON
V BK
87
2-8 M17 MAG C 130-4

2-9 P M17 DRIVE C
280-6-1 273-3
2-10 P M17 DRIVE B R
252-22 280-5-2 273-2
PMDB
2-11 P M17 DRIVE A PS51 H 220-B24 BK Y

FEED
PS51
PAPER
280-4-3 273-1
B
SENSOR 3
183-1 306-1
88
O
183-2
Y 220-A15 H FEEDM_CONT 282-3
183-3 R
M4
W 220-A16 FEEDM_EM 252-16 282-2

FEED
V V
PAPER
183-4 306-2 PS16 H 220-B17

MOTOR
89
BK 282-1
PS16
HANDLE
B
RELEASE
SENSOR 3
180-1 158-1
O O
115
180-2 158-2 283-1

BN Y 229-3 H M2 CONT R
180-3 158-3 252-18 283-2
V BN 229-4 M2 F/R PS40 L 220-B19 BK V
PAPER
283-3
PS40
180-4 158-4
M2
Y V B
SENSOR 3
229-5 SGND
REMAINING
DRUM
MOTOR
180-5 158-5
W Y 229-6 M2 EN
180-6 158-6 252-10 268-3
BK BK 5VDC 220-B21 R R
106
252-20 268-2
VR3 220-B22 V V
SIZE
VR3
VR 3
268-1
PAPER
B
DETECTION DETECTION
Di750field043e.p65
254-1-12 241-3
5VDC 222-1 R
254-8-5 241-2
VR
VR4 222-8 V
254-3-10
VR4
241-1
SGND 222-3 B
(BY-PASS)
DETECTION
PAPER SIZE
25
254-1-7 244-1
R
254-2-11
254-2-6 244-2
PS29 L 222-2 Y Y
NO
254-3-5 244-3
O
PS29
80
400-1 24VDC
PAPER
B
SENSOR
(BY-PASS)
BN
41
400-2 12VDC
R
42
400-3 5VDC
45
B 400-4 SGND
242-3
B
46
400-5 SGND 254-4-9
242-2
1
BK BN
81
400-6 SGND PS55 222-4
242-1
PS55
SENSOR
(BY-PASS)
PAPER SIZE
401-1 24VDC
119
BK 401-2 PGND
110
410-A1 BN 213-A1 RL1 DRIVE
431-1-6 GY 422-1 24VDC
BY-PASS
R 213-A2 RL1 SIG 243-3

431-2-5 GY
410-A2 254-5-8
422-2 24VDC 243-2
2
431-3-4 PS56 222-5 V

GY 422-3 P M10 DRIVE A 410-A3 O 213-A3 C(T) DRIVE 243-1
PS56
431-4-3
SENSOR
GY
M10
(BY-PASS)
422-4 P M10 DRIVE A
EXIT
Y
PAPER SIZE
(C)T FEM H 410-A4 213-A4
PAPER
MOTOR
431-5-2
GY 422-5 P M10 DRIVE B
431-6-1 ACV EM1 410-A5 GN 213-A5 ACV EM1
GY 422-6 P M10 DRIVE B
ZERO CROSS 410-A6 B 213-A6 ZERO CROSS 245-1
85-1 254-6-7 R
O 420-A1 L FM3 DRIVE 410-A7 V 213-A7 HTR CONT 254-4-4 245-2
85-3 PS43 L 222-6 Y W
TRAY
LIMIT
Y 245-3
PS43
420-A2 L FM3 H/L

LOWER
1
B
SENSOR
85-2 410-A8 GY 213-A8 H L2 CONT

(BY-PASS)
FAN
W 420-A3 FM3 EM
FM3
85-4
COOLING
BK 420-A4 PGND 410-A9 W 213-A9 H L3 CONT
MAIN BODY
410-A10 BK 213-A10 H L2/L3 CONT
246-3
86-1 R
O 420-A5 L FM4 DRIVE 410-A11 BN 213-A11 H L4 CONT 254-7-6 254-5-3 246-2
86-3 PS23 H 222-7 BN Y
LIMIT
TRAY
V 420-A6 L FM4 H/L

PS23
UPPER
R 246-1
2
SENSOR
86-2 AC5V FEM 410-A12 213-A12 AC5V FEM B

(BY-PASS)
FAN
W 420-A7 FM4 EM
FM4
86-4 O
COOLING
BK 420-A8 PGND AC12V FEM 410-A13 213-A13 AC12V FEM
MAIN BODY
410-A14 Y 213-A14 P M16 CLK
179-1 88-1 410-A15 GN 213-A15 SGND
O 420-B2 L FM6 DRIVE
179-3 88-3
Y 420-B3 L FM6 H/L B
410-A16 213-A16 H M16 CONT
3
179-2 88-2 253-7-4 292-3
R
FAN
W 5VDC 222-9 R
FM6
420-B4 FM6 EM
179-4 88-4 M16 VEM L 410-A17 V 213-A17 253-6-5 292-2
COOLING
BK 420-B5 PGND PS54 H 222-10 BN Y
MAIN BODY
292-1
LOOP
253-5-6
PS54
410-A18 GY 213-A18 HTR1 DRIVE B B

SENSOR
SGND 222-11
87-1 DH OPEN 410-A19 W 213-A19 DH OPEN
420-B6 L FM2 DRIVE
420-B7 NC 410-A20 BK 213-A20 P M10 CLK
87-2
FAN
W
FM2
420-B8 FM2 EM 293-3
87-3 410-A21 BN 213-A21 SGND
SUCTION
BK 420-B9 PGND R
253-4-7 293-2
DEVELOPING
1
410-A22 R 213-A22 M10 VREF PS18 H 222-12 Y BN

293-1
PS18
B
SENSOR
VERTICAL
410-A23 O 213-A23 M10 RES

CONVEYANCE
85-1 170-2-7 88-5

O 420-A9 24VDC 410-A24 Y 213-A24 M10 OFF
85-2 170-1-8 88-6
BK
C(T)
420-B1 H C(T) CONT GN
TOTAL
M10 24FEM 410-A25 213-A25 294-3
COUNTER
R
NC 410-A26 B 213-A26 253-3-8 294-2
2
PS53 H 222-13 BN Y
269-1 250-1 294-1
PS53
15
HTR2 GY GY V B
SENSOR
NC 410-A27 213-A27
VERTICAL
269-2 250-13 305-2

GY BK BK 430-1 HTR2 CONT
CONVEYANCE
NC 410-A28 GY 213-A28
269-1 251-1 NC 410-A29 W 213-A29
GY
16
HTR3
269-2 251-13 305-4 295-3
BK BK 430-2 HTR3 CONT R
NC 410-A30 BK 213-A30 253-2-9
VERTICAL PAPER FEED
295-2
3
PS19 H 222-14 V V
307-1 252-1 410-B1 BN 213-B1 L FM3 CONT 295-1
PS19
B
SENSOR
GY
17
HTR4
VERTICAL
307-2 252-13 305-6 R

CONVEYANCE
BK BK 430-3 HTR4 CONT HFAN1 HL 410-B2 213-B2 L FM3 H/L

FM3 EM 410-B3 O 213-B3
361-1 751-5
GY
18
HTR101
361-2 751-6 FM3 FEM L 410-B4 Y 213-B4 296-3
BK R
LT-401
430-4 HTR101 CONT 253-1-10 296-2
410-B5 GN 213-B5 L FM4 CONT PS17 H 222-15 Y GY
296-1
PS17
B
410-B6 B 213-B6 L FM4 H/L
DETECTION
OPEN/CLOSE
343-1 FM4 EM 410-B7 V 213-B7
12
FT3 HTR1 CONT
FM4 FEM L 410-B8 GY 213-B8
343-2
13
FT4 H HTR1 DRIVE
410-B9 W 213-B9 L FM6 CONT
451-1
FIX SET 1 H 223-A1 W W
410-B10 BK 213-B10 L FM6 H/L 451-12
5VDC 223-A2 R
FM6 EM 410-B11 BN 213-B11 451-13 464-1
5VDC 223-A3 Y R
551-7
BK 451-15
10
FT2 AC30V(H) R
464-2
FM6 FEM L 410-B12 213-B12 PS2 H 223-A9 O BK
EXIT
PS2
451-17 464-3
FIXING
551-17 GY B
11
SENSOR
FT1 AC30V(C) 410-B13 O 213-B13 H FM2 CONT SGND 223-B2

SFAN HL 410-B14 Y 213-B14 NC
FM2 EM 410-B15 GN 213-B15 465-1
451-14
5VDC 223-A4 B R
90-5 B 213-B16 451-16 465-2
400-7 24VDC FM2 FEM L 410-B16 PS3 H 223-A10 V W
JAM
PS3
451-18 465-3
FIXING
90-6 GY B
RL1
V
SENSOR
223-B3
MAIN AC ENB 410-B17 213-B17 AC ENB
RELAY
400-8 L RL1 CONT 451-19
223-B4 O BK
C(K) FEM 410-B18 GY 213-B18 451-10
FIX SET 2 L 223-B1 V
410-B19 W 213-B19 C(K) SIG
451-2 466-1-2
TH1 ANG 1 223-A5 W R TH1
1
410-B20 BK 213-B20 C(K) CONT 451-3 466-2-1

TH1 ANG 2 223-A6 BN R
FIXING
SENSOR
VENDER CPOY 410-B21 BN 213-B21

TEMPARATURE
VENDER FEED 410-B22 R 213-B22

451-11
BK R 424-1 M16 DRIVE 1 PAPER SIZE 0 410-B23 O 213-B23
FIXING
451-20
WEB
W B
M16
424-2 M16 DRIVE 2 451-4 467-1-3

DRIVE
PAPER SIZE 1 410-B24 Y 213-B24 BN W

MOTOR
TH2 ANG 1 223-A7

2
TH2
451-5 467-3-1
O W
FIXING
TH2 ANG 2 223-A8

SENSOR
TS1 PAPER SIZE 2 410-B25 GN 213-B25

CN450-8 462-1 450-3
BK W L4 442-4 L4 DRIVE
PAPER SIZE 3 410-B26 B 213-B26
CN14-1 440-1 L2 DRIVE
500
CN450-5
2
BK BK V
501
W
450-1 W VENDER double slded 410-B27 213-B27
500
L2
TS2 O
451-6 BK
468-1-4
442-1 L3 DRIVE TH3 ANG 1 223-B5 TH3
502
NC 410-B28 GY 213-B28
3
451-7 468-3-2
503
450-2 TH3 ANG 2 223-B6 V BK

FIXING
BK BK W
SENSOR
L3 213-B29
502
NC 410-B29
440-2 L2 TRIG
504
TEMPARATURE TEMPARATURE
442-2 L3 TRIG SGND 410-B30 BK 213-B30

505
440-4 AC(C)
4
442-5 AC(C)
451-8 469-2-4
506
442-3 AC(C) TH4 ANG 1 223-B7 R B TH4

4
R
451-9 469-4-2
440-3 T3 DRVG B
507
TH4 ANG 2 223-B8

FIXING
SENSOR
TEMPARATURE
341-19 355-3 360-1

ACDB
5VDC 225-A1 R R
341-20 355-4 360-2
1
PS30 225-A2 V V
100V SYSTEM
341-21 355-5 360-3

BLADE
PS30
B B
SENSOR
SGND 225-A3
24VDC
C(K)
SGND
00/09/26, 18:25
C(K) CONT 355-6 361-1
R
341-22 355-7 361-2
2
PGND PS31 225-A4 Y Y

BLADE
355-8 361-3
PS31
SENSOR
VENDER CPOY
VENDER FEED 353-3-9 357-1
NC 225-A5 R R
PAPER SIZE 0 341-11 353-4-8 357-2
PS41 L 225-A6 Y Y Y
WIRE
353-5-7 357-3
PS41
PAD HP
PAPER SIZE 1
SENSOR
SGND 225-A7 B B
CLEANING
CHARGING
PAPER SIZE 2
PAPER SIZE 3
VENDER double slded
353-6-6 358-1
NC R R
341-23 353-7-5 358-2
NC PS42 H 225-A8 W W W
WIRE
353-8-4 358-3
PS42
SENSOR
B B
CLEANING
PAD LIMIT
CHARGING
PGND
PRCB - 2 / 3
340-1 350-4-1
O 458-1
90
DPS DRIVE A 457-1

340-4 350-3-2
451-11 224-6 Y 458-2 DPS ANG DPS DRIVE B 457-2
BK 340-5 350-2-1
B 458-3 DPS ANG 1 457-3
DPS
451-20 AGND 224-7

DPSB
W
M16
340-6 350-1-4
WEB
DRIVE
458-4
91
B DPS ANG 2 457-4

MOTOR
DRUM
TS1
CN450-8 462-1 450-3
BK R L4 W
CN14-1 TS2
CN450-5
2
BK BK 450-1
501
R L2 W 340-12
68
CN450-6
BK
509
340-11
502
DRUM SET H 224-1

450-2 340-7 351-4-1
CN450-7 BK L3 W 12VDC 224-2 R 455-1
BK
508
340-8 351-3-2
504
5VDC 224-3 Y 455-2

340-9 351-2-3
505
B 455-3 DRUM TEMP TH5 ANG 1 456-1 TH5

224-4
DTSB
340-10 351-1-4 TH5 ANG 2 456-2

AGND 224-5 O 455-4
4
506
510
507
DRUM
SENSOR
341-1
R R 454-1
TEMPARATURE
5VDC 225-B1
341-2
Dmax LED CONT L 225-B2 Y Y 454-2
341-3
γ /Dmax LED Vref 225-B3 V W 454-3
341-4
γ LED CONT L 225-B4 GY V 454-4
341-5
W Y 454-5
200V SYSTEM
JAM LED CONT L 225-B5

TCSB
341-6
225-B6 BK W 454-6 Dmax SIG
BOARD
341-7
225-B7 Y V 454-7 Dmax MONI
341-8
225-B8 V Y 454-8 γ SIG/MONI
341-9
225-B9 GY W 454-9 JAM SIG
TONER CONTROL SENSOR
341-10
AGND 225-B10 B BN 454-10
Di750field043e.p65
540-11
BN BN 215-B2 P S SHIFT(DC)
540-12
R R 215-B3
540-13
O O 215-B4
540-14
Y Y 215-B5 P S SHIFT(AC)
540-15
P P 215-B6 P T SHIFT
540-18
B B 215-B9 SGND
540-16
W W 215-B7 P ADU MCLK
540-17
V V 215-B8
540-8
GY GY 215-A8 P ADU REQ
540-7
V V 215-A7 P ADU ACK
540-6
B B 215-A6
540-5
P P 215-A5
540-4
Y Y 215-A4
540-3
O O 215-A3 P ADU LATCH
540-2
R R 215-A2 P ADU TXD CLK
540-1
BN BN 215-A1 P ADU TXD
26
510-9
510-5
510-7
510-3
510-2
510-1
510-11
510-10
510-6 P
510-8 P
510-4 P
24VDC 527-1 557-6-1
GY
557-5-2
24VDC 527-2 GY
RESIST
557-4-3
M9 DRIVE A P 527-3 GY
ADU RXD
ADU ERR
557-3-4
M9
M9 DRIVE A 527-4 GY
MOTOR
P
557-2-5
TRANSFER
M9 DRIVE B 527-5 GY
P
ADU RXD CLK

557-1-6
M9 DRIVE B 527-6 GY
P
24VDC 523-1
578-3 571-3-1 24VDC 523-2
B R 525-7 5VDC
578-2 571-2-2 V M7 DRIVE A 523-3
Y 525-9 H PS57 P
M7
ADU
PAPER
578-1 571-1-3
PS57
R B M7 DRIVE A P 523-4
SENSOR
PAPER
525-11 SGND
MOTOR
REVERSE
REVERSE
M7 DRIVE B P 523-5
M7 DRIVE B P 523-6
579-3 554-3-1 24VDC 528-1 559-6-1
R 525-6 5VDC GY
579-2 554-2-2 24VDC 528-2 559-5-2
Y 525-8 H PS8 GY
PS8
579-1 554-1-3 559-4-3
PAPER
PRCB - 3 / 3
B M8 DRIVE A P 528-3 GY
SENSOR
525-10 SGND
REVERSE
559-3-4 ADU
M8
PAPER
M8 DRIVE A 528-4 GY
MOTOR
P
/CONVEYANCE
559-2-5
M8 DRIVE B P 528-5 GY CONVEYANCE
580-3 553-3-1 559-1-6
R M8 DRIVE B P 528-6 GY
521-A2 5VDC
580-2 553-2-2 V 24VDC 521-A1 560-1
521-B3 H PS58
ADU
580-1 553-1-3
PS58
560-2
PAPER
B 521-B8 SGND M12 CONT H 521-A5
SENSOR
113
REVERSE
560-3
M12 CLK P 521-A6
560-4 M12 O
MOTOR
M12 EM 521-A7 255-1 24VDC

581-3 572-3-1 560-5
R
68
R 521-A13 5VDC PGND 521-B12 255-2 12VDC

REGISTRATION
581-2 572-2-2 GY 256-1 SGND

BN 521-B6 H PS9 227-1
24VDC 524-1
PS9
ADU
PAPER
581-1 572-1-3 B GY 256-2
C CONT 1 H 227-2
SENSOR
521-B10 SGND 24VDC 524-2
GY 256-3
CONVEYANCE
M5 DRIVE A P 524-3 C CONT 2 H 227-3
C SHIFT 227-4 GY 256-4
M5
/EXIT
M5 DRIVE A P 524-4
PAPER
MOTOR
582-3 573-3-1 GY 256-5

REVERSE
R 521-B1 5VDC M5 DRIVE B 524-5 G SHIFT 227-5

P
HV1
582-2 573-2-2 B CONT H 227-6 GY 256-6

Y 521-B7 H PS13 M5 DRIVE B 524-6
P
ADU
PS13
582-1 573-1-3 B SHIFT 227-7 GY 256-7
B 521-B11 SGND
SENSOR
561-1
NO PAPER
M18 DRIVE 1 L 520-B7 O 227-8 GY 256-8 C SIG
BK
561-2 GY
M18
M18 DRIVE 2 L 520-B8 227-9 256-9 B FB

MOTOR
BK
CLEANING
583-3 574-3-1 255-3 PGND

TRANSFER
R 521-A12 5VDC
/SEPARATION
583-2 574-2-2
W 521-B5 H PS59 592-1
ADU
FM1 DRIVE L 525-3 Y
104
583-1 574-1-3
PS59
B
SENSOR
521-B9 SGND 592-2
FM1 EM 525-4 W
FM1
592-3
FAN
EXIT
PGND 525-5 BK
PAPER
584-3 575-3-1 R
B 521-A4 5VDC
584-2 575-2-2 P BN
Y GY 521-B4 H PS60 IPB IFB TXD 210-A1
600
562-2-1
PS60
584-1 R
575-1-3 B
24VDC 520-B13 O SGND 210-A2 B
601
521-A10 SGND
SENSOR
562-1-2
ADU PRE-
SD3
Y
GUIDE
R
FIXING
SD3 CONT H 520-B10 IPB IFB TXD REQ P 210-A3

602
SOLENOID
P O
603
IPB IFB TXD ACK 210-A4
ADUSDB
585-3 576-1-6 SGND 210-A5 B
604
R R 521-B1 5VDC
585-2 576-2-5 593-2-1 IPB IFB TXD ERR P 210-A6 Y
605
BN BN 520-B5 L PS11 24VDC 522-1 O
WIRE
PS11
585-1 576-3-4 593-1-2 GN
606
ADU
210-A7
SD1
B B 520-B3 SGND 522-3 V

LOCK
PAD HP
SD1 CONT H
SENSOR
CLEANING
B
TRANSFER/
607
210-A8
SOLENOID
DECELERATION REGISTRATION SEPARATION

V
608
210-A9
586-3 576-4-3 GY
609
R R 520-B2 5VDC 525-2-1 210-A10

24VDC 525-1 O
586-2 576-5-2 B
610
Y Y 520-B6 H PS12 525-1-2 210-A11

SD2
BN
WIRE
SD2 CONT H 525-2
PAPER
W
611
586-1 576-6-1
PS12
210-A12
REVERSE
B B
SENSOR
520-B4 SGND
SOLENOID
PAD LIMIT
CLEANING
TRANSFER
BN
612
210-A13
/SEPARATION
R
613
TONER 210-A14
O
564-2-1 O
614
24VDC 521-B11 210-A15

587-3 R 564-1-2
PRE
ADU
522-2 5VDC Y Y
615
MC2
MC2 CONT H 521-A8 210-B1

CLUTCH
587-2 Y 522-4 PS10 GN

616
210-B2
ADU
PS10
587-1
GATE -REGISTRATION
B V
HANDLE
522-5 SGND
SENSOR
RELEASE
617
210-B3
GY
618
O
565-2-1 RESET 210-B4
24VDC 520-B14
W
619
591-10 568-1-8 565-1-2 RESET CONT 210-B5

O O GY
MC1
520-A1 24VDC MC1 CONT H 520-B11

R
177-1-3
R
480-3
591-4 568-2-7 5VDC 210-B6
CLUTCH
GY GY 520-A3 -5VDC 170-3-6 480-2

R
591-3 568-3-6 5VDC 210-B7
REGISTRATION
PS61
EXIT
R R 520-A2 5VDC 170-6-3 480-1

PAPER
R
SENSOR
591-1 568-4-5 577-1-3 588-3 5VDC 210-B8

BN BN 520-A4 PS1 VIDEO 5VDC 521-A3 R 177-2-2
PS1
BN Y
591-6 568-5-4 577-2-2 588-2 PS61 210-B9
Y Y 520-A5 PS1 SI PS46 H 521-B2 Y 170-2-7
O
ADU
EXIT
591-8 568-6-3 PS24 210-B10
SENSOR
577-3-1 588-1
PS46
V V 520-A6 P PS1 CLK B 170-5-4

SENSOR
SGND 521-A9 Y
591-9 568-7-2 PS25 210-B11
GY GY 520-A7 PS1 LED 177-3-1
B B
591-2 568-8-1 SGND 210-B12
B B 520-A8 SGND 170-1-8
PAPER MIS-CENTERING
B
569-6-2 599-1-3 589-3 SGND 210-B13 81-1-6 85-3
520-A8 SGND 5VDC 520-A12 R R R 170-4-5 R
B
569-5-3 599-2-2 589-2 SGND 210-B14 81-2-5 85-2
1
PS44 H 520-A14 V V V Y
DOOR
SENSOR
569-4-4 599-3-1 589-1 81-3-4 85-1

PS24
FRONT
PS44
B B B B
SENSOR
SGND 520-A10
REGISTRATION
OPEN/CLOSE
569-3-5 590-3
5VDC 520-A11 R R
Y
569-2-6 Y 590-2
PS45 H 520-A13
550-1
EDGE
O 569-1-7 590-1 81-4-3 87-3

PS45
652-1 526-1 24VDC B B

SONSOR
LEADING
SGND 520-A9 R
DETECTION
551-1
BN 81-5-2 87-2
2
653-1 526-3 L GP CONT V

551-2
DOOR
Y 81-6-1 87-1
PS25
FRONT
653-2 526-4 L T CONT B

SENSOR
551-3 567-2-1
OPEN/CLOSE
653-3 24VDC 520-B12 O

551-4 567-1-2
653-4 V 523-5 L S CONTZ W
TSL
520-B9
LAMP
TSL CONT H
551-5
653-5
TRANSFER
551-6
653-6
531-7-1
SYNCHRONIZATION
551-7 5VDC 522-6 BN

653-7 GY 526-6 SEL
551-8 531-6-2
S FB(DC) 653-8 JAM L1 H 522-7 R
HV2 S FB(AC)
T SIG
653-9
L 653-10
551-9
551-10
W 526-7
JAM L2
JAM L3
H
H
522-8
522-9
O
Y
531-5-3
531-4-4
551-11 531-3-5
JAMIB
S SIG L 653-11 BN 526-8 JAM L4 H 522-10 B

550-3 531-2-6
B JAM L5 522-11 V
JAM INDICATION
652-3 526-9 SGND H

550-4 GY
531-1-7
652-4 BK
BN 526-10 PGND SGND 522-12
PGND
SGND
SGND
-5VDC
5VDC
12VDC
24VDC
PGND
24VDC
217-A1 P LT TXD
217-A2 5VDC
00/09/26, 18:25
500-3
500-8
500-5
500-7
500-4
500-2
500-1
501-2
501-1
217-A3 P LT TXD CLK

217-A4 SGND
R
O
O
B
B
BK
BK
217-A5 P LT LATCH
BN
GY
217-A6 SGND
217-A7 P LT RXD CLK
217-A8 SGND
542-8
542-7
542-6
542-5
542-4
542-3
542-2
542-1
541-2
541-1
217-B1 P LT ERR
R
O
O
B
B
B
BK
BK
BN
GY
217-B2 SGND
217-B3 P LT RXD
(2)
(1)
217-B4 SGND
258-8
258-7
258-6
258-5
258-4
258-3
258-2
258-1
257-2
257-1
217-B5 P LT ACK
120
217-B6 SGND
111
217-B7 P LT REQ
Crimp
82
217-B8 SGND
47
R - Red
48
Y - Yellow
BN - Brown
GN - Green
V
49
O - Orange
50
51
[Symbol]
52
83
[Color code]
[How to see the diagram]
50-1
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
the main switch turned ON.
Connector
FIN TXD
FIN TXD
FIN TXD
FIN RXD
FIN RXD
FIN RXD
ACK
ACK
REQ
REQ
LB - Light blue P - Pink

GY - Gray
V
B - Blue
green yellow striped pattern.

BK - Black
Example: Y/GN represents

W - White
V - Violet
under normal idling conditions with
Wire(Violet)
Faston
1.The signals shown reflect levels present
218-12
218-11
218-10
218-9
218-8
218-7
218-6
218-5
218-4
218-3
218-2
218-1
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.

GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
756-4-9
756-5-8
756-6-7
756-7-6
756-8-5
756-9-4
756-2-11
756-11-2
756-1-12
756-3-10
756-10-3
756-12-1
750-1-10
750-2-9
750-3-8
750-4-7
CB
750-5-6
Example)
(4) Signal flow
750-6-5
SGND
PS1
5VDC
750-7-4
(3) RC is ribbon cable.
FN - 4
750-8-3
FN - 104
750-9-2
signal flow
Direction of
the connector symbols ( )
750-10-1
66
C-305 / C-305L
67
751-4
98
BK
85
751-1
The solid black circle ( ) among
99
O
84
751-3
77
B
56
PS1
indicates the direction of signal flow.
751-2
112
R
55
PS317 L 8-B1 LB 53-1
SGND 8-A12 B 53-2
PS
(2)
(1)
5VDC 8-B2
PS317
Y 53-3
APS timing
Crimp
CB
R - Red
PS312 LED CONT L 8-A11 LB 52-1
Example)
Y - Yellow
BN - Brown
PS312 H 8-B3
GN - Green
B 52-2
(4) Signal flow

V
O - Orange
skew
5VDC 8-A10
PS312
Y 52-3
Original
SGND
PS1
5VDC
LB - Light blue
[Symbol]
detection PS2
P
V
B
[Color code]
50-1
(3) RC is ribbon cable.

the main switch turned ON.
PS311 LED CONT L 8-B4 LB 51-1
The solid black circle (

Connector
PS311 H 8-A9 B 51-2
the connector symbols (
signal flow
skew
5VDC 8-B5
PS311
Y 51-3
Direction of
Original
- Pink
GY - Gray
V
- Blue
)
green yellow striped pattern.
Example: Y/GN represents
BK - Black
W - White
- Violet
detection PS1
Wire(Violet)
) among
Faston
PS305 LED CONT L 8-A8 LB 50-1
1.The signals shown reflect levels present
PS1
PS308 H 8-B6 B
indicates the direction of signal flow.

50-2
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.

5VDC 8-A7
PS308
Y 50-3
Original
conveyance
detection PS
PS301 L 8-B7 LB 49-1

SGND 8-A6 B 49-2
5VDC 8-B8
PS301
Y 49-3
/close PS
RADF open
5VDC 31-3 R 1-1 46-1 47-3

PS307 H 8-A5 LB W 48-1
SGND 31-4 BK 1-2 46-2 47-2
SGND 8-B9 B W 48-2
exit
PS1
24VDC 31-1 O 1-3 46-3 47-1

PS307
5VDC 8-A4 Y W 48-3

Original
PGND 31-2 GY 1-4
32-8 LB 3-1 L PS315

32-7 P 3-2 P DF VALID
32-3 Y 3-3 P DF CTS 42-1 43-6
PS309 LED CONT L 8-B10 LB B 45-1
32-2 BN 3-4 P DF DTR 42-2 43-5
PS309 H 8-A3 B
MAIN BODY
B 45-2
PS
EDH-2 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
32-1 BK 3-5 P DF RXD 42-3 43-4

PS309
5VDC 8-B11 Y B 45-3

Original
DF RTS P 32-6 W 3-6

DF DSR P 32-5 V 3-7
DF TXD P 32-4 B 3-8
46-1 43-3
PS304 LED CONT L 8-A2 LB B 44-1
46-2 43-2
PS304 H 8-B12 B B 44-2
PS
46-3 43-1
PS304
5VDC 8-A1 Y B 44-3

Reverse
reversal detection jam detection
PS316 L 5-3 B 41-1

SGND 5-2 B 41-2
PS
PS316
57-1 56-2 55-1 54-6 5VDC 5-1 B 41-3

Tray lower
B B 15-1 24VDC
57-2 56-1 55-2 54-5
limit detection
B B 15-2 H SD301 DRIVE

SD301
Flapper
drive SD
5VDC 7-9 B 40-1

59-1 58-2 55-3 54-4 PS315 H 7-8 B 40-2
PS
B B 15-3 24VDC
PS315
59-2 58-1 55-4 54-3 SGND 7-7 B 40-3

Tray upper
SD302
limit detection
release SD
Pressure roller
61-1 60-2 55-5 54-2 5VDC 7-6 B 39-1

B B 15-5 24VDC
61-2 60-1 55-6 54-1 PS305 H 7-5 B 39-2
PS

SD
PS305
SGND 7-4 B 39-3

SD303
detection
Original
No original
exit gate
63-1 62-3
B 9-1 24VDC
63-2 62-2 PS306 LED CONT L 7-3 B 38-1
SD
B 9-2 H SD304 DRIVE

PS306 H 7-2 B 38-2
SD304
PS
PS306
5VDC 7-1 B 38-3

Original
SDF switching
registration detection
65-1 64-3
B 9-3 PGND
65-2 64-2
B 9-4 H FM301 LD
65-3 64-1
B
FM301
9-5 L FM301 DRIVE

ADF fan
DFCB
Y 10-1 P M302 DRIVE B

R 10-2 P M302 DRIVE B
5VDC 22-1 Y 35-3
O 10-3 P M302 DRIVE A
SGND 22-2 B 35-1
PS1
BN 10-4 P M302 DRIVE A

M302
PS302
PS302 H 22-3 LB 35-2

Original
Original
BK 10-5 24VDC
feed motor
size detection
W 10-6 24VDC
5VDC 22-4 Y 36-3

SGND 22-5 B 36-1
PS2
BK 11-1 24VDC
PS303
5VDC 6-1 R 21-1 LB 36-2

Original
PS303 H 22-6
W 11-2 24VDC
PS310 H 6-2 Y 21-2
size detection
B 11-3 P M301 DRIVE A

PS303 H 6-3 W 21-3
O 11-4 P M301 DRIVE A
M301
PS302 H 6-4 LB 21-4

Original
R 11-5 P M301 DRIVE B

PTBD
VR301 6-5 P 21-5

SGND 6-6 BK 21-6 5VDC 22-7 Y 37-3
conveyance motor
SGND 22-8 B 37-1

PS
PS310
PS310 H 22-9 LB 37-2

detection
Original count
O 14-1 P M303 DRIVE B

BK 14-3 P M303 DRIVE A
5VDC 23-1 BN
BN 14-4 P M303 DRIVE A
M303
VR301 23-2 LB
VR
R 14-5 24VDC
VR301
SGND 23-3 B
Original
drive motor
R 14-6 24VDC
Tray up/down
size detection

BN 12-3 P M304 DRIVE B
Y 12-4 P M304 DRIVE A
R 12-5 P M304 DRIVE A
M304
Original
BK 12-6 24VDC
exit motor 1
W 12-7 24VDC
5VDC 4-1 W 33-3
SGND 4-2 W 33-2
exit
PS2
PS314
PS314 H 4-3 W 33-1

Original

BN 13-2 P M305 DRIVE B
Y 13-3 P M305 DRIVE A
R 13-4 P M305 DRIVE A
M305
5VDC 4-4 B 34-3

Original
BK 13-5 24VDC
exit motor 2
PS313 H 4-5 B 34-2

PS
W 13-6 24VDC
PS313
PS313 LED CONT L 4-6 B 34-1

Original exit
reverse detection
66-1
MS301 H 16-1 B
MS301
/close MS
66-2
Cover open
24VDC 16-2 O
FN-104/FN-4 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM (1/3)
PGND 201-A1 24-A1 PGND M13DRVA 21-A1 4-A1 M13DRVA
PGND 201-A2 24-A2 PGND M13DRVA 21-A2 4-A2 M13DRVA
5V PGND 201-A3 M13DRVB 21-A3 4-A3 M13DRVB
STAPLER PS31 PS31IN M13DRVB 21-A4 M13DRVB
NC 201-A4 4-A4
HP PS/R GND M13_24V 21-A5 M13_24V
SGND 201-A5 4-A5
SGND 201-A6 24-A3 SGND M13_24V 21-A6 4-A6 M13_24V
5V 5V 201-A7 24-A4 5V M4DRVA 21-A7 4-A7 M4DRVA
CLINCHER PS32 PS32IN 5V 201-A8 M4DRVA 21-A8 4-A8 M4DRVA
TIMING PS/R GND /RESET 201-A9 24-A7 /RESET M4DRVB 21-A9 4-A9 M4DRVB
SPCH 201-A10 24-B5 SPCH M4DRVB 21-A10 4-A10 M4DRVB
CARTRIDGE 5V SNCH 201-A11 24-B6 SNCH M4_24V 21-A11 4-A11 M4_24V
DETECTION SW1 5V IN /OPTION 201-A12 24-B7 /OPTION M4_24V 21-A12 4-A12 M4_24V
SWITCH/R
/SHOME 201-B1 24-B8 /SHOME M4_24V 21-A13 4-A13 M4_24V
RC
EC00 201-B2 24-A8 EC00 M4_24V 21-A14 4-A14 M4_24V
STAPLE M5DRVA 21-A15 NC 1-B15
5V EC01 201-B3 24-A9 EC01 4-A15 M5DRVA
DETECTION SW2 M5DRVA 21-A16
5V IN EC02 201-B4 24-A10 EC02 4-A16 M5DRVA
SWITCH/R M5DRVB 21-A17
/READY 201-B5 24-A11 /READY 4-A17 M5DRVB
STAPLER M22DRV F /BUSY 201-B6 24-B1 /BUSY M5DRVB 21-A18 4-A18 M5DRVB
M22 M22DRV R 357-3
MOTOR/R /CLRREQ 201-B7 24-B2 /CLRREQ PGND 21-A19 4-A19 PGND 5V 1-A13 PAPER EXIT COVER
PGND 21-A20 PGND PS207IN L 1-B18 357-2
/START 201-B8 24-B3 /START 4-A20 PS207 OPEN-CLOSE
PGND 21-A21 PGND GND 1-A22 357-1
/CLR 201-B9 24-B4 /CLR 4-A21 DETECTION PS
24V 201-B10 PGND 21-A22 4-A22 PGND
24V 201-B11 24-A5 24V PGND 21-A23 4-A23 PGND
24V 201-B12 24-A6 24V M11DRVA 21-A24 4-A24 M11DRVA
M11DRVA 21-A25 M11DRVA 102-1 DRV
4-A25 24V 1-A2 ROLLER SHIFT
M11DRVB 21-A26 M11DRVB 102-2 PGND M2
4-A26 DRV H 1-B29 MOTOR
M11DRVB 21-A27 4-A27 M11DRVB
5V PGND 202-A1 23-A7 PGND
NC 21-A28 4-A28 NC
CLINCHER PS30 PS30IN PGND 202-A2 23-A8 PGND 108-1
NC 21-A29 4-A29 NC 24V 1-A1 PAPER EXIT
HP PS/R GND SGND 202-A3 108-2 M8
NC 21-A30 4-A30 NC DRV H 1-B30 OPENING MOTOR
SGND 202-A4 23-A5 SGND 4-B1
/RESET 21-B1 R/RESET
5V 202-A5 23-A6 5V 4-B2
EC00 21-B2 R/EC00
5V 202-A6 4-B3 1-B6 101-1
EC01 21-B3 R/EC01 5V
24V 202-A7 4-B4 1-B1 101-2
EC02 21-B4 R/EC02 M1BRK L
24V 202-A8 101-3
CLINCHER M21DRV F /READY 21-B5 4-B5 R/READY M1CONT L 1-B2
MOTOR/R M21 M21DRV R 24V 202-B1 23-A9 24V
21-B6 4-B6 M1CLK 1-B3 101-4
/BUSY R/BUSY
24V 202-B2 23-A10 24V 4-B7 1-B4 101-5
/CLRREQ 21-B7 R/CLRREQ M1PLL FNS
SPCH 202-B3 23-A4 SPCH 1-B5 101-6
/START 21-B8 4-B8 R/START M1F/R M1 CONVEYANCE
SNCH 202-B4 23-A3 SNCH 4-B9 1-B19 101-7
/CLR 21-B9 R/CLR 24V MOTOR
/OPTION 202-B5 23-A2 /OPTION 4-B10 1-B20 101-8
ST_24V 21-B10 ST_24V 24V
/SHOME 202-B6 23-A1 /SHOME 4-B11 1-B13 101-9
ST_24V 21-B11 ST_24V PGND
PGND 202-B7 4-B12 1-B14 101-10
ST_24V 21-B12 ST_24V PGND
PGND 202-B8 4-B13 101-11
/RESET 21-B13 F/RESET
EC00 21-B14 4-B14 F/EC00
EC01 21-B15 4-B15 F/EC01
21-B16 4-B16 5V 1-B7 107-1
PGND 203-A1 28-A1 PGND EC02 F/EC02
21-B17 4-B17 107-2
PGND 203-A2 28-A2 PGND /READY F/READY
5V 21-B18 4-B18 M7P/S 1-B8 107-3
PGND 203-A3 /BUSY F/BUSY
STAPLER PS34 PS34IN 21-B19 4-B19 M7CLK 1-B9 107-4
NC 203-A4 /CLRREQ F/CLRREQ
HP PS/F GND 21-B20 4-B20 M7H/L 1-B10 107-5
SGND 203-A5 /START F/START
21-B21 4-B21 M7LD 1-B11 107-6
SGND 203-A6 28-A3 SGND /CLR F/CLR PAPER EXIT
5V 5V 21-B22 4-B22 107-7 M7
5V 203-A7 28-A4 5V 5V ROLLER MOTOR
CLINCHER PS35 PS35IN 21-B23 4-B23 PGND 1-B16 107-8
5V 203-A8 5V 5V
TIMING PS/F GND 21-B24 4-B24 PGND 1-B17 107-9
/RESET 203-A9 28-A7 /RESET SGND SGND
21-B25 4-B25 24V 1-B21 107-10
CARTRIDGE SPCH 203-A10 28-B6 SPCH SGND SGND
5V 21-B26 4-B26 24V 1-B22 107-11
DETECTION SNCH 203-A11 28-B7 SNCH PS 8IN PS 8IN
SW3 5V IN 21-B27 4-B27 M7F/R 1-B12 107-12
SWITCH/F /OPTION 203-A12 28-B8 /OPTION PS 9IN PS 9IN
PS11IN 21-B28 4-B28 PS11IN
RC
/SHOME 203-B1 28-B9 /SHOME

PS14IN 21-B29 4-B29 PS14IN
STAPLE EC00 203-B2 28-A8 EC00
5V PS20IN 21-B30 4-B30 PS20IN
DETECTION SW4 EC01 203-B3 28-A9 EC01
SWITCH/F 5V IN EC02 203-B4 28-A10 EC02
5V 170-3 121-3
/READY 203-B5 28-B1 /READY 1-A12 SUB-TRAY
M24DRV F M14DRVA 170-2 121-2
STAPLER M24 /BUSY 203-B6 28-B2 /BUSY 22-A1 5-A1 M14DRVA PS1IN H 1-A30 PS1 PAPER EXIT PS
M24DRV R M14DRVA 22-A2 M14DRVA GND 170-1 121-1
MOTOR/F /CLRREQ 203-B7 28-B3 /CLRREQ 5-A2 1-A21
/START 203-B8 28-B4 /START
/CLR 203-B9 28-B5 /CLR
M15DRVA 22-A5 5-A5 M15DRVA
24V 203-B10 124-3
M15DRVA 22-A6 5-A6 M15DRVA 5V 1-A11
24V 203-B11 28-A5 24V 124-2 FIN ENTRANCE
M15DRVB 22-A7 5-A7 M15DRVB PS4IN H 1-A29 PS4
24V 203-B12 28-A6 24V 124-1 PASSAGE PS
M15DRVB 22-A8 5-A8 M15DRVB GND 1-A20
M17_12V 22-B1 5-B1 M17_12V
28-B10
M17_CONT 22-B2 5-B2 M17_CONT
PGND 204-A1 23-B10 PGND PS21IN 22-B3 5-B3 PS21IN
5V 5V 125-3
CLINCHER PGND 204-A2 23-B11 PGND PS23IN 22-B4 5-B4 PS23IN 1-A10 STACKER CONVEYANCE
PS33 PS33IN PS5IN 125-2
HP SGND 204-A3 PS24IN 22-B5 5-B5 PS24IN H 1-A28 PS5 PASSAGE
GND GND 125-1
PS/F SGND 204-A4 23-B13 SGND 5-B6 BMSET 1-A19 DETECTION PS
5V 204-A5 23-B12 5V 5-B7 GND
5V 204-A6 5-B8 N.C.
24V 204-A7 126-3
5V 1-A9
24V 204-A8 162-6 128-3 126-2
CLINCHER M23DRV F 5V PS6IN H 1-A27
M23 24V 204-B1 23-B8 24V 25-A5 PS6 PAPER EXIT 1 PS
MOTOR/F M23DRV R PS8IN L 25-A3 162-5 128-2
PS8 ALIGNMENT PLATE GND 1-A18 126-1
24V 204-B2 23-B9 24V 162-4 128-1 /UPPER HP PS
SPCH 204-B3 23-B14 SPCH GND 25-A1
SNCH 204-B4 23-B15 SNCH
/OPTION 204-B5 23-B16 /OPTION 130-3
5V 1-A8
/SHOME 204-B6 23-B17 /SHOME 129-3 130-2
5V 25-A6 PS10IN H 1-A26 PS10
PGND 204-B7 PAPER EXIT BELT 130-1
PAPER EXIT 2 PS
PS9IN L 25-A4 129-2 GND 1-A17
PGND 204-B8 23-B1 NC PS9 HP PS
GND 25-A2 129-1
23-A17 NC
[Reading the Diagrams] 5V 132-3

1-A7
1. Signal states reflect condition in which system is in normal idling state with the main switch ON. 5V 25-B8 131-3
STAPLER PS12IN 132-2 PAPER EXIT
1-A25 PS12
PS11IN 131-2 132-1 OPENING PS
2. Symbols used in circuit diagrams are as follows. L 25-B10
131-1
PS11 MOVEMENT GND 1-A16
GND 25-B12 HP PS
(1) Symbols (3) RC denotes a ribbon cable.
50-1
V V 133-3
5V 1-A6 ENTRANCE
(4) Signal Flow 5V 24-B11 134-3 PS13IN
133-2
PS13
134-2
STAPLER H 1-A24
133-1
PAPER
Connectors are indicated by circle ( ) or ( ). PS14IN L 24-B10 PS14 ROTATION GND 1-A15 DETECTION PS
GND 24-B9 134-1
The dark circles indicate the direction of the signal flow. HP PS
Connector Faston
Example:
PGC Wire (Violet) CB 5V 1-A5 138-3
Direction of signal flow: 162-3 140-3 PS18IN 138-2
5VDC 5V 25-B7 1-A23 PS18 ROLLER SHIFT HP PS
(2) Color Codes PS20IN H 25-B9
162-2 140-2
PS20 STACKER NO GND 1-A14 138-1
PS1 PS1 162-1 140-1 PAPER DETECTION PS
SGND GND 25-B11
BN : Brown B : Blue
R : Red V : Violet RB FNS CB
O : Orange GY : Gray
Y : Yellow W : White
GN : Green BK : Black
LB : Light blue P : Pink
Example: Y/GN denotes a green wire with a yellow stripe.
103-1
M3DRV-F 2-1 TRAY UP-DOWN
STAPLING&FOLDING 141-1 174-1 26-A3 5V 103-2 M3
M3DRV-R 2-2 MOTOR
141-2 174-2 26-A2 PS21IN
STOPPER RELEASE PS21 H
141-3 174-3 26-A1 GND
MOTOR HP PS
5V 3-B6 122-3
PS2IN H 3-A1 122-2 TRAY
122-1
PS2
143-3 26-B5 5V GND 3-A5 UPPER LIMIT PS
STAPLING&FOLDING PS23 143-2 26-B6 L PS23IN 24V 23-A11
104-1
STOPPER HP PS 143-1 26-B7 GND 24V 23-A12
104-2
104-3
M4DRVA P 23-A13 STAPLER ROTATION
M4DRVA P 23-A14
104-4 M4 MOTOR 5V 3-B5
123-3
104-5 PS3IN H 3-A2 123-2 TRAY LOWER
M4DRVB P 23-A15 PS3
144-3 104-6 GND 123-1 LIMIT PS
ALIGNMENT 27-3 5V M4DRVB P 23-A16 3-A6
144-2
PLATE LOWER PS24 27-2 L PS24IN
144-1 25-B2 105-1
HP PS 27-1 GND 24V
25-B1 105-2
24V
105-3 5V 3-B4 127-3
M5DRVA P 25-B6 ALIGNMENT PLATE
114-1 25-B5 105-4 M5 PS7IN L 3-A3 127-2 STAPLE PAPER UPPER
26-B4 24V M5DRVA P MOTOR/UPPER PS7
114-2
26-B3 24V M5DRVB 25-B4 105-5 GND 3-B2 127-1 LIMIT PS
P
114-3 105-6
STAPLING&FOLDING 26-A4 P M14DRVA M5DRVB P 25-B3
STOPPER MOTOR M14 114-4
26-A5 P M14DRVA
114-5 111-1
26-A6 P M14DRVB 24V 23-B7
114-6 111-2 5V 3-B3 135-3
26-A7 P M14DRVB 24V 23-B6
111-3 PS15IN H 3-A4 135-2 TRAY NO PAPER
M11DRVA P 23-B5 STAPLER MOVEMENT PS15 DETECTION PS
115-1 111-4 M11 GND 3-B1 135-1
115-2
27-4 24V M11DRVA P 23-B4
111-5
MOTOR
27-5 24V M11DRVB P 23-B3
115-3 111-6
ALIGNMENT PLATE 27-6 P M15DRVA M11DRVB P 23-B2
M15 115-4
MOTOR/LOWER 27-7 P M15DRVA
115-5 113-1
27-8 P M15DRVB 24V 25-A11
115-6 113-2
27-9 P M15DRVB M13DRVA P 25-A7
M13DRVA 25-A8
113-3 STACKER 24V 9-A5
172-1 118-1
P
STAPLING&FOLDING 117-2
26-B1 12V M13DRVB 25-A9
113-4 M13 ENTRANCE 24V 9-A6
172-2 118-2
P
STOPPER RELEASE M17 117-1
26-B2 M17DRV M13DRVB 25-A10
113-5 MOTOR M18DRVA
172-3 118-3
H P P 9-A1
MOTOR 24V 25-A12
113-6
M18DRVA P 9-A2
172-4 118-4 M18 FOLDING STOPPER MOTOR
172-5 118-5
FN-4 M18DRVB P 9-A3
172-6 118-6
M18DRVB P 9-A4
RB
171-11 119-1
M19DRVA P 8-11
171-12 119-2 M19 FOLDING KNIFE MOTOR
M19DRVB P 8-12
151-2 171-1 100-1

GATE 1-B26 H DRV 5V 8-1
SOLENOID SD1 151-1
1-B27 24V M20BRK L 8-2 171-2 100-2
M20CONT 8-3 171-3 100-3
L
M20CLK 8-4 171-4 100-4
SUB-TRAY 152-2
1-B24 H DRV M20PLL 8-5 171-5 100-5
PAPER EXIT SD2 152-1
1-B28 24V M20F/R 8-6 171-6 100-6
M20 FOLDING CONVEYANCE
SOLENOID 24V 8-7 171-7 100-7 MOTOR
24V 8-8 171-8 100-8
PAPER EXIT 154-2
1-B25 H DRV PGND 8-9 171-9 100-9
OPENING SD4 154-1
1-A4 24V PGND 8-10 171-10 100-10
SOLENOID 100-11 NC
155-2 DRV
BY-PASS 1-B23 H
SOLENOID SD5 155-1
1-A3 24V 5V 9-B12
171-18 142-3
PS22IN H 9-A7 171-17 142-2 FOLDING KNIFE
PS22 HP PS
GND 171-16 142-1
9-B6
FA 1B 29-2 24V-IN
6-1
INTERLOCK MS1
FA 1A 29-1 5V 175-1 145-3
9-B11
PS25IN H 9-A8 175-2 145-2
PS25 FOLDING EXIT PS
GND 175-3 145-1
9-B5
753-1 5V 171-13 146-3

24V 28-6 9-B4
753-2 6-3 PS26IN H 9-A9 171-14 146-2 FOLDING PASSAGE
5V 2-9 5V PS26 DETECTION PS/2
753-3 6-4 GND 171-15 146-1
SGND 2-7 SGND 9-B10
753-4 6-5 PGND
PGND 28-3
753-5 6-6 PGND
PGND 28-1
753-6 5V 172-9 147-3
6-2 NC 9-B9
PS27IN L 9-A10
172-8 147-2
PS27 FOLDING
752-1
7-1 GND 9-B3
172-7 147-1 STOPPER HP PS
TXD 114-1 P RXD
752-2
NC 7-2 SGND
752-3
DTR 114-2 7-3 P CTS
752-4 5V 172-12 148-3
NC 7-4 SGND 9-B8
752-5 PS28IN H 9-A11 172-11 148-2 FOLDING PASSAGE
CTS 114-5 7-5 P DTR PS28 DETECTION PS/1
752-6 GND 172-10 148-1
NC 7-6 SGND 9-B2
752-7
RXD 114-3 7-7 P TXD
752-8
NC 7-8 SGND
752-9 5V 175-4 149-3
DSR 114-7 7-9 P RTS 9-B7
752-10 PS29IN H 9-A12 175-5 149-2
NC 7-10 SGND PS29 FOLDING FILL UP PS
752-11 GND 175-6 149-1
RTS 114-6 7-11 P DSR 9-B1
752-12
NC 7-12 SGND FN-4
MAIN BODY
FNS CB
51-A1 H PS201 IN
51-A2 H PS202 IN
51-A3 L PS203 IN
51-A4 H PS204 IN
51-A5 L PS205 IN
51-A6 L PS206 IN
51-A7 NC
51-A8 L PS208 IN
51-A9 L PS209 IN
51-A10 VR1 IN
51-A11 5V
51-A12 LED1
51-A13 LED2
51-A14 LED3
51-A15 LED4
51-A16 LED5
51-A17 SW1
51-A18 SW2
51-A19 GND
51-A20 M201 CONT
51-A21 M201 F/R
51-A22 H MC201 CONT
51-A23 H SD201 CONT
51-A24 SEET SET
Cover Inserter A 51-A25 NC
51-B1 SGND
51-B2 24V
51-B3 PGND
51-B4 GND
51-B5 GND
51-B6 GND
51-B7 NC
51-B8 GND
51-B9 GND
51-B10 GND
51-B11 GND
51-B12 GND
51-B13 GND
51-B14 5V
51-B15 NC
51-B16 5V
51-B17 5V
51-B18 5V
51-B19 NC
51-B20 5V
51-B21 5V
51-B22 5V
51-B23 5V
51-B24 5V
51-B25 5V
OPTION FNS CB
FN-104/FN-4 CONTROL-BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/9)
NOT
EXIST
NOT EXIST
NOT
EXIST
By-pass condensers for each ICs
FN-104/FN-4 CONNECTOR-BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
FN-104/FN-4 TIMING CHART (SORT MODE, A4, 2-PAGE ORIGINAL, 5 COPIES, 1:1 RATIO)
Time (seconds)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Item
PS18 Roller-Shift HP PS
M2 Roller-Shift Motor
PS10 Paper Exit-2 PS
PS2 Tray Upper-Limit PS
UP
DOWN
FN-104/FN-4 TIMING CHART (2-STAPLE MODE, A4, 2-PAGE ORIGINAL, 3 COPIES, 1:1 RATIO)
Time (seconds)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Item
PS6 Paper Exit-1 PS
UP
DOWN
SD5 Bypass Solenoid
PS8 Alignment-Plate Upper HP PS
M21,M22 Stapler/R
M23,M24 Stapler/F
M11 Stapler Movement Motor
M4 Stapler Rotation Motor
SD1 Gate Solenoid

FN-104/FN-4 TIMING CHART (STAPLING AND FOLDING, A4R, 3-PAGE ORIGINAL, 2 COPIES, 1:1 RATIO, 1-1 MODE)
Time (seconds)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Item
UP
DOWN
M15 Alignment-Plate/Lower Motor
M21, M22 Stapler/R
M23, M24 Stapler/F
Stapling and Folding Set

M17
Stopper Release Motor Release
M14 Stapling and Folding Stopper Motor
M18 Folding Stopper Motor
M20 Folding Conveyance Motor
M19 Folding-Knife Motor
PS28 Folding Passage PS/1
PS25 Folding Paper-Exit PS

FN-104/FN-4 TIMING CHART (SORT MODE, 8.5X11, 2-PAGE ORIGINAL, 5 COPIES, 1:1 RATIO)
Time (seconds)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Item
PS18 Roller-Shift HP PS
M2 Roller-Shift Motor
PS10 Paper Exit-2 PS
PS2 Tray Upper-Limit PS
UP
DOWN
FN-104/FN-4 TIMING CHART (2-STAPLE MODE, 8.5X11, 2-PAGE ORIGINAL, 3 COPIES, 1:1 RATIO)
Time (seconds)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Item
PS6 Paper Exit-1 PS
UP
DOWN
SD5 Bypass Solenoid
PS8 Alignment-Plate Upper HP PS
M21,M22 Stapler/R
M23,M24 Stapler/F
M11 Stapler Movement Motor
M4 Stapler Rotation Motor
SD1 Gate Solenoid

FN-104/FN-4 TIMING CHART (STAPLING AND FOLDING, 8.5X11, 3-PAGE ORIGINAL, 2 COPIES, 1:1 RATIO, 1-1 MODE)
Time (seconds)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Item
UP
DOWN
M15 Alignment-Plate/Lower Motor
M21, M22 Stapler/R
M23, M24 Stapler/F
Stapling and Folding Set

M17
Stopper Release Motor Release
M14 Stapling and Folding Stopper Motor
M18 Folding Stopper Motor
M20 Folding Conveyance Motor
M19 Folding-Knife Motor
PS28 Folding Passage PS/1
PS25 Folding Paper-Exit PS

C-305 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
LT
LT FEED DRIVE 766-1-2 723-3 24VDC 5VDC 722-A1 746-1 TOP COVER
MC101 766-2-1
CLUTCH 723-4 H MC101 DRIVE PS100 L 722-A4 746-2 PS100 OPEN/CLOSE
SGND 722-A7 746-3 DETECTION
SENSOR
765-1-2 723-5 24VDC

LT FIRST PAPER FEED MC102 765-2-1 723-6 MC102 DRIVE 5VDC 722-A2
CLUTCH H 745-1 LT TRAY
PS101 H 722--A6 745-2 PS101 LOWER LIMIT
SENSOR
767-1-2 773-3 723-7 24VDC

LT FIRST PAPER FEED SD100 766-2-1 773-4 723-8 H SD100 DRIVE LT
SOLENOID
5VDC 722-A3 780-1 REMAINING
PS102 722-A5 780-2 PS102 PAPER
SENSOR
749-2
1
LT UP/DOWN 723-1 M100 DRIVE 1
DRIVE MOTOR M100
749-1 723-2 M100 DRIVE 2 LT
5VDC 722B8 781-1 REMAINING
PS103 722-B5 781-2 PS103 PAPER
SGND 722-B2 781-3 DETECTION
SENSOR
MS101 2
LT
720-1 24VDC
INTERLOCK
MS1 LT
5VDC 722-B9 782-1 REMAINING
PS104 722-B6 782-2 PS104 PAPER
MS102 SGND 722-B3 782-3 DETECTION
LT
INTERLOCK SENSOR
MS2 3
LT
762-1 PAPER
PS105 722-B7 783-2 PS105
762-2 720-2 M101 CONT SGND 722-B4 783-3 DETECTION
H
[How to see the diagram] LT PAPER FEED M101 762-3 720-3 H M101 EM SENSOR
MOTOR 762-4
1.The signals shown reflect levels present 720-4 PGND 4
the main switch turned ON. 773-5
LT
5VDC 721-1 740-3 FEED
773-6
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows. 761-1
PS106 H 721-2
773-12
740-2 PS106 DETECTION
LT INTERNAL SGND 721-3 740-1
(1) [Symbol] HEATER HTR101 761-2 SENSOR
50-1
V V
LT FIRST PAPER
Connector Faston 741-3
773-7 FEED
PS107 H 721-3 741-2 PS107
Crimp Wire(Violet)
741-1
DETECTION
SENSOR
(2) [Color code]
BN - Brown B - Blue
R - Red V - Violet
LT NO
O - Orange GY - Gray 773-8
742-1 PAPER
PS108 L 721-4 742-2 PS108
Y - Yellow W - White DETECTION
742-3
SENSOR
GN - Green BK - Black
LT DB
HTR101 CONT 751-6
Example: Y/GN represents AC(H) 751-5
LT TRAY
744-1
green yellow striped pattern. 773-9 UPPER LIMIT
24VDC 751-1 700-1 PS109 L 721-5 744-2 PS109
DETECTION
(3) RC is ribbon cable. PGND 751-4 700-2 744-3
5VDC 751-2 700-3 SENSOR
(4) Signal flow SGND 751-3 700-4
the connector symbols ( ) 750-2-9 710-A1 5VDC LT JAM
750-4-7 710-A2 SGND 747-1 ACCESS DOOR
indicates the direction of signal flow. LT TXD P 750-1-10 710-A3 PS110 L 721-6
773-10 747-2 PS110 OPEN/CLOSE
750-6-5 710-A5 P LT RXD CLK 747-3 DETECTION
Example) LT TXD LATCH P 850-5-6 710-A7
Direction of SENSOR
LT TXD CLK P 750-3-8 710-A9
CB signal flow LT ERR P 750-7-4 710-B2
5VDC 750-8-3 710-B4 P LT RXD
PS1 SW100
PS1 LT ACK P 750-9-2 710-B6
SGND 750-10-1 773-11 748-1
710-B8 P LT REQ SW100 H 721-7 DOWN DRIVE
MAIN BODY
748-2 SWITCH
C-305 / C-305L OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
LT
LT FEED DRIVE 766-1-2 723-3 24VDC 5VDC 722-A1 746-1 TOP COVER
MC101 766-2-1
CLUTCH 723-4 H MC101 DRIVE PS100 L 722-A4 746-2 PS100 OPEN/CLOSE
SENSOR
765-1-2 723-5 24VDC

LT FIRST PAPER FEED MC102 765-2-1 723-6 MC102 DRIVE 5VDC 722-A2
CLUTCH H 745-1 LT TRAY
PS101 H 722--A6 745-2 PS101 LOWER LIMIT
SENSOR
767-1-2 773-3 723-7 24VDC

LT FIRST PAPER FEED SD100 766-2-1 773-4 723-8 H SD100 DRIVE LT
SOLENOID
5VDC 722-A3 780-1 REMAINING
PS102 722-A5 780-2 PS102 PAPER
SENSOR
749-2
1
LT UP/DOWN 723-1 M100 DRIVE 1
DRIVE MOTOR M100
749-1 723-2 M100 DRIVE 2 LT
5VDC 722B8 781-1 REMAINING
PS103 722-B5 781-2 PS103 PAPER
SGND 722-B2 781-3 DETECTION
SENSOR
MS101 2
LT
720-1 24VDC
INTERLOCK
MS1 LT
PS104 722-B6 782-2 PS104 PAPER
MS102 SGND 722-B3 782-3 DETECTION
LT
INTERLOCK SENSOR
MS2 3
LT
762-1 PAPER
PS105 722-B7 783-2 PS105
762-2 720-2 M101 CONT SGND 722-B4 783-3 DETECTION
H
[How to see the diagram] LT PAPER FEED M101 762-3 720-3 H M101 EM SENSOR
MOTOR 762-4
1.The signals shown reflect levels present 720-4 PGND 4
the main switch turned ON. 773-5
LT
5VDC 721-1 740-3 FEED
773-6
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows. 761-1
PS106 H 721-2
773-12
740-2 PS106 DETECTION
LT INTERNAL SGND 721-3 740-1
(1) [Symbol] HEATER HTR101 761-2 SENSOR
50-1
V V
LT FIRST PAPER
Connector Faston 741-3
773-7 FEED
PS107 H 721-3 741-2 PS107
Crimp Wire(Violet)
741-1
DETECTION
SENSOR
(2) [Color code]
BN - Brown B - Blue
R - Red V - Violet
LT NO
O - Orange GY - Gray 773-8
742-1 PAPER
PS108 L 721-4 742-2 PS108
Y - Yellow W - White DETECTION
742-3
SENSOR
GN - Green BK - Black
LT DB
HTR101 CONT 751-6
Example: Y/GN represents AC(H) 751-5
LT TRAY
744-1
green yellow striped pattern. 773-9 UPPER LIMIT
24VDC 751-1 700-1 PS109 L 721-5 744-2 PS109
DETECTION
(3) RC is ribbon cable. PGND 751-4 700-2 744-3
5VDC 751-2 700-3 SENSOR
(4) Signal flow SGND 751-3 700-4
the connector symbols ( ) 750-2-9 710-A1 5VDC LT JAM
750-4-7 710-A2 SGND 747-1 ACCESS DOOR
indicates the direction of signal flow. LT TXD P 750-1-10 710-A3 PS110 L 721-6
773-10 747-2 PS110 OPEN/CLOSE
750-6-5 710-A5 P LT RXD CLK 747-3 DETECTION
Example) LT TXD LATCH P 850-5-6 710-A7
Direction of
SENSOR
LT TXD CLK P 750-3-8 710-A9
CB signal flow LT ERR P 750-7-4 710-B2
5VDC 750-8-3 710-B4 P LT RXD
PS1 SW100
PS1 LT ACK P 750-9-2 710-B6
SGND 750-10-1 773-11 748-1
710-B8 P LT REQ SW100 H 721-7 DOWN DRIVE
MAIN BODY
748-2 SWITCH
C305043e.p65 3 00/10/09, 10:46

TMG-1 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

1.The signals shown reflect levels present (3) RC is the flat cable.
under normal idling conditions with (4) Signal flow
the main switch turned ON. The solid black circle ( ) among
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows. the connector symbols ( )
(1) [Symbol] indicates the direction of signal flow.
50-1 Example)
Direction of
CB signal flow
5VDC
Connector Faston
PS1 PS1
Crimp Relay connector SGND
(2) Signal types are as follows:
H Active high
L Active low
Analog signal
P Pulse signal
TMG043e.p65 3 00/10/09, 11:55

Copyright
2000 MINOLTA Co., Ltd.
Use of this manual should

be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of
confidential information.
MINOLTA Co., Ltd. 4014-7991-11 0004

13430

Service Manual DI4750

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual DI4750

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Di750

4 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST

Gate ........................................................... 1-113 [8] Rewriting procedure after an error

[20] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the Stacker

[11] Paper Exit Section ....................................... 4-14

4 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST

HOW TO USE THIS SECTION

1. Check whether the power supply voltage meets

When servicing the machine, observe the following

1. Only either side of the AC line is shut off when

ADJUSTMENTS MADE WHEN REPLACING PARTS

[How to Read Tables]

LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

19 RADF restart timing

SETTINGS AND MODE CHANGING

This section explains the checks that can be performed

[1] Selecting and Cancelling the P

For functions of individual software DIP switches,

< List of Software Switches >

Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5

* 15 Fixing upper roller initial rotation * 18 Copy count limit

Mode 13-6 13-5

* 25 WT summer time setting [3] Setting the Tray Size

2. Setting the nonstandard size [4] PM Count Resetting

[6] Collecting Data 3. Viewing Collected Data 5 to Collected

4. Details on Display Data

(2) Copy count by fixed part

NO Part name Maximum count Counting condition

NO Part name Maximum count Counting condition

11 Transfer/separation corona unit 99999999 25DIPSW8-6

NO Part name Maximum count Counting condition

20 Transfer/separation corona unit 99999999 25DIPSW8-6

NO Part name Maximum count Counting condition

29 Developer 99999999 25DIPSW8-6

NO Part name Maximum count Counting condition

NO Part name Maximum count Counting condition

70 ADF torque limiter 99999999 Number of originals passes in all modes

NO Part name Maximum count Counting condition

Note: Definition of large-size originals in terms of part counting.

(3) Copy count by arbitrary part

NO Item Contents Remarks

(4) ADF paper passage count

(5) Jam occurrence count

Description of jam Jam

Description of jam Jam

(6) Copy count by copy mode

1 1-1 mode 99999999 All counters are 8-digit

43 Fixed magnification E2 99999999 All counters are 8-digit

88 Numbering (not used for the present) 99999999

98 WUP time 99999999 Total period of time dur-

105 APS sensor ON time 99999999 Total period of time during

(7) SC count / Local count

1 13 1 Paper feed MT EM 9999 All counters are 4-

78 34 3 Fixing upper roller high 9999

117 46 15 Expansion device access error 9999

159 53 8 Printer control 12V detection 9999

201 77 41 Sheet feeder up motor driving error 9999

1. When an SC occurs, the associated counter is incremented by 1.

[7] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced

[List of Parts to be replaced]

[List of Parts to be replaced]

[List of Parts to be replaced]

[8] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced

1. Resetting the Copy Count by Parts to be